If there’s one food guaranteed to unite people, it’s pizza. From fussy eaters to those with dietary requirements, there’s a pizza recipe to please. Which is one of the reasons why pizza ovens have soared in popularity over the last few years. So when I was offered the Ooni Koda 16 gas pizza oven to review, I suddenly found myself more popular than ever.

Four months in and the Ooni Koda 16 has been worth its weight in gold, whether we’re entertaining or just need a last-minute family meal, this outdoor pizza oven comes to the rescue. Even though I’ve tested the oven in cold weather, it hasn’t deterred us from using it. In fact, we had pizza four times this week at the request of three sets of visiting friends and our rather persuasive five-year-old.

If you’re searching for the best pizza oven for your alfresco kitchen, then the Ooni Koda 16 definitely deserves your consideration. Read on to find out how I found everything from setting it up to nailing the cooking process.

Ooni Koda 16 gas pizza oven: key product specifications

• Fuel type: Propane gas cylinder
• Gas connector: 37mBar patio gas regulator and hose included
• Dimensions: 63 x 58 x 37cm
• Weight: 18.2kg
• Oven temperature: Reaches 500˚C (950˚F) in 20 minutes
• Pizza size: 16 inch pizzas
• Pizza cooking time: 60 seconds
• Use: outdoor only

Unboxing the Ooni Koda 16 pizza oven

At 18.2kg, the Ooni Koda 16 arrived in a fairly hefty box that left me worrying there would be 100 pieces inside that needed assembling (I still have nightmares about our last BBQ). Luckily, my fears were unfounded and the pizza oven was in fact ready assembled. All I needed to do was slot in the pizza stone and pop up the three legs, which fold down for easy storage.

Packaging was sleek and minimal, with only one piece of plastic bubble wrap – to protect the fragile pizza stone – that couldn’t go in my kerbside recycling. A handily located QR code prompted me to download the Ooni app, which contains hints for cooking, as well as a host of recipes.

I was impressed by how sleek and modern the Koda is. It would look the part in the most contemporary of outdoor kitchens and got admiring comments from everybody who saw it. My five-year-old daughter thinks it looks like a space ship and she’s not entirely wrong. 

You’ll need a few accessories before you’re ready to start cooking, none of which are included. I got a 16in metal perforated pizza peel from Ooni for sliding the pizzas in and out of the oven, and a wooden peel, also from Ooni, for serving. 

You can also buy an Ooni infrared thermometer and an Ooni Koda 16 cover, both of which would come in handy but add to the cost of what is already an investment buy.

Getting started

An instruction manual explains where you should position the oven and gives some essential safety instructions on how to use a pizza oven too. We’re renovating our house and don’t have an alfresco kitchen yet, so we settled on a sturdy cast-iron table to stand it on. Obviously, plastic or glass surfaces are a no-go because of the temperatures the oven reaches. Ooni recommends choosing a sheltered spot that’s 3ft (1m) away from plants or structures. The manual also advises that it should ideally be placed on stone, marble or stainless-steel surfaces.

A separate leaflet outlines how to attach the hose and regulator that are included with the Ooni Koda 16 to your gas cylinder. This proved much easier than I was expecting – you literally hold down a button and clip the connector to the cylinder. The instructions explain how to use water and dish soap to test the hose and connectors for any gas leaks before firing it up, which you should do every time you use the oven.

Once the Ooni Koda was in position and connected to the gas, it’s simply a matter of pressing in and turning the ignition knob. It’s like a gas hob in a kitchen in that you hear a click as the oven ignites and need to keep the knob compressed for a few seconds while the flame gets established. 

I left the oven to heat up for 30 minutes before the first use, which is what Ooni advises. After that, I’d wait 20 minutes each time for it to get up to temperature. 

My biggest issue with the Ooni Koda is that you’re meant to allow it to reach the correct pizza oven temperature of 500˚C (950˚F) before cooking, but there’s no built-in temperature gauge. I’ve popped the Ooni infrared thermometer on my wishlist but in the meantime I’ve worked out that it takes 20 minutes for flames to start rolling up the roof of the oven, which seems to be peak pizza cooking time.

What's it like to use the Ooni Koda 16 gas pizza oven?

I once ate 17 pizzas in 14 days on a trip to Italy but I’ve never actually made pizza myself – mainly because I never think you can achieve that delicious thin, crispy, slightly charred base at home. Anyway, because I’m a novice pizza chef, I decided to use Ooni’s readymade sourdough pizza balls, which come chilled and can be frozen, for consistency.

Once the Ooni Koda 16 has been heating up for 20 mins, I flour up the pizza peel to stop the base sticking, and then quickly stretch out the dough by hand. It’s important to do this rather than rolling it as you keep the air in and get those lovely bubbles on the crust.

You need to prepare one pizza at a time in this way to make sure they don’t stick. Then you use a flick of the wrist to launch it into the pizza oven. The L-shaped flame in the Ooni Koda runs along the left-hand side and back of the pizza oven, so the back-left is the hottest part of the pizza stone. I start my pizzas back there, leave for 20 seconds and then use the peel to rotate the pizza 90 degrees to crisp up the other side. After another 20 seconds, I move the pizza around again and drag it to the front-right of the oven, where it’s slightly cooler, to finish cooking through. 

It takes a couple of goes to perfect the technique but once you do it becomes second nature. I found that 16-inch pizzas take a little longer than 60 seconds to cook through, but no more than 120, so it’s a balancing act to make sure the crust doesn’t burn. 

We’ve cooked everything from vegan pizza to dessert pizza (chocolate spread and bananas – try it!) and I’d say my top tips are to get the base as thin as possible and not overload it with toppings as they can make the base go soggy quickly post-cooking. The oven seems to maintain its temperature pretty well but I’ve found it’s best to wait 3-4 minutes between pizzas to make sure it’s back to full temperature each time.

Cleaning the oven

If you're concerned that cleaning a pizza oven will be a tedious task, fear not. The Ooni Koda 16 gas pizza oven is as easy to keep clean as it is to set up, which is a godsend after hosting a pizza party when you just want to put your feet up. Simply wait for it to cool down, which takes up to three hours as it’s so big, and then use a firm brush to remove any flour or residue from the pizza stone.

The instructions say that the outside can become discolored after repeated use but ours is still looking good after four months. I give it a quick wipe with a damp cloth after each use and then we store it in a brick outbuilding with the gas canister disconnected. 

Optional extras

I mentioned that the Ooni Koda 16 is like the Ferrari of pizza ovens… and the list of optional extras is similar to that of a supercar (I imagine!). As well as the aforementioned thermometer, which would be super handy for checking you’ve reached optimum temperature before and between pizzas, there’s everything from wooden serving peels to cast-iron griddle pans. 

These would be a great addition if you're keen to explore what else you can cook in a pizza oven, and want to give everything from meat to veg a go. My normal oven pans wouldn’t be able to withstand the temperatures of the Ooni Koda, so I’ve popped one of these on my holiday sales wish list.

As well as accessories for the oven, you can also buy the sourdough pizza balls I mentioned, which are perfect for popping in the freezer and defrosting the night before a party, and boxes of Ooni pizza dough mix to ensure you get the base just right. 

How does the Ooni Koda 16 pizza oven rate? 

Before testing the Ooni Koda 16 gas pizza oven, I wasn’t convinced we’d get much use out of it. The idea of standing outside cooking pizza in the middle of winter didn’t seem that appealing. But one test drive in and I was hooked. It’s so easy to set up and use that we get it out at any opportunity. It now provides my daughters with their favorite dinner and is more popular among our friends and family than we are. Even our plasterers gave it the thumbs up.

But you don’t need to just take my word for it. There are more than 700 positive reviews for the Ooni Koda 16 on Ooni’s website and they give it an average rating of 4.8 out of 5, which is exactly where I’d put it. 

I especially love the Great Pizza Guarantee, which means that if you can’t make tasty pizzas on the Ooni Koda within 60 days of having it, you can return it for a refund. So there’s basically nothing to lose. You also get a three-year manufacturers warranty, for peace of mind.

As one of the larger Ooni models, the Ooni Koda 16 gas oven is at the pricier end of pizza oven models so it’s definitely an investment buy, but one that is well worth it after testing it out. If you are happy to cook 12in pizzas instead, you might want to consider the smaller (and less expensive) Ooni Koda 12 gas pizza oven instead. And if you like the idea of a more traditional wood-fired oven, then the Ooni Fyra or the multi-fuel Ooni Karu 12, both of which we've reviewed and rated on Gardeningetc, are certainly worth a look. 

There's no doubt, however, that the Ooni Koda 16 is a pizza oven you will turn to at all times of year for family meals and when entertaining. In fact, we love it so much that we’re designing our entire outdoor kitchen around it.

If there’s one thing that’s become the must-have garden accessory in the last couple of years, it’s outdoor ovens like the Ooni Fyra pizza oven. 

With the rise in popularity of outdoor kitchens, the desire for having the best pizza oven in your alfresco kitchen setup shows no sign of slowing down either. So when I got the opportunity to road test the Ooni Fyra wood pellet pizza oven back in the summer of 2020, I jumped at the chance to see if having our own pizza oven in the garden really would be as much fun as I thought it would be. 

Since then, I've lost count of the number of times we've enjoyed firing up the oven and making pizzas outdoors as a family. More than two years on, this brilliant buy is a firm fixture in our outdoor set-up and we've definitely perfected the art of using it having cooked around 100 pizzas in it so far! 

It's not just been used on hot, sunny days in the summer either (those can be few and far between at times in the UK). We've enjoyed pizza party nights in winter under the glow of fairy lights, and even fired it up on a Saturday evening in the rain simply because we really fancied eating homemade pizza that night. 

So keep reading to find out how we've got on with this portable oven over the last two years. 

Ooni Fyra pizza oven product specifications

• Fuel type: wood pellets
• Dimensions: H72.6xW39.4xD71.6cm
• Weight: 10kg
• Oven temperature: Reaches 500˚C (950˚F) in just 15 minutes
• Pizza size: 12 inch pizzas
• Pizza cooking time: 60 seconds
• Use: outdoor use only

Ooni Fyra pizza oven: first impressions

The pizza oven arrived in a compact box that was really easy to carry out to the garden. I was impressed by how small the packaging was and couldn’t believe there was an entire pizza oven inside.

When I first unpacked the Ooni Fyra, I was surprised by how small it looked but this has definitely turned out to be its main advantage. It’s incredibly lightweight and portable, plus it’s small enough to sit perfectly on top of our raised planting table, which also doubles up as an outdoor kitchen worktop space when we have BBQs.

It also takes up minimal space in the shed (always a plus point when it's already crammed to the rafters), so we can easily store it when not in use. If you don’t have storage space, you can also buy a Fyra pizza oven cover from Ooni to fit this particular oven. The cover also has carry handles, so you could easily take this to the beach, a friend’s house or even on camping trips too.

I also received a bag of Ooni Premium hardwood pellets and a 12″ pizza peel to help us get started.

Getting started

Assembling the Ooni Fyra pizza oven was incredibly simple. As someone who has zero patience when it comes to following assembly instructions (my Ikea flatpack meltdowns are fairly legendary in our house), this couldn’t have been more straightforward.

You simply remove the main body of the oven from the box and then unfold the legs which support the main part of the oven. The grate is then inserted before you slide the pizza stone into the base of the oven. The main chimney (the taller section at the front) then slots together and you lock it into place, and then the fuel hopper (the smaller cylinder at the back) is slotted in. Finally the door and chimney cap go on and you're good to go. 

Unboxing everything, reading the instructions and setting it up took no more than 10 minutes – impressive stuff. 

Lighting the Ooni Fyra pizza oven

Ooni recommends that the best spot for your pizza oven is an area sheltered from wind and 3ft (1m) away from structures for best results. The manual also advises that it should be placed on wooden, stone, marble or stainless steel surfaces. 

With this in mind, I placed ours on a raised wooden table on our patio space. It's a fairly sheltered spot, bordered on two sides by a garden wall and fence, so definitely tucked away from the worst of the wind. 

To get started, you first need to remove the chimney cap. Next, remove the grate and fill it with hardwood pellets. I followed the guidelines and used about two handfuls to get started. You then add a firelighter to the front of the grate (I used the Ooni firelighters, which we had been provided with), light it and push the grate into the back of the pizza oven.

You can keep checking to see how well it's burning using the viewing hole in the door of the oven. Once the first set of pellets are ignited and burning well, you can gradually add more pellets to the fuel hopper on top of the oven, until the hopper is full. The hopper automatically feeds the pellet into the oven, so there's no need to push them down. You do need to make sure you regularly top up the hopper when you're cooking to maintain the oven temperature. A full hopper of pellets lasts around 15 minutes. 

With no built-in thermometer, it's a bit of guess work as to when the pizza oven is up to the top temperature and ready for cooking, but I found that in most weather conditions 15 minutes was long enough for it to get up to heat.  A good indication of it being ready is to check through the viewing hole and if you can see rolling flames (where the flames reach up and along the roof of the oven), it's ready for cooking. 

There is the option of buying an Ooni infrared thermometer if you want to be 100 per cent sure of when it's up to the correct pizza oven temperature, but although this might be a good gadget to have, I don't feel it's essential for you to enjoy cooking pizzas in the oven. After a couple of times using the oven, I was able to have a good idea of when it was hot enough.  

Cooking pizza in the Ooni Fyra

Before cooking pizzas in the Ooni Fyra I ran it for 30 minutes at high temperatures and allowed it to cool down, before wiping the inside with dry kitchen towel. Ooni says this is important to do when using a pizza oven for the first time in order to remove any residues from the manufacturing process. 

With this done, the following evening we were ready to get cooking! My husband made a big batch of pizza dough and we turned our garden table into a pizza making space. We've regularly made our own pizzas before (although we usually have to cook them in indoors in our main oven), so we know that the best trick is to keep the base nice and thin and not overload the pizza with toppings if you want to get that lovely crispy finish. 

Once the dough was rolled out, I placed the base on the pizza peel before adding the toppings. You need to make sure the peel is really well floured to avoid your pizza base sticking to it. Add your chosen toppings (go light on the tomato base if you don't want a soggy pizza). 

We've found this is the part of the process that the kids love to get involved with too. Once the base is on the peel they'll add their choice of toppings. It's a great way to get them to try new tastes too, and they've definitely got more adventurous with their toppings since we've been cooking outdoors in the Fyra.

With your toppings added, you can simply slide your pizza into the oven. 

There's definitely a knack to doing this to ensure you get the pizza off the peel in one piece without losing your toppings (and patience). Gently shuffling it off the peel is the best way and you soon get the knack of it after a few tries. 

I'll be honest and say that the first few pizzas didn't turn out as I'd hoped. I found that they were a little burnt on one half and not cooked properly on the other – the kids were less than impressed by the first ones we served up. 

Reading the guidelines again (always a good idea to do this properly before you cook obviously), I worked out that we needed to rotate the pizza in the oven after 20 or 30 seconds to make sure it cooked evenly. Problem solved and I was soon churning out beautifully cooked, delicious pizzas that were ready in around 60-90 seconds. These ones definitely got a big thumbs up from the kids. 

I found that the pizza oven maintained its temperature really well, as long as I kept it topped up with pellets during cooking. I was able to take one pizza out, put the door back on, prep the next pizza and put it straight in to cook without any problems. There was no need to wait for a prolonged period for the oven to heat up again. 

If you want to increase the heat inside the Ooni Fyra, you can simply adjust the chimney vent. By opening the vent and ensuring the chimney cap is removed, it will naturally increase the airflow inside the body of the oven and as a result boost the internal temperature. 

One thing to watch out for is that if you are removing the door on the oven to turn the pizza or remove it, a slight gust of wind can cause a small backdraft, and flames will flick out of the rear of the oven. There's no concern to anyone at the front of the oven who is cooking pizzas, but you might want to make sure the rear of the oven is pointed away from where children in particular could walk past. 

How easy is it to clean the Ooni Fyra pizza oven?

There's very little to do when it comes to cleaning the Ooni Fyra – another great selling point. Once the oven has cooled down after use (which can take a couple of hours), you simply remove the grate and empty the ash from it. I also tend to wipe the pizza stone with dry kitchen towel to remove any food residue. The exterior can be wiped down with a wet cloth and soapy water. And that's it really! It really requires minimal effort. 

You do need to wait for the oven to cool down completely before storing it or placing the cover on it. For a full clean, Ooni advises that you run the Fyra at full temperature for 30 minutes to burn off any excess food. 

After two years of use, our Fyra still looks in great condition and we've had no problems with keeping it clean or it not working properly.  

Optional extras

As well as a pizza oven cover, pizza peels and serving boards, there's just about every Ooni-branded pizza oven accessory you could imagine to go with your Ooni Fyra. From thermometers and pizza oven stands to pizza cutters and even topping stations with compartments for all your favorite toppings, the list is pretty impressive. 

These pizza oven accessories can quickly add to the cost of your pizza oven though, so although they are great additions to your outdoor cooking setup if you have the budget, they're not all essential. 

I would definitely recommend you invest in a good pizza peel though as it would be pretty impossible to cook a pizza in the oven without one. I'm also planning to buy a second one this Black Friday thanks to the discounts on offer to make it easier to set up a bit of a pizza production line. Not necessary when you're just cooking for a family of four, but when catering for more than that you might find it helpful to be able to prep a pizza on the additional peel while you're using the other peel to get the first pizza in and out of the oven. 

We've also replenished the wood pellets for the pizza oven, choosing to stick with the Ooni-branded hardwood pellets we were originally sent as they worked so well. A large 10kg bag of pellets (from Ooni) lasts us a long time, so there's no need to worry about how much it costs to run a pizza oven once you've bought it. 

How does the Ooni Fyra pizza oven rate?

Reading some of the nearly 2,000 reviews of the Ooni Fyra on the Ooni website gives a pretty good indication that lots of people love this portable pizza oven as much as I do. Most people comment on how easy it is to set up, what good quality materials it's made from and how portable it is. It's clear that people are also really impressed by the quality of the pizzas it cooks. 

I couldn't agree more with this as I can't rate this pizza oven highly enough. It's definitely convinced me that pizza ovens are worth it and they aren't an impulse buy that you won't use much. 

This type of pizza oven is easy to put together, takes up minimal space and is lightweight enough to easily move it to where you want in your backyard. Even if you only have a small patio or balcony, this would be a great buy, and the wood pellets don't take up much storage space either. It's easy to cook with too, and before long you'll be happily cooking your favorite pizza oven recipes with ease. 

If you think you might prefer the ease of cooking with gas, we've also reviewed the multi-fuel Ooni Karu on Gardeningetc, which offers you the flexibility of cooking with either wood or charcoal or gas. It's slightly more expensive than the Fyra, and you will need to buy an additional gas attachment too, but our reviewer was also impressed by how easy it was to use and the quality of pizzas it produced.

Alternatively, the Ooni Koda just cooks with gas, so if you haven't got space to store fuel and like the idea of a small, portable oven like the Fyra, this one could be the one for you. It also comes in a bigger size for cooking 16in pizzas.

Don't be fooled by the Fyra's diminutive size, however, as this pizza oven is more than capable of delivering delicious pizzas that are just as good as those from your favorite pizza restaurant. 

It's been a fabulous addition to our outdoor entertaining setup since we first started using it two years ago, and we use it just as regularly as we did when we first got it. The kids are already planning plenty more pizza party nights throughout the year, so we'll be firing it up again soon!

Greenworks might be one of the lesser-known brands of gardening tools, certainly compared to companies such as Bosch, or Stihl in the UK, but, like more well-known brands, they offer an extensive range of tools and gardening tools powered by their own 24V, 40V and 60V batteries. Interestingly, Greenworks actually started out making battery-powered tools, rather than moving into the area from mains electricity or petrol power. 

This model is the Greenworks G24HT56 cordless hedge trimmer, powered by Greenworks’ proprietary 24V battery and offers a 56cm cutting bar. This model is the smallest hedge trimmer in the Greenworks range and is aimed at users with smaller gardens and less demanding hedge-trimming needs. We expect that for a lot of people this will their first battery-powered hedge trimmer, if not their first hedge trimmer. 

But how did this good-value buy stack up against some of the other best hedge trimmers on our list?

Greenworks G24HT56 cordless hedge trimmer: key product specs

• Weight: 2kg
• Dimensions: 92.5x20x17.5cm
• Power category: 24V
• Motor: Brushed
• Runtime: with 2.0AH battery, up to 25 mins
• Runtime: with 4.0AH battery, up to 50 mins
• Blade length: 56cm
• Cutting capacity: 18mm
• Blade type: Dual-action blades
• Blade material: Laser-cut, diamond-ground steel blades
• Rotating rear handle: Yes
• Warranty: 3 years

First impressions

The Greenworks G24HT56 cordless hedge trimmer comes in a well-presented box that really makes use of the green in Greenworks in its graphic design. Photography on the box shows you the unit inside and the box is adorned with graphics explaining the varying features such as noise level and cutting width. 

Interestingly, the box also shows the rest of the tools Greenworks supply to work on the same battery system. The number currently runs at 24 but, considering the competition in this market, we would not be surprised if that number expanded over the next few years.

Like many other hedge trimmers, the packaging is shaped to fit so there is very little space or excess packaging. Upon opening the box, you are greeted with the trimmer (with blade guard), a battery, a charger and quite a lot of paperwork. There is no assembly required at all with the product but you will need to charge the battery before you can use it. 

The first impression you get from the hedge trimmer is that it is a solid, if slightly budget-feeling piece of equipment. The plastics feel a bit scratchy and they do look like they will mark up easily. However, nothing feels flimsy or poor quality and I had no worries about anything breaking as soon as we used it. It is pretty obvious that this hedge trimmer is not designed for toughest jobs but, to be fair, it doesn’t claim to be. 

One final thought is that I was slightly disappointed to see a lot of single use plastic packaging. Other hedge trimmers I have tested had a lot less and I really think this is what every manufacturer should be working towards.

Getting started with the Greenworks G24HT56 cordless hedge trimmer

The great thing about this hedge trimmer is there was no set-up. Just take it out of the box, remove the packing and the trimmer is ready to go. You will, however, need to charge the battery. My machine came with both a battery and charger but it's always worth checking because some machines may be sold without. The charger is very compact and the battery clips onto it with a reassuring click. The charge time is pretty comparable to other machines I have tested, such as the Cobra H5024V cordless hedge trimmer.

Before turning on the machine, we would always recommend consulting the accompanying literature. In this case this consisted of two thick manuals, two large fold out sheets and two A4 sheets. Most of this is due information about other models or information in different languages, however there are the standard usage, safety and care instructions which are worth looking at. There were illustrations used and these were clear and easy to understand and I would be very surprised if anyone had a problem understanding the information presented. 

There is a plastic cover over the cutting bar and this (obviously) needs to be removed before using the hedge trimmer. The cover is a single piece of moulded black plastic which slides on and off very easily and completely covers the blades. 

One feature I do like about the Greenworks G24HT56 cordless hedge trimmer is the red cutting bar, which lets you see exactly where it is, even in quite dense foliage. Painting it bright red probably doesn’t do anything to actually reduce accidents, but I did think that it made the machine feel more safety-conscious. There is no harm in reminding people which is the business end and that it can be very dangerous.  

What it's like to use the Greenworks G24HT56 cordless hedge trimmer?

I thought that the handles on the Greenworks G24HT56 cordless hedge trimmer were quite comfortable and would not present a problem, even with prolonged use. A feature I did like was the ability to rotate the handle in line with the blade when using the machine at a 90-degree angle. I thought that this was quite a clever feature and although I have seen similar rotation features on other machines, I have not seen it done in such as simple and clever way before. 

The Greenworks G24HT56 is a relatively light machine and will suit users with less upper body strength, or anyone who doesn’t fancy wielding something too heavy. It will also be easier to use over a longer period than a weightier machine.

The biggest saving in weight comes from the relatively small battery. The Greenworks battery weighs 440g and offers 43.2Wh. For comparison, the battery that Stihl use weighs 775g and offers 72Wh. This is obviously a trade off and a smaller battery will run out of charge quicker, but what it does mean is that it is less to hold when you are using the trimmer. This again reinforces the argument that this is a machine that is far better suited to light use than heavy work. Something to consider if you're new to using a hedge trimmer. 

Another benefit to the battery is the fact the it slides under the main body of the machine. This makes the machine more user-friendly, because it balances the weight of the cutting bar. Trimmers such as the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer have their battery located at the back of the handle and this can make for quite an unwieldy experience and makes the machine feel heavier than it actually is. 

One point that I didn't like about the machine was the noise level. The packaging boasts that it runs at 98db which, for context, is about as loud as a motorbike. This is not exceptionally loud and the Stihl is only 5db quieter, coming in at 93. The difference is the quality of the sound. The Greenworks has a much higher note and while you will (or should be) wearing ear defenders, it could be a very good way to alienate the neighbors on a Sunday morning if you are using it for any length of time. 

Ease of use

I found this hedge trimmer very easy to use. In fact, there was not a single aspect of either set up or use that I would class as being difficult or even particularly challenging. I doubt many people will even look at the instruction manual before they start using it. 

One small annoyance I did have with the machine was the raised line of nuts and bolts along the cutting bar. I found that they collected quite a bit of debris when compared to hedge trimmers such as the Cobra H5024V where the cutting bar is smooth.

I found the guard on the front of the Greenworks G24HT56 that separates the handles from the cutting bar to be very useful. It is large enough to direct falling debris away from your hands without feeling like it is causing any kind of obstruction. I would have also like to see a guard along the cutting bar to sweep away clippings like Ryobi offer on its hedge trimmers.

In terms of ease of use, one area where a hedge trimmer like this will always score well is its power source. Battery powered machines are far safer and more convenient than machines powered by mains electricity. There is no cord to trip over and there is no need to worry about how far away the nearest plug is when you're trimming your hedge plants. You also eliminate the risk of cutting through the wire, although the risk of this is far lower than it would be with a lawn mower. A lack of heat, vibration and exhaust means that it wins out against a petrol powered machine as well. 

Unfortunately, the trade-off here is that a battery-powered machine may not be as powerful as a mains powered or petrol machine, nor will it run for as long. However, for ease and comfort, most users will find it a far more pleasant experience. 

Another thing I liked about the battery is the way the charge readout is very accessible. The way the battery attaches means that the readout is easy to see at the back of the machine.

Additional accessories

The main additional feature to consider with the Greenworks G24HT56 cordless hedge trimmer is an extra battery. This is simply because it is easier to switch between batteries rather than keep stopping every time you need to charge up again. This is not a comment on the run time of the machine, it's simply the nature of battery powered tools.  

Aside from that, there were no products that Greenworks specifically mentioned as being related to the hedge trimmer. Of course, if you don’t already have them, we would recommend that you pick up some sturdy gardening gloves, safety goggles and ear defenders (available from Amazon). A good broom to sweep up your hedge clippings probably wouldn’t hurt either!

How does the Greenworks G24HT56 cordless hedge trimmer rate?

We did not find a huge number of online user reviews of the Greenworks G24HT56 cordless hedge trimmer. The slightly smaller model seems to be far more popular. However, there were a limited number of reviews on the Greenworks site. 

The hedge trimmer was given a 4.8 out of 5 from 19 reviews, all of which gave it 4 or 5 stars. The main areas of praise were the battery life and how light weight the machine was. One user complained that he had mistakenly bought one without a battery or a charger, so it is always worth checking before purchase. 

I thought that this was slightly better than the conclusion I had reached and I gave it 3.5 out of 5 stars.  I thought that this was an adequate machine for people with small gardens and who only need something for light use. However, I was not particularly pleased with the finish it left and there was more tearing than from the equivalent Cobra model. I would recommend it for light maintenance rather than renovation, but think it will probably suit people who want something lightweight and easy-to-use.

I also deducted marks for the lack of a safety cut-off switch. This should be an essential component on a potentially dangerous product like this. Companies such as Stihl and Cobra fit these to their models and I really do think that this should standard across the board. 

As I often say with the reviews, you should never view a product like this is isolation. If you are buying into a proprietary battery system you need to make sure you like the other tools in the range. In the case of Greenworks, I think you should also consider their other battery ranges and see which you think will suit your needs over the long term.

Cobra, which has been around since 2013, offers over 130 different gardening tools. Unlike some of their competitors, they work across the different power sources offering petrol, mains electric and cordless tools. The Cobra H5024V Li-Ion cordless hedge trimmer is one of two hedge trimmers Cobra offer, running on the 24V battery system. They also offer 40V battery, petrol and mains powered models.

I tested the Cobra H5024V Li-Ion cordless hedge trimmer on a variety of different hedges over the course of a few weeks to see how it performed in a real world test. In general I was pleased with the results and thought that it made a very good job trimming and tidying our hedges, making it a contender for our list of the best hedge trimmers for your garden. 

Cobra H5024V Li-Ion Cordless Hedge Trimmer: key product specifications

• Length: 91cm (3ft) 
• Width: 20cm (8in)
• Height: 13cm (5in)
• Cutting blade length: 91cm (3ft)
• Weight: 2.1kg without battery and 2.6kg with battery
• Battery: 24v Lithium-Ion
• Work time: 50 minutes (if running on the turbo setting continuously, we found the work time is about 30 minutes)
• Charge time: 120 minutes

First impressions of the Cobra H5024V Li-Ion cordless hedge trimmer

The Cobra H5024V Li-Ion cordless hedge trimmer was delivered in a smart box with a picture of the product on the outside and a lot of Cobra branding. I like Cobra’s graphic design on its packaging; the grass trimmer has grass on it, the hedge trimmer has leaves on it, and so on. It’s a nice touch and gives a ‘does what it says on the box’ feeling. It also ties the range together well. 

When you open the box up, you are greeted with the hedge trimmer, a battery, a charger and the instruction manual. I was pleased to see that a lot of the packaging was cardboard, rather than plastic, so it can be recycled. 

The unit itself feels very solid and well finished and at 2.6kg, it feels sturdy without being too heavy. One thing that I did notice was the shiny plastic used on the handle. While there is nothing wrong with the design (and in fact I actually quite like the red) I do think it’s likely to scratch up very easily. I always prefer to see hard-wearing matt plastic simply because, if a tool is getting used, it's going to be subjected to wear and tear. 

There was a clear plastic protective sleeve over the cutting bar. While this was adequate, it was a bit flimsy and I do wonder how long before it starts to go brittle.

Getting started

The great thing about this Cobra hedge trimmer is that it requires no set up. The unit is complete and ready to go as soon as you take it out of the box. The accompanying A5 instruction manual gives details of operation and the usual safety dos and and don’ts. It was all easy to follow, but I thought that the images could have been better. They are photographs, rather than diagrams, and they came out a bit dark in our copy, so they weren’t as clear as they could have been.  

Interestingly, the manual also recommends giving the battery a full five-hour charge before you use it. I'm pretty sure virtually nobody is going to this because, let’s be honest, who reads the instructions on a product that arrives complete until something goes wrong? There probably should be a sticker actually on the battery if it's that important.

When it comes to charging, again it's all pretty straightforward. Cobra's charger is basically a plate that slots over the battery rather than a cradle for it to sit in. So you slot it on, turn on the juice and wait. When it’s full, the green LEDs on the battery let you know and you are ready to go. 

What it's like to use the Cobra H5024V Li-Ion cordless hedge trimmer

I tried out this cordless hedge trimmer on several different hedges with good results. I was pleased with how it handled and the result it gave. It made a much nicer job of our beech hedge than the equivalent Greenworks G24HT56 model. I thought the Cobra gave a nice clean cut and it felt powerful enough to do what we asked of it. 

I like the two stage process to turn on this hedge trimmer because it means that it cannot be turned on by mistake or by young children. I tested a similar sized Ryobi hedge trimmer that could be turned on just by picking it up and I thought it was potentially very dangerous. 

Unlike most other trimmers, there are two speed settings on the Cobra H5024V Li-Ion cordless hedge trimmer, similar to other Cobra products. Two buttons on the top of the machine allow you to switch between ‘eco’ mode for light work and ‘turbo’ mode for more demanding tasks. Although there is a trade-off in that ‘turbo’ is more powerful and will use the battery more quickly, I like the flexibility this gives.

I found ‘eco’ was ideal for taking off a few leaves and thin stems and ‘turbo’ was better for more dense material, such as conifer.  I also think any product with a ‘turbo’ button is immediately much more fun to use than one without!

Compared to its competitors, the teeth on the cutting bar are quite close together. This is a bit of a trade-off. Closer teeth give a neater finish, but limit how much material the trimmer can cut. Wider teeth, as you’d expect, let you cut wider material but they leave a rougher finish. Which you go for really depends on what you want to cut. 

One thing I did feel the trimmer missed was a guard to clear the the trimmings as you work. Models, such as the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer, offer a plastic guard mounted along the cutting bar which you can use to sweep as you work. It would have been a nice touch to have that option here.   

I thought the machine was quite light to use. Not so light that it felt flimsy, but it certainly shouldn’t make your shoulders ache too much. I did think that it was a bit rear-heavy due to the placement of the battery, but not enough to be considered a problem. This is very similar to models such as the Greenworks G24HT56 but not as bad as the Ryobi model, which has its battery at the far end of a long handle.

Ease of use

If you're not up to speed with how to use a hedge trimmer that won't be a problem with this design, as I was pleased to find that the Cobra H5024V Li-Ion cordless hedge trimmer is a very easy machine to use. Just as with the Cobra LRH5024V 24v cordless longreach hedge trimmer, the biggest single benefit is the battery, as it removes the risks associated with a mains cable and anything with sharp teeth, and is a lot cleaner and more pleasant to use than anything powered by petrol. 

There is a trade-off in terms of power, especially compared to a petrol model. However, I think for people who are looking for a trimmer to just give their hedging plants a regular ‘tidy up’, this probably won’t be too much of a problem. 

The two handles are comfortable to use, the buttons are self-explanatory and there is no aspect of the machine that could be described as complicated. Unlike most other hedge trimmers, it offers a battery readout on the handle, rather than just on the battery. I found this very useful, because it makes keeping track of how much charge you have left much more convenient. 

There is no handle adjustment for working at 90 degrees, unlike the Greenworks G24HT56 hedge trimmer. However, while it can be a useful feature, we are not sure if we particularly missed it. 

In terms of design, I liked the smooth cutting bar with its brushed steel finish. It shed debris while being used and was easy to clean afterwards. Other models, such as the Greenworks G24HT56, have a series of bolts along the cutting bar which collected a lot of debris while in use and had to be cleaned off afterwards. 

Additional features

The hedge trimmer itself doesn’t require any accessories. However, it might be worth investing in another battery as it is always easier to have a spare battery on charge ready for when you need it. Aside from that, since you are using a potentially dangerous machine, we would always recommend a good pair of safety specs and some well-made gardening gloves.

How does the Cobra H5024V Li-Ion cordless hedge trimmer rate?

Our research into the customer feedback for the Cobra H5024V Li-Ion cordless hedge trimmer showed that it has a 4.6 out of 5 rating across 68 reviews on Amazon. 

Many users praised the machine for being easy to use and thought that it was a good-value purchase. People were pleased with the convenience of battery power, with one saying it would go to parts of the garden where his previous corded model would not. Another user was pleased that it ran on the same battery as his grass trimmer. 

There was some negative feedback, although not very much. One user complained that it did not handle thicker branches and another said that it kept ‘cutting out’. It was not stated in either case how thick the material they were cutting was.

One difficulty with reading online reviews is that they are so subjective and this was evident when people spoke about the weight of the machine. Some users praised it for being lightweight, whereas one user (who did describe himself as elderly) complained that it was too heavy to use. So it really does depend on who you are and what you are looking for. 

From my experience, I think that the positive feedback is justified and I thought that this was a good hedge trimmer. With that in mind, I am happy to give the Cobra H5024V Li-Ion cordless hedge trimmer a rating of 4.5 out 5. 

In fact, I think most of the criticism about it cutting out is from people simply being unrealistic about the type of hedge trimmer they actually need. I think that as a small hedge trimmer for lighter work, it is a solid, capable machine that will give you a nice result. It’s easy to use, well thought-out and the battery makes it very convenient. 

I always finish these reviews by saying that you cannot view a tool like this in isolation. When you are buying a garden tool that runs off a proprietary battery, you are buying into that battery system and this will likely influence your choice of garden tools for years to come. So have a look at the rest of the Cobra range, such as the Cobra MX41-40V lawn mower, the Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower and the Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer (all of which have also been reviewed on Gardeningetc), and see if you would be happy to purchase their other tools in the future. 

The first Woody Pizza Oven Kit landed on the garden-cooking scene in May 2021. We had all become accustomed to making our entertainment at home, and as someone who makes a living telling you what to buy, you didn't need much encouragement to grab a slice of the pizza oven action for your outdoor space. They were flying off the virtual shelves way faster than your average Uber Eats driver could deliver a double pepperoni with extra cheese.

The team at Woody realised this, but also spotted that the market leaders – while creating great products for home use – were charging a pretty penny for what the British weather could make a somewhat sporadically-used investment. And often, all you got was the oven so if you wanted to optimise your pizza making sessions, you would need to fork out a further £80 to £150 for the accessories. 

Thus, the Woody Wood Fired Pizza Oven Kit (mark one) was born and this lucky reviewer got to give it a go last summer. I awarded it four out of five stars and added it to our list of best pizza ovens, commending it for the quality of build and provision of extras such as a peel, carry case and thermometer, on such a tight budget. But as it was a wood-fired oven, I did find some of my pizza making sessions a little arduous until I had mastered what neanderthals managed some 400,000 years ago and got the hang of making a good fire. 

This year, Woody released their mark two version. With improved heat retention and the option of including a gas attachment for just shy of an extra £70, buyers can still get all the bells and whistle for around £300 all-in. Thanks to the design tweaks, I was promised an easier pizza making experience with wood and a very, very easy pizza making experience should I use the gas attachment.

Not one to ever turn down pizza (even if I have to make it myself) I jumped at the chance to take it – and the dough they sent me – for a spin.

Woody Pizza Oven Kit specifications

• Fuel type: wood (pellet or kindling), gas and charcoal
• Dimensions: H50 x W41 x D54cm
• Weight: 12.5kg
• Oven temperature: 500˚C (950˚F) in just 15 minutes
• Pizza size: 12 inches
• Pizza cooking time: 60 seconds
• Use: outdoor use only for pizza, al forno dishes and even meat (in a suitable oven-proof dish)
• What's in the box?: Woody Oven (inc door, thermometer, hopper and chimney), peel, carry case, tools for construction. Gas attachment (£69.99) optional extra

Unboxing the Woody Pizza Oven: first impressions

The Woody Pizza Oven arrives in a branded box inside a plain box for transit. Structural packaging is made from cardboard but there are a few plastic bags and foam inserts protecting the metal parts from one another, and to protect the pizza stone. If you are feeling a little put off by what little plastic there is – though it is not a perfect solution – Woody does partake in a scheme to plant 10 trees for every oven sold, via a climate positivity company called Earthly. Earthly also plants one tree on behalf of Woody for each box of fuel sold, too.

So what is in the box? The Woody arrives partially constructed. You get the oven but have to attach the chimney, slot the pizza stone into place, unfold the legs and attach the thermometer to the door. Next choose whether you want to be using gas or wood, and either install the hopper and wood tray provided (more on this in 'Getting started' below) or add the gas attachment. The gas attachment is an add on when you put the Woody in your cart so this arrives in a separate box.

The oven also comes with all the tools you need to put it together (a small spanner and two sizes of allen key), the nuts and bolts needed for construction and a carry case, including a velcro-on bag for the chimney. This doubles as a cover if you leave it outdoors over summer. Finally you get a peel, which is super handy as not many of us have those in our kitchen cupboards, and you definitely need one for safe oven use.

I lent my brother the original Woody Pizza Oven earlier this year, then knowing a new product was on the horizon, never got it back. As such, I can't remember the exact looks of the older model, but did note a few key changes:

• Chimney: the old version had a cap that came off. This is not needed so they have redesigned it without, keeping it more streamlined. It has a locking feature to keep it in place.
• Legs: these are stronger with plastic soles to protect the surface you place the oven on. The old ones had sharpish edges that would scratch paint and varnish if you weren't careful.
• Sunken pizza stone: the new stone is thicker, but to prevent height build up, it sits flush with the floor of the oven.
• Thermometer: the larger and clearer display is easier to read as you busy about making pizzas and tending to the oven.
• Door: thicker steel and the Woody logo embossed on the front make for a new look. They have also changed the peephole from a swing door to a hole.
• Construction: thicker steel has been used throughout for a stronger hopper, fuel tray and exterior.
• Peel: the new peel is longer and rectangular in shape, making it easier to use than the circular predecessor. 

This model still has the same cool industrial look as before, though I would say some of the edges, such as the front, are a bit sharp. This is most noticeable if you hold the oven by the front and back for lifting, though doesn't impact the use.

Getting started with the Woody Pizza Oven

The oven comes with a simple leaflet with a URL to look up for instructions on both putting the oven together and lighting it. There is a QR code too which makes it really easy to find the info you need. The digitally adept will prefer how this cuts the number (and size) of booklets that come with the oven.

Constructing the oven for use with wood or charcoal is really easy. Everything clips into place, or screws on easily with the tools provided. I managed to build it (with a little lifting help for the legs) in about 10 minutes. 

Adding the gas attachment was a bit trickier. The metal parts are easy to bolt on, but the bit I struggled with was attaching the hoses. This is something I have found with gas pipes and bottles in the past though. A bit of water helps ease the tube onto the unit. 

My only other remark on set up is that the feet are a bit stiff and not the easiest to unfold. Once in use though, this helps them feel more secure, but it can be a two-person job (one lifting the oven while the other pulls the legs) getting them folded out fully. They need a bit of brute force to crank them out.

Before first use you have to get the oven to full temperature, and let it heat for 30 minutes to blast off any manufacturing residues and cure the stone.

Using the pizza oven with wood

When I used the old Woody oven, I found it a bit tricky keeping a wood pellet fire going with the ferocity needed for more than a couple of pizzas. This time, knowing what I know, I took the inner grate out of the fuel tray and used small chunks of kindling instead. The kind you buy for starting your woodburner are fine and can be picked up at most supermarkets or petrol stations.

I also recommend getting some natural firelighters and placing one or two in the tray to encourage a strong flame. Once the tray is lit, you have to carefully slide it into the oven (make sure you test the wood you use for height before you light it). 

It takes about 20–30 minutes to get up to a good temperature for cooking a pizza with wood. You want it at full temperature if possible which is around 500˚C, but I did find you can get good pizzas as long as you hit the 300–350˚C mark, though it won't cook as quickly and the base won't be as crisp.

When cooking with wood, you need to keep it constantly topped up, every five to 10 minutes. This is where using a combo of wood pellets and kindling is a good idea as the kindling gets a good flame going, but the pellets are easier to refill (via the hopper) and burn more efficiently.

I have cooked pizzas in this oven using wood three or four times and have found the best method is to top up the wood after every pizza. This means it can get back up to temp while you prep your next base.

The results are great. Cooking with wood imparts a little more authentic flavour, though not so noticeable that I would say I prefer using wood.

Using the Woody with gas attachment

If you don't know how to use a pizza oven, then starting with the gas attachment is a great way to get the hang of it before throwing in the juggle of tending to a fire.

The Woody pizza oven uses patio gas – the kind you would use for your gas barbecue. At the time of my testing, it was really hard to get hold of gas if you didn't already own a bottle for refill. So, I had to time my pizza making around my sister's calendar because I wanted to borrow their gas bottle. This was fine as my nephews love pizza so I knew I would have plenty of mouths to feed.

Once attached to the gas, it was really easy to ignite. You simply push and turn the knob at the back of the oven, leaving the door open initially to prevent gas build up if it fails to ignite. 

From here, shut the door and like me, you will find it gets to temperature in as little as 10 minutes (on a hot day) or maximum 20 minutes.

Once lit, you don't have to tend to the fire at all. Just check it hasn't gone out (and check the gas bottle levels), and turn it off when done. Cooking on gas is the more low-maintenance option. It is also quicker to get out your pizzas as you don't have to refuel between and wait for the temperature to get back up as you might with wood. If you are cooking with kids, I definitely recommend gas for speed (and less whinging).

Cooking pizza in the Woody

Whether cooking with gas or wood, the process is very much the same. Roll out your base on a floured board and place it on the peel. I sprinkle my peel with semolina (cornmeal) to prevent sticking. Make sure you work quickly to top your pizza and get it in the oven as the base will start to get soggy if left too long.

When the oven is up to temperature, open the door and quickly slide the pizza in using the peel. You will need to check and turn the pizza in 20 to 30 seconds, so it is best to leave the door off. Just make sure you put it back on as soon as your finish each pizza to retain heat. 

Your pizza should be ready in 60 seconds. I might have left my first attempt when cooking with wood a little bit too long, underestimating the oven, and was greeted by a burnt crust when I turned around. Lesson learnt. Now I constantly guard the oven, turning each pizza as needed.

If it is cooking slowly – this happened to me if I hadn't kept the fire quite as well fed as it needed to be – put the door on and keep an eye on it using the peephole. Just don't literally peep, with your eye close to that hot door! The longest a pizza took for me was just over two minutes when I hadn't quite got the flame right with wood. 

The pizza gets what is known as 'leoparding' on top as the flame rolls over the pizza crust. You won't get this when making pizza in your regular kitchen oven, and it really helps impart flavour to the crust. 

The oven takes a pizza of approximately 12 inches. You can go a bit bigger (who is measuring?), but make sure it fits on your peel first. If not, it is going to be impossible to get in the oven and hard to manoeuvre on the stone.

There was one drawback while cooking. I found the door to be such a snug fit that it could be a little tricky to fit and remove, especially once it expanded with heat.

Is the Woody pizza oven easy to clean?

When you finish with your Woody pizza oven, the best thing to do is run it at full temperature for 30 minutes. This burns any residue off the stone, turning it to ash that can be swept away when the oven has fully cooled. 

The exterior and door can be wiped down with a damp cloth if needed, and the hopper rinsed and dried. Avoid getting the stone wet and if you do, let it dry fully before the next use. If unsure, read our guide to cleaning a pizza oven as the steps are pretty similar for all models.

Once the oven has cooled down, use the cover provided to protect it from the elements. It can withstand the average British summer, but get it put away before cold weather or very rainy days.

The footprint is a little larger than similar models we have tested, but it is still compact enough for most gardens, storage spaces and for putting it your boot to take out and about. 

Additional features

The Woody oven case has straps that go underneath meaning you can carry it. It isn't that light, but we found it easy enough to transport to and from the car to take to friends' houses. To fit in the case properly you have to either take the door handle off, or turn the door inside out. The hopper and fuel tray also protrude, so need to be removed or put inside the oven to fit the cover properly. 

Also note that you can use charcoal in the oven fuel tray if preferred. I haven't tried this but it means you can get a lower and slower flame, making it suitable for cooking meat or even things like pasta bake. 

How does the Woody compare to similar pizza ovens?

The Woody is pitched as an affordable and portable pizza oven. It also boasts the inclusion of accessories that you have to buy separately (at what can be a great expense!) for other ovens.

The obvious competitor for size and functionality is the Ooni Karu, which has a RRP of £60 more at time of writing. It is a bit more streamlined in terms of looks than the Woody and when we tested the Ooni Karu, we gave it five stars, but noted that you need to spend a fair bit to get all the extras that the Woody includes as standard. The gas attachment is also sold separately, and costs £10 more than the Woody gas adapter.

Woody vs Ooni Karu pizza oven

If you don't have a £200+ budget for a pizza oven we actually really highly rated the Outsunny Outdoor Charcoal Pizza Oven that comes in at around £150. The benefits are it can be used as a chiminea and oven, but it is not portable and doesn't cook pizza anywhere near as quickly as the Woody meaning you get nice pizza, but not super authentic crispy ones that are typical of such high cooking temperatures.

Verdict: should you buy a Woody Pizza Oven Kit?

Making pizza oven recipes in the garden with your family is a fun activity. However, the outlay of many pizza ovens means that you either spend so much that you feel you need to be using it every weekend – come rain or shine – to get your money's worth, or spend less on an inferior oven. The Woody represents great value for money. It has a three-year warranty and feels built to last, so you know you will be using it every summer (and beyond) for years to come.

And, for a reasonable sum, you get the full kit so you have everything you need for a great pizza party, without having to spend over £100 on extras. It isn't so cheap it lacks in any areas, but also isn't such an investment that you feel you have wasted your cash if the weather isn't on your side for super regular use.

The only drawbacks are that it does have slightly less finesse to the design than some of the fan favourites. Nothing that impairs use, but it is slightly chunkier and things like the feet and front edge a little clunkier. The snug door might mean better heat retention, but I was occasionally having to give it a push with the peel to get it in place.

Still, this affordable pizza oven does exactly what you want – it cooks delicious pizza in around a minute at home. 

Since the restrictions of the last few years made us all more reliant on using our outdoor space for entertainment, outdoor projectors have become a popular way to enjoy ourselves and occupy the family without ever leaving our homes. But not all battery-powered projectors are created equal.

This is why we wanted to test the XGIMI Halo+ portable projector to see if it could surpass expectations regarding brightness, contrast and overall ease of use, which can often be lacking with projectors that be used outside. The 2.5 hours of battery life is good if you want to watch a movie away from a power source, and it can project an image up to 200in.

Read on to see what we thought of the XGIMI Halo+ portable projector and, for more top picks, take a look at our guide to the best outdoor projectors.

XGIMI Halo+ portable projector: key product specs

• Type: DLP
• Resolution: Full HD
• Brightness: 900 ANSI Lumens
• Contrast ratio: 10,000:1
• Screen size: 30-200"
• Distance: 0.79-5.2m
• Smart TV: Android TV
• Noise: less than 30dB
• Speakers; 2 x 5W
• Dimensions: H11.3 x W11.3 x D17.1cm
• Weight: 1.6kg

Setting up the XGIMI Halo+ portable projector

The XGIMI Halo+ portable projector is pleasingly minimalist in its setup, and the box only contains a charging lead, remote control, and instruction manual alongside the projector itself. The first and only thing you need to do to get the Halo+ going is to charge it. Once plugged in, the light on top will illuminate orange, flashing green once the battery life is above 90%. This took under an hour out of the box for our unit.

Then you can get to finding the best position for viewing. For best results, the projector should be positioned at a distance of between 0.79m and 5.2m, with the screen going up to a maximum of 200in. This is on the larger side for a portable projector, so big screen enthusiasts will be pleased.

Hit the power button, and you will be greeted with a Google login screen. We couldn't figure out how to bypass this, so it's likely you will need an existing account to use the Halo+. We logged in as instructed, and the screen switched to the familiar Android TV interface. This is useful in many ways, including the fact that we were already logged into many of our streaming apps.

How does the XGIMI Halo+ perform? 

The first thing we were impressed by with the XGIMI Halo+ was its ability to give you a clear, straight, and centred image without any manual fiddling from us. While other projectors might make it easy and simple to line everything up on your chosen wall via the remote, the Halo+ does it all automatically. It will be very welcome for those who prefer to just sit back and watch without spending time in settings.

Android TV gives you access to more than 5,000 apps to choose from. As said, the initial login via your Google account eliminates the need to log into every single one individually. This was the case for us, anyway, but it will depend on how integrated your Google account is with other streaming accounts you may have (we have a Google TV streaming stick).

There is also Chromecast and Google Assistant on board, and HDMI and USB ports on the back to play your own content as your wish. Unfortunately, Netflix is missing from Android TV at this time, so you may need to find a workaround in the form of a streaming stick.

We opted first for YouTube and loaded up the recent trailer for Black Panther: Wakanda Forever to test how its sumptuous visuals translated.

The above-average 10,000:1 contrast ratio pays off with great blacks and lush greens in the two contrasting scenes from the trailer. Tested inside (but beside large patio doors) during the late afternoon, and with a floor lamp turned on, we saw how the images would look in relatively bright conditions. The slightly washed-out look is pretty much eliminated in truly dark conditions, which is not always the case.

The Halo+ has a brightness of 900 ANSI lumens which, while generally low for a projector, is at the top end of what you can expect of a portable model. The image was perfectly acceptable to us but undoubtedly looked better at night and with minimal environmental light.

Luckily our patio area gets very dark at night, with no street lamps around and little light coming from surrounding houses. We pointed the projector at a blank white brick wall, and the picture looked just as clear and colorful as it had inside.

Perhaps the most impressive thing about the Halo+ is the sound. The dual 5W Harman Kardon speakers are great. With Dolby Audio and DTS HD on board, the projector sounds brilliant, filling the room and pulling you into the action without needing external speakers.

Design of the XGIMI Halo+ portable projector

The XGIMI Halo+ doesn't break the mould for outdoor projector design, but it doesn't need to. The update looks extremely similar to the previous model – the XGIMI Halo – doing away only with the auto-focus lens on the front (now moved to the bottom) but keeping the silver perforated grille casing and off-centre primary lens.

Disappointingly, there's no handle for carrying it around, but the projector is small and lightweight enough for most people to easily pick it up. The 2.5-hour battery life means there's just enough juice to take it on trips, and it wouldn't take up too much room in the suitcase or backpack.

There's also a built-in kickstand on the base to help get the angle of the lens right for your setup, which was helpful for us trying to project onto a wall from a shorter coffee table.

How does the XGIMI Halo+ compare to other outdoor projectors?

As mentioned elsewhere in the review, the XGIMI Halo+ has an above-average brightness for outdoor projectors (900 ANSI Lumens). In contrast, another of our top choices for the best portable projector is the Samsung Freestyle, which sports a brightness of 550 ANSI lumens. It also beats the XGIMI MoGo Pro, which reports a brightness of just 300 ANSI lumens.

It rates well for maximum screen size, too, with many other projectors like the Nebula Cosmos Laser projector only able to achieve up to 150-inches. The Halo+, on the other hand, can project up to 200-inches (if you have a big enough garden).

The XGIMI model also has a good contrast ratio considering this is a battery-operated projector, enhancing the 1080p Full HD image. It's admittedly pricier than some other models, but in our opinion, has the specs to justify it.

Overall verdict of the XGIMI Halo+ portable projector

As a portable projector, the XGIMI Halo+ is top class, combining ease of use with genuinely impressive video and audio specs. It won't give you the performance of a premium indoor projector (which can cost in the $1,000s), but it is impressive for a battery-powered model. We would recommend it for family backyard movie nights, gaming sessions and pretty much anything else, though it performs best at night or in dark conditions. 

About this review and reviewer

All reviews on Gardeningetc are based on real-life experience with products, with testing always done in the writer's own home and outdoor space. 

As the Smart Home editor for Gardeningetc, the unit was tested in Caroline's home and on her small patio area. She tried out the projector at various times of day to gauge how different light conditions impacted the image. 

We are not paid to review this product (nor any products we test), but we were supplied with it without charge for testing.

We've been testing the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich hot tub this summer, rain or shine, so that we can give you a true verdict on whether it's worth your money. This inflatable hot tub, just like most, is a great alternative for those with a smaller budget, and for anyone who would rather not put a permanent fixture in their garden.

The Zurich comfortably fits four adults, however, it doesn't have any built-in seat structures. It's easy to maintain and it comes with a thermal cover, so on some of the hottest days of the year we found that we needn't even heat it up. 

In fact, we enjoyed using it as a cold tub over the summer with the aim of heating it in winter for the full experience. Placing it in a sunny spot is also a good idea to keep running prices low, and it would be handy to own a collapsible gazebo to pop over it so that you can use it in the rain.

Read on for more information on how we tested this hot tub and what we thought, otherwise for plenty more picks, you can check out our best hot tubs buying guide.

Lay-Z-Spa Zurich specifications:

• Seats: Four adults or three adults and two kids
• Water capacity: 669 litres
• Cable length: 7m (approx)
• Maximum heat: 40˚C
• Dimensions (inflated): H66cm x W180cm (width with pump 221cm)

First impressions of the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich hot tub

When the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich first landed on our doorstep, we were impressed with how compact its box was. Though be warned: it's very heavy and will require two people to move it.

Immediately we opened the box and inspected what was inside, and then we went on to choose a spot for the hot tub to live. Once you add water to it, you'll find it very difficult to move. We suggest finding somewhere in a shady spot, or ideally placing your hot tub under a cover, such as a hot tub gazebo or covered pergola.

When considering where you will place the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich in your garden, you'll need to think about a few factors. Our hot tub arrived with a mat that you put down underneath it, to protect your floor and to help ensure you won't slip when getting out all wet. The mat is slightly larger than the hot tub itself, but you can use it to visualise where it will go if you buy it too. It fits together like a jigsaw. It's worth us noting that this mat will help keep heat in the hot tub too. If you can't invest in one, then try and get something similar for your hot tub surround.

The first thing to consider is that your hot tub needs to be close to an electrical socket. You also need to ensure that your hose will reach the tub when you need to add water to top it up or refill the tub entirely.

Place your hot tub somewhere sunny if you don't mind using it with the sun shining on your head because this will keep it at its hottest temperature, naturally. Also, be sure to consider its positioning when it comes to emptying. Should you have any grass, try and angle the hot tub so that the pump and the plug are close by your grass so that you can empty your tub straight on there, to make life a little easier. Our guide on how to drain a hot tub has useful tips to help with this too. 

A lot of the bits in the box were wrapped in plastic – just something to bear in mind if you're eco-conscious.

Setting up the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich

We won't lie: setting up the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich was a slight nightmare. We were missing a part, as it turns out, which was pretty key to the entire process. A washer.

With this in mind, I will say that it took longer than expected (Lay-Z-Spa claim 10 minutes). I'm not sure that even with the washer we would have been able to do it in 10 minutes, though, and it's quite fiddly. The instructions aren't the best so you might want to watch a video online like we did. We've had this issue with Lay-Z-Spa hot tubs before, with the instructions being on the poor side, so this won't be any different if you buy another model to the Zurich.

It's quite tricky to line up all of the holes in the tub with the sections of the pump, but first you'll want to blow everything up. It will initially look a little creased, but don't worry as these will disappear. You need to make sure that it's properly full of air to make its walls more comfortable to lie back on. Also, just a tip to blow up the lid at the same time as inflating the body of the tub.

We had three people setting up this hot tub as you ideally need more than one to help spread out the hot tub evenly. The only good thing was that once it's up you needn't assemble it again. It can live outside year-round as it has frost protection for the wintertime.

When it comes to filling this tub, you can expect it to take from one to two hours, depending on your water pressure.

Using the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich

We don't leave our hot tub on all of the time, mostly because it uses quite a lot of electricity and in the current climate, this is not ideal. With this in mind, when we do turn it on we're sure to hit the buttons reset test reset on the lead. Wait til you hear a few beeps. You should then see the temperature of the hot tub displayed. For safety purposes, you need to press and hold the power button for three seconds to gain access to the pad.

This hot tub is very easy to use, just like other Lay-Z-Spa hot tubs, though bear in mind that it's not Wi-Fi-connected. It features a digital display that's pretty straightforward. It has a button for bubbles, one for heating, arrows for controlling and the pad lights up to tell you what's going on.

After unlocking the digital display, you'll want to press the flame button and set the temperature using the arrows. You'll hear a noise to signify that the heating element of the tub has switched on.

From here, you'll just have to wait and keep checking the temperature, whilst keeping the cover on and tight at all times. When it's ready to use, remove the cover and use the bubbles only when the cover is off. This hot tub has a total of 120 jets.

In comparison to other (more expensive) hot tubs, the Zurich is quite basic. It can only be controlled via the digital display, whilst others are Wi-Fi controlled. Saying that, it offers everything you need in one place and it's anything but confusing. So much so that my nephews managed to work it out within about five minutes of using it. You can even child lock the pad but they soon worked out how to unlock that setting.

Temperature control

Whilst testing this hot tub, we noticed that on average, it took one hour to heat 2°C. On the flip side, once the heating is off, it will drop around 1°C every hour. It will stabilise at a temperature based on the outside temperature. This temperature that it stabilises at will be a lot colder in the winter than in the summer.

Depending on the time of the year, the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich holds heat impressively well. The thermal lid, so long as it's kept on and pulled tight, should keep it close to the temperature outdoors. For example, when spending the day thoroughly testing this hot tub it was 22˚C outside. In the hot tub, the water was 20˚C. During the UK heatwave when temperatures were soaring through the 30s, we checked the hot tub and it was, too, in the 30s. Meaning we didn't even have to turn the heating on. But we did heat it for an hour or so before using as the heating element turns on the filter.

To come up to temperature, the hot tub will vary in time depending on the volume of water inside it. We never suggest filling it too much, otherwise, you'll end up heating water that will be spilled on the floor once warm. We recommend putting enough water in it so that it's just under the line.

We made sure to note how long this hot tub takes to get to heat (40˚C is the max). We turned it on to heat at 16:30 on our day of testing and noticed that it managed to gain 2˚C every 2 hours. The best part about this hot tub is that you can time it to heat up. So, if you're planning on using the tub in the evening then you can use the timer button on the display to set the tub to switch on, depending on the current temperature of the water, a set amount of hours ahead of use. This way you needn't unnecessarily heat it up.

Bear in mind that in winter the temperature of the hot tub will be a lot lower. We tested ours in the summer so can't comment on this (yet). It will naturally take a lot longer to get warm in the winter, though lower temperatures will obviously feel hotter, so you might not have to heat it all the way to 40˚C, but instead 36˚C or 37˚C.

As soon as you take the lid off this hot tub to get in, the temperature will drop quite rapidly. The same goes for when you turn off the heating. Whilst testing, we turned its heat off at around 11.30pm, when it was 35˚C. By 8am the next morning it had dropped by 7˚C, to 28˚C. 

In summary, this hot tub definitely keeps heat better than other hot tubs, bearing in mind temperatures drop drastically at night. The cover works wonders when heating or after use to conceal heat. Just be sure to put it on tight. The time your hot tub takes to heat will be dependent on several factors including the outdoor temperature, the surface it's on, its position in your garden and the temperature of your hose water or the water already in the hot tub.

These are the average temperature times to get this hot tub to 40˚C. We tested these times and found them to be pretty accurate.

• From 10˚C to 40˚C - 15.5 hours
• From 15˚C to 40˚C - 12 hours
• From 20˚C to 40˚C - 10 hours
• From 25˚C to 40˚C - 8 hours
• From 30˚C to 40˚C - 5 hours

Just bear in mind that if the temperature outside goes below 6˚C, you'll need to turn your hot tub on. Its pump will keep the temperature of the water between 6˚C and 10˚C to avoid damage. Do not use the spa should the temperature hit -10˚C. 

If you're going away over a period of time when you think the temperature might really drop, then you're best to empty the hot tub and store it somewhere safe, along with its pump, such as a garage or shed.

Lay-Z-Spa Zurich design

Undoubtedly, this hot tub looks great in a garden. It's sleek and its pump is also nice and compact, too. If you lift up the digital display, you'll find two cup holders for your vino to sit as you soak. 

Its suede look blends with the cover so that when being protected it still looks the part. EnergySense™ insulated outer and top cover provide 40% more energy efficiency than other inflatable hot tubs and its soothing 120 AirJet™ massage system and 40°C water offer the ultimate year‑round home spa experience.

Inside the hot tub, there is a floor which looks like your classic white and blue tiled pool floor. The walls feature EnergySense™ insulation to make it heat faster and retain heat well, too.

Cleaning and maintaining the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich

When it comes to hot tub maintenance, the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich is pretty much the same as maintaining any other hot tub out there. Some people like to leave their hot tub switched on and heating up year-round, but we haven't been doing that bearing in mind the rise in energy prices.

Instead, we make sure to switch on our hot tub a day before we hope to use it and switch it on to heat and filter. Usually, over the summer, it has sat at a constant temperature of around 19˚C to 22˚C, so it only takes a minimal amount of time to get to a hot temperature.

We've been testing the water several times a week and adding in whatever is needed to get it to the right levels. Other than that, we empty it once a month and clean the hot tub filter then, too. Much like a vacuum cleaner filter, you need only clean this under water and then leave it outside in the sun to dry.

When the hot tub is empty, you can wipe down its inside if needed. I found the best method for cleaning a hot tub is to wipe it with a damp cloth or use some cleaning products on it. Don't go for anything too harsh though. 

Otherwise, you can wipe down the exterior of your hot tub with ease, or you can even pressure wash it if necessary. Just don't get too close on the highest setting.

A pool of water normally forms on the top of the hot tub after it has rained. You'll want to push this off to prevent the hot tub cover from marking.

Should I buy the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich?

If you're searching for the latest hot tub ideas for your outdoor space, we think that the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich is a great investment for year-round use. It's also ideal for entertaining kids and adults, plus it looks great in a garden, too. 

It would easily fit in a smaller space as it can be tucked into a corner of a garden, though we do recommend that if you can, place it underneath a hot tub shelter, such as a gazebo, that can be moved. This way, you can use it rain or shine, winter or summer.

It's a great buy for those searching for a hot tub that's easy to use, smart looking and affordable.

How does the Lay-Z-Spa Zurich compare to similar models?

At Gardeningetc, we've reviewed a range of hot tubs from Lay-Z-Spa. Undoubtedly, we think it's a brilliant hot tub brand and perhaps one of the best out there when it comes to value for money, quality of product and also warranty, which is two years.

We've also tested the Lay-Z-Spa Helsinki, which seats more people, (five to seven in total). This is definitely a great buy for larger gardens, bigger families and if you have a large budget. It RRPs at £899 and much like the Zurich, is designed with style in mind. It offers a wood effect look and it boasts 180 jets in total.

You can usually find the Lay-Z-Spa Helsinki on sale for around £500. 

The Lay-Z-Spa Barbados has also been reviewed by us and given 4.5-stars. This hot tub, out of the three we've tested, is definitely the happy medium. It seats four and price-wise, sits at £699 RRP. What it does have that the Helsinki doesn't, is a smart pump. This pump connects to Wi-Fi which syncs it with your phone so that you can control it from anywhere. Otherwise, it has 120 jets and in terms of looks, doesn't offer anything special. It's plain grey so not an eyesore. 

You can usually find the Lay-Z-Spa Barbados on sale for around £420.

In comparison with these two models, the Zurich is more cost-effective and simple to use for any technophobes out there. It also looks great with a suede-like look. It has an RRP of £699 but you can usually find it on sale for just shy of £300. A total bargain if you're asking us!

About this review - and our reviewer

Annie tests a huge range of outdoor buys for Gardeningetc, from barbecues to hot tubs and everything in between. Annie lives in a flat in south-east London and whilst she does have a small amount of outdoor space – a terrace with artificial grass on one side and her furniture on the other – she's always searching for compact garden buys.

Annie tested this hot tub at her parents' home in Hertfordshire, in their design-savvy garden. They recently got rid of their older model Lay-Z-Spa as they were seeking an upgrade, and they got in both looks and features. 

We are not paid to review this product (nor any products we test). We've been allowed to keep this hot tub so that we can review it in the wintertime, too, and report back on how it retains heat. 

The Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K is a big box of portable projector fun that boasts the best hi-resolution image quality and, thanks to the use of laser rather than LED technology, is seriously bright. Moreover, as we’ve come to expect from Nebula devices, it is easy to set up and get watching in just a few minutes. 

As well as 4K resolution and a whopping screen size of up to 150”, the Cosmos 4K has four speakers (30W total) with Dolby Audio and comes with a streaming stick that hides neatly in the back and offers instant access to all your favorite streaming services using Android TV 10.0. There’s even Google voice assistance if you prefer chatting to using the remote.

It is at the premium end of the best outdoor projectors, but the extra investment really does yield a bigger, brighter, sharper image. But is it the best available for garden movie nights, or can you find an alternative projector that suits your needs better? We popped some corn and pulled up a deckchair to find out. 

Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K: Key specs

• Type: LCD Laser
• Resolution: 4K
• Brightness: 2400 lumens
• Max screen size: 150"
• Smart TV: Android TV 10 streaming stick included
• Speakers: 2 x 10W, 2 x 5W
• Dimensions: 35 x 10 x 24cm
• Weight: 3.3kg

About this review, and the reviewer

Chris is a freelance writer for Gardeningetc, lending his tech expertise to reviews and product roundups for the site. He has also worked for sites such as T3, Wired, Livingetc and more, and covers everything from speakers to projectors. A sample of the Nebula Cosmos 4K was kindly supplied for review purposes, and Chris spent several weeks testing the outdoor projector in his own home and garden.

Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K: Set-up

One of the brilliant things we've noticed about Anker Nebula projectors is just how simple they are to set up and use. With the Cosmos Laser 4K, this is no different, and it took us less than five minutes before we could watch a movie on a massive screen. Once plugged in, you need to connect the streaming stick – a compartment at the back that takes 20 seconds – and download the Nebula Connect app to your smartphone (iOS, Android). Once you turn it on, the display will take you through the rest of the setup.  

Creating a good screen is also easy, thanks to auto-focus and automatic keystone correction. You may need to place the projector on a side table or pile of books – an upturned trug also worked for us outside. It has a tripod mount in the base, plus you don't have to have the projector facing directly onto a wall to create a straight image as the clever software compensates and adjusts the angle for you. Of course, the more the projector adjusts, the more it will degrade the image quality, so pointing it straight on will ensure the best performance. But, a few degree adjustments shouldn't be that noticeable.  

The lens is fixed, so the only way to make the image bigger is to move the projector further away, but we managed to project a 60" screen from around 1.6m and a whopping 150" design at 4.4m – that was almost as wide as the back of the house. Impractical but impressive!

There are six picture modes available and five audio options to choose from, and if you do like to tinker, you can adjust the focus and keystone correction manually.

The Nebula Connect app is essentially a remote control – with a choice of cursor or touchpad style controls and easy-to-use keyboards that makes inputting passwords for Wi-Fi and streaming platforms quick and easy. In addition, streaming services such as Disney+ and Netflix are downloaded to the projector automatically, which makes accessing vast amounts of content painless. The supplied remote control works well, but when it comes to inputting passwords, the app is much easier. 

As with most all-in-one projectors, the Cosmos 4K relies on apps for streaming content over Wi-Fi, but you can also connect a separate device – laptop or Blu-ray player, for instance – via HDMI and USB ports. It can also work as a powerful Bluetooth speaker. There's no onboard memory here, but that won't be too much of an issue as the projector needs mains power, so it can't stray too far from the house.

Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K: Performance

The Anker Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K has the best picture quality we’ve seen from a portable all-in-one projector. The images are crisp, vibrant, and seriously bright. In addition, 2,400 Lumens brightness means you can start your backyard movie night before dusk and still actually see the screen, which isn’t always the case with portable projectors.

But if you can get a garden room dark enough, the 4K resolution is exceptional, and we became addicted to its big screen (around 100” in the spare room) performance. It’s worth remembering that most streamed content isn’t in 4K resolution yet, but the projector’s processor does a great job making the very best of whatever quality you feed into it.

This enjoyment is backed up by great speakers, which manage the deep rumble of action and high frequencies of dialogue with aplomb. Sometimes we forgot the sound was coming out of a single box, which is high praise indeed. The fan is also impressively quiet.

If we’re being hyper-critical, the Cosmos 4K struggles a bit when the action is very fast, and some people might find the color contrast quite bold, but there are various adjustments and modes you can play with to find your favorite display. You can also adjust the sound to suit, pushing dialogue up in the mix, for instance, if you struggle to hear it over sound effects, etc.

Yes, we’d love it to be truly portable and battery-powered, but that just isn’t practical given the brightness and projector power on offer.

The remote control is simple and effective, with dedicated launch buttons for Netflix, Disney +, Amazon Prime, and YouTube. The Nebula app is much simpler to use, especially when inputting passwords and searching content, although you can also use Google Assistant voice search.

It’s worth noting that if you don’t need 4K resolution, Anker also offers the same design, with the same 2,400-lumen brightness, but with 1080p Full HD for a little less.

Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K: Design

The Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K is a good-looking box of tricks, with a grown-up aesthetic and chunky but practical integrated handle. It isn't as funky as the BenQ GV30 or as dull as the Epson EF-12 but certainly looks expensive, which is just as well given the price.

At 35cm tall, it is quite a big box, making it much harder to find cupboard space for it when not needed. This is especially true when compared to the compact Nebula Mars II Pro or Nebula Capsule, but remember, the extra size means better sound and picture quality.

One thing we appreciate about the design is that Anker has included an eye-guard feature that dims the lighting if it detects someone too close to the front of the projector. Of course, looking directly at a laser is bad news for your eyes, so this is a handy feature to have.

We've mentioned the remote control and smartphone app, but you'll also find a complete collection of touch-sensitive buttons on the projector's top that light up when you touch the surface. 

Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K: Sustainability and longevity

Projector power usage varies greatly, with the smallest battery-powered designs using just 50W and the larger home cinema options pulling a whopping 800W. The Nebula Cosmos 4K uses around 200W of power consumption, which is relatively high and explains why it isn’t battery-powered. Standby energy consumption is just 0.5W, which is good, though.

This Nebula Cosmos 4K laser lamp technology has been designed to last up to 25,000 hours of playing at full power, so it should, if treated with care, last for decades. Sadly, the user can’t replace the bulb if it fails, although Anker does offer a repair service.

Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K vs Epson EF-12

The Cosmos Laser 4k is a premium-priced all-in-one mains-powered smart projector with class-leading 4K Ultra High-Resolution images and superb audio from four speakers. It’s big, bold, and performs impressively, but if your budget doesn’t stretch as far, the Full HD 1080p Epson EF-12, available on Amazon, could suit you better. It isn’t as bright, so it needs dark conditions to work at its best, but the picture quality is superb, and it sounds punchy for the size. Most people probably won’t need Ultra HD if the projector is going to be used casually, so it’s worth thinking about the features you really need before investing.

Nebula Cosmos 4K: Our verdict

If the asking price isn’t too daunting, the Nebula Cosmos 4K is a superb all-in-one portable projector. The screen size, image quality, and sound are superb, and we loved spending our evenings bingeing big screen movies and box sets with it. Yes, it’s a shame there’s no built-in battery, but we think the extra brightness is a compromise worth taking. 

The 4K Ultra High-Definition resolution and 2,400-lumens brightness are seriously impressive for a portable projector. The image produced is brilliantly detailed and will happily upscale lower resolution video feeds, making them look better than they should. You can also enjoy the Cosmos 4K in quite bright conditions, making it a good choice for providing entertainment at a garden party, although it will always look better with the curtains closed and lights dimmed, just like in the cinema.  

Is it worth the price? This depends on what sort of cinema experience you’re looking for. If all you need is a fun projector for the kids to enjoy Pixar movies on the back garden fence, the Cosmos 4K is overkill. Still, you should be seriously tempted if you want a great cinema experience with go-anywhere flexibility without needing a complex home cinema setup. 

If you're in the market for a new grill, we can confirm that the Char-Griller Akorn kamado grill is worth every dollar. There is nothing like grilling, smoking, roasting, and baking on a kamado grill. The egg-shaped design traps in the heat, moisture, and smoke from burning charcoal and infuses it back into your food. That’s genius, no?

Last year, I had a chance to try my first kamado grill and since then, they’ve been my favorite. When I found out I was going to test the Char-Griller Akorn kamado, I knew what to expect – or at least I thought I did. 

Charcoal kamado grills have gone digital with Wi-Fi and Bluetooth capabilities and I had the chance to experience this firsthand with the Akorn. And I must say... I really like this upgrade!

Read on to learn more about my experience with the Akorn kamado. You can find more brilliant suggestions in our guide on the best grills.

Char-Griller Akorn kamado grill: key product specifications

• Type: Kamado grill and smoker
• Fuel type: Lump charcoal
• Weight: 91lbs. 
• Cooking area: 445 sq. in. (314 sq. in. primary + 133 sq. in. warming rack)
• Size: L45" x W31.3" x H48.5"
• Housing material: porcelain coated steel and cast-iron cooking grates
• Size: Options include XL, Large, Medium, Small, Mini, and MiniMax (I tested a Large for this review)

Who will the Char-Griller Akorn kamado suit?

• Diverse grillers: Designed to do more than just grill. It can smoke, roast, and bake all your favorite recipes.
• Those who struggle with lighting charcoal grills: Lighting a charcoal grill is a lot easier thanks to an integrated fan that stokes the flames to perfection.
• Grillers who are tech-savvy: With Wi-Fi and Bluetooth capabilities, you can better control temperatures and cook time from the convenience of your phone.  
• Large families: The cooking area is super large and it’s outfitted with a removable warming rack.  

Setting up the Char-Griller Akorn kamado

The Akorn kamado arrived on my doorstep in a large square box, and I had to assemble it. I’m not a big fan of putting any kind of product together, much less a large kamado grill like this one that has a lot of parts to it. 

This became especially apparent when I started to assemble the grill and found that I couldn’t connect the bottom shelf to the legs. Apparently, I had to loosen the leg screws, attach the bottom shelf, then tighten them one at a time. The instructions did not communicate this.

So – I had some help. My parents were staying with me for a few days before a family reunion and me and my dad put the grill together. There were a few mishaps such as running out of lock washers. 

Char-Griller provided a selection of hardware, like the lock washers, but by the end of the assembly process, we ran out of them. We followed the instructions to a "T" so I'm not sure why enough washers were not provided. 

We also found the instructions a bit confusing by the end, especially as it related to the fan box and connecting the LCD digital display. We figured it out eventually.

Getting started

Before I could use the grill for the first time, I had to season it. I’ve seasoned other grills in the past, but the Akorn kamado has a more extensive process than most because it has cast-iron cooking grates.

I had to coat both sides of the cooking grate with a food grade oil and heat the grill to 350 degrees. I then let the grill surface season for 20 minutes. After that, I had to pause the fan on the grill and allow the grates to cool, before recoating both sides of the cooking grates with oil again and seasoning it for another 20 minutes.

Char-Griller suggests doing the process up to three times to improve the non-stick surface of the cast-iron grates. I only did it twice, but now looking back, I would say that three times is best. The first time I cooked on the grill, the chicken got stuck. If I had seasoned it three times, perhaps I could have prevented that.

Lastly, I needed to download the Char-Griller app before using the grill. It was simple to do, and the grill had no trouble connecting to my phone. You can tell it’s connected by a little phone symbol on the LCD digital display. The connection does drop if I’m about 50 feet away, but it connects immediately when I move closer to the grill.

What is the Char-Griller Akorn kamado like to use?

I had never used a Wi-Fi/Bluetooth-enabled grill prior to testing the Char-Griller Akorn, so I was very excited to see how it would benefit the grilling process. It did not disappoint.

I have cooked various meals on it for this review, including a pork loin, chicken, fish, steak, Brussel sprouts, squash, potatoes, and corn on the cob. The first thing that I noticed about the grill is how large the grilling surface area is. It’s one thing to say that the primary grilling surface is 314 square inches, but it’s another thing to see it covered with four chicken tenderloins, two pieces of fish, and two cast irons filled with Brussel sprouts and potatoes. 

This grill is perfect for cooking for large families and groups, especially if you want to smoke large meats. The additional warming rack, which is removable and can pivot in and out of the grill, was especially helpful in keeping food warm. If you use the warming rack, keep in mind that the food will continue to cook slightly due to the way the egg-style grill moves heat around.

Cooking on the Akorn kamado grill

When I grilled, I started by adding lump charcoal below the cast-iron cooking grate. I then added a fire starter before lighting it. Per the grilling tips, I left the lid open for three to five minutes before opening the fan cover on the side of the grill and closing the lid.

Now this is where things got interesting. The biggest drawback of cooking on a charcoal grill in my opinion is how difficult it is to light the charcoal, especially since most of the grills that I’ve tested don’t allow you to use lighter fluid – including this one (which surprised me since it’s a steel kamado and not ceramic.). Fire starters make things easier, but I still have trouble getting a fire started. However, the Akorn kamado is different.

To get the fire going after I closed the lid, I used the knob on the digital display to set my desired temperature. It’s quite easy to do and once I chose the right temperature, I pushed the button. It flashes with a suggestion that’s between “d-1” and “d-5.” This indicates to what extent I need to adjust the air vent at the top of the grill. The vent is labeled between 1-5 and I slide it to whatever the monitor tells me to do. So, if it says, “d-3,” I slide the vent to “3.”

At the same time, the fan on the side of the grill began to run. It effectively fans the fire at the exact rate needed to reach the temperature you want. With this process, the grill heated up quickly – much faster than I’ve ever experienced with any charcoal grill prior. 

I watched the temperatures rise on the app and when it reached my desired temperature, it notified me with an alert. Rather than lighting the BBQ, then sitting by it and watching the fire, I was able to go inside the house and prepare my meats and vegetables. 

When the temperature was just right, I would bring my meats and vegetables outside and set them on the side shelf before lifting the lid and placing them on the grill surface as I saw fit. Then I used the digital display to set a timer. The timer is designed for hours and minutes, and as soon as it was set, it appeared on the app.

Again, I returned inside and cleaned dishes or set the table while the grill managed the temperature and timer I had set. When the timer was up, it sent me a notification on my phone. If I had been outside at the time, I would have also heard the grill start beeping to notify me that the timer was up.

The Akorn auto-kamado is outfitted with two temperature probe sockets and comes with one temperature probe. I used it to measure the internal temperatures of the different meats I cooked. I’m by no means a pro at using these, but I did find the probe to be a bit wonky at times. It would say that the meat’s internal temperature wasn’t at a safe-to-eat temperature, and yet, if I cut open the meat, it would be completely cooked through.

The first time it happened, I was cooking chicken and didn’t want to take the chicken off the grill too early, but I ended up cooking it too long (and it was dry) because the probe wasn’t accurate. But then I used it to test the temperature of my steak another time, and the probe worked well. I’ve seen other reviews of people who said the temperature probe has been wonky for them too, so just something to keep in mind.

In terms of flavoring and taste, I was super impressed with how the grill did. I liked how the cast-iron surface created charred lines on my corn on the cob and that my pork loin was incredibly delicious and juicy from the smoking process.

Cleaning and maintaining the Akorn kamado grill

After each use, I’d close the top, the vent, and turn off the fan, so that the fire would die, before rolling it back into my garage. Because it’s made of steel, the Akorn has a higher chance of rusting through because of the elements so if you leave it outside, make sure you have a cover.

Removing the ash is quite simple and should be done before you use the grill each time. All I had to do was unclip the ash tray from the bottom of the grill, throw out the ash, and then replace it.

One thing I should note is that I found that it burns through lump charcoal much faster than the Big Green Egg, which is the other kamado style grill I’ve reviewed. I can fill up the Big Green Egg and use that same pile of charcoal two to four times. But with the Char-Griller Akorn, I had to refill it every time with more lump charcoal. 

While I love how the fan lights the fire quickly and maintains the temperature you want, I think it burns charcoal more quickly. A steel construction doesn’t help to maintain the heat as well as a ceramic kamado so I’m not surprised the charcoal burns faster. This is something to keep in mind because you will have to buy more charcoal for this type of grill than you might have to do with ceramic kamados.

Ordering, delivery and warranty

Order the Akorn kamado from the Char-Griller website, Home Depot, or Lowe’s. Delivery times vary depending on where you buy it from, but generally don’t take more than 5 business days. It arrives in a single large box, and you’ll have to put it together.

In terms of returns, Char-Griller does offer a full refund to customers who can ship it back in its original packaging. Unfortunately, shipping prices are not reimbursed. If you purchase the Akorn from a store, you’ll need to return it directly to the store as Char-Griller will not accept those third party purchases.

Perhaps the most impressive aspect of Char-Griller is that they have a five-year ‘burn and rust-through warranty’ which goes well beyond the grilling industry’s usual one-year warranty. Five years from the date of purchase, any rust or burn through of the hood and bottom of the Akorn kamado will be covered by the warranty. The ash pan and any defective parts fall under a one-year warranty.

Keep in mind that the warranty does not include scratches, dents, corrosion, abrasive and chemical cleaners, discovering by heat, or surface rust of the discoloration of steel surfaces.  

How does the Akorn kamado rate online?

The Char-Griller Akorn kamado rates favorably online. From the 14 reviews on the Char-Griller website, the grill has a 4.9 rating out of 5 stars. On the Lowe’s website, it has a 4.8 rating among 33 reviews, and on the Home Depot website, it is rated a 4.6 among 19 reviews.

Overall, most people had positive experiences with the grill. A few customers mentioned defective parts like the temperature probe and fan, but things like that will happen on occasion. What is most important to point out is that many reviewers were not happy that the warranty did not cover dents that occurred during shipping or in the factory. 

Is it worth it?

Kamado-style grills are a fantastic cooking tool for any home, but the reality is that many of them are expensive. This is why I love the Char-Griller Akorn kamado. Because of the steel construction, it’s an incredibly affordable grill. Yes, the steel construction may not retain heat as well, but it doesn't seem to affect the actual flavoring of the meal itself. 

In my opinion, this grill has everything you could need – a large cast-iron cooking surface, warming rack, three shelves, and a rolling stand. Not to mention, the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth capabilities makes grilling, smoking, roasting, and baking on this grill incredibly easy. Anything that improves the grilling process is a good investment in my book.

About this review, and the reviewer

Alex Temblador is a Dallas-based freelance writer who has covered home, design, architecture, and art in publications like Real Homes, Dwell, Architectural Digest, Artsy, Neighborhoods.com, Culture Trip, among many others. 

Her Sears & Roebuck house sits on half an acre of land and features a stunning wraparound porch. When she's not sitting on her porch with a cup of tea and her laptop, you'll find the Mixed Latine writer scrounging through estate sales and vintage shops looking for unique objects to bring 'The Starlight House' to life. 

As with all our reviews, the Char-Griller Akorn kamado has been tested first-hand in her home, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. We are not paid to review this product (nor any products we test). The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand unless we are able to keep it as we are with this grill. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time.

Should you be searching for the ultimate portable BBQ, then the Weber Go Anywhere is equipped with everything you need to cook up a storm outdoors. Wherever you are, that is, whether that be on your own patio, camping in the woods, or on the beach for a sunset picnic, the Weber Go Anywhere makes grilling easy and convenient, whilst ensuring that you can cook on the go.

The Weber Go Anywhere might just be the ultimate buy for adventurers who love to barbecue food. It's fit for couples and small families alike, whilst you can use its generous cooking space to batch cook for more people, too. It can tackle anything from joints of meat to veggies and your classic hamburgers, thanks to its handy lid. It's easy to clean once you're finished and neatly tucks together to be carried with ease, whether for a 5-minute walk to your car or a 5-mile hike home.

I've been testing a huge range of portable grills and BBQs, from the likes of Weber, Everdure, BergHOFF, and other popular brands. Read my verdict below on the Weber Go Anywhere, and keep scrolling for how this model compares to Weber's Smokey Joe, too. If you can squeeze something larger on your patio, then don't miss our complete list of the best grills for more reviews.

Weber Go Anywhere product specs

• Fuel type: Charcoal
• Dimensions: H36.9cm x W53.4cm x D31cm
• Cooking area dimensions: W42cm x D26cm
• Weight: 6.78kg

Unboxing the Weber Go Anywhere

The Weber Go Anywhere is a compact little BBQ, and this shows in the size of its box. It arrives without its feet on and with the handle detached, to make it smaller to package. Our initial thoughts of the Go Anywhere were nothing other than positive. Immediately we noticed how high quality it is, and its sizeable cooking space. It folds away both easily and neatly and overall is a tidy and succinct piece of kit. It's also surprisingly stable.

When it comes to assembly, you need only spend five or so minutes. You attach the handle to the lid and the feet to the actual BBQ. It's very simple and the instructions are straightforward. You don't need any tools to do this, other than the plastic tool that comes included.

Ease of use

Before you begin to add charcoal and light your BBQ, you'll want to ensure that all vents are open to allow airflow whilst cooking. This includes the handle vents and the vents on each side of the bowl. After using the briquette bowl to measure how much charcoal you need and lighting the BBQ, it will take around 25 to 30 minutes to get hot and be ready to cook on. You'll want to grease the grates before cooking to avoid food getting stuck.

I tested this BBQ in my garden, four times in total. I used it to cook burgers, sausages, chicken wings, a joint of beef and corn on the cobs. Everything we cooked turned out perfectly, and within the time we imagined. This BBQ offers enough space to cook for a family if you are cooking food in batches. Once lit, the BBQ should stay hot enough to cook four, or maybe even five (depending on what you're cooking) batches of food. Otherwise, for couples it's ideal for cooking several items of food at once. You can portion the BBQ so that your meats won't interact and you can also rearrange the charcoal to indirectly cook any delicate foods you have – if you're grilling fish, for instance – or if you want to keep your food warm once it's cooked. In short: Its cooking space is impressively large thanks to the fact it's rectangular rather than circle, which most other Weber charcoal BBQs are.

Overall, cooking on this BBQ couldn't be easier. The ease of having a lid makes cooking speedy and temperature regulation easy. This makes it easy to ensure even cooking on both sides of meat, or all sides of a joint. It has a hinged lid to protect the BBQ from the weather, plus when it comes to cleaning the BBQ, it's a breeze. 

Cooking burgers and small cuts of meat
You can fit six to eight burgers on this BBQ at any one time. It took less than 10 minutes to cook four burgers on this BBQ, and they turned out very juicy. 

Besides the burgers, we cooked some tomato and herb chipolata sausages. These are thin, so bear in mind they didn't take as long to cook as a normal sausage would. These took around 15 minutes to cook.

Our next batch of food, on the same day as cooking all of the above, was chicken wings. We managed to fit an impressive amount of these on the BBQ at once, and thanks to the use of the lid, they cooked beautifully. We left these on the BBQ for 15 minutes and they came out succulent with crispy skin, and they tasted great.

Cooking larger joints of meat
We cooked a joint of beef on this BBQ, and it was the first thing we cooked after heating it up for the second time.

First of all, the joint we bought was a little large, and with only two of us eating it we thought it would be best to half it. This way we could also cook it at different temperatures.

We popped both bits of the joint directly onto the grill, once seasoned, and popped the lid on. We left them for around six minutes and then checked on them, and flipped them over for even cooking. After another six minutes, we turned them on their side for a couple of minutes and then we decided to cut into one to see what they were looking like. The joint we cut into we took off into the kitchen to rest, and then the other one we left for an extra five minutes.

After a total cooking time of 22 minutes and 17 minutes, these were cooked and ready to rest. Admittedly, we could have cut the cooking time slightly as after being left to rest they came out slightly more well done than we'd have liked. Next time, it would have been handy to have a cooking thermometer to check the temperature without having to slice into the joint.

Nevertheless, cooking a joint on this BBQ was more than easy, with a spacious grill area and a lid to use too. The meat also tasted incredible, even though it was overcooked for us. It had a lovely crisp to it and the flavor and succulence was as if they had been cooked in the oven for hours on end. This might have changed our Sunday Roast game, to be honest. You can see below that the joint we cooked for longer is on the left, and the one we took off first is on the right of the board.

Cooking veggies
Of course, cooking on a charcoal grill isn't just about the meat. We also used this BBQ to cook corn on the cobs. Instead of cooking them wrapped in foil, we popped them directly onto the BBQ for a couple of minutes for added flavor, fast. This also proved to leave them with a grilled look, which we loved. These cooked surprisingly fast, and we used the lid to conceal heat and cook the cobs evenly through. We boiled them before – we just finished them off on the BBQ.

Cleaning the Weber Go Anywhere

Cleaning the Weber Go Anywhere is as easy as you'd hope. Dispose of the ash and then soak both grates in your sink. Scrub these lightly and then you can pop them in your dishwasher. 

There's a plate at the bottom of the BBQ which you can also wipe down, and put in your dishwasher if need be.

Since it's small, it can fit in your sink to give it a wet down and a wipe. It cleans quite easily as it's smooth. Just don't use a scourer as you might risk scratching it. You can wipe down the exterior of the BBQ, too, but it shouldn't really need it.

Storage and maintenance

This BBQ is super easy to put away, and you can keep it indoors or outside in your garden storage. Though if you are storing it outdoors, you may want to cover it or keep it in an area of your patio that's shielded from the water to avoid rusting. Ours fits in a kitchen cupboard, and we do leave it outside sometimes. We've left it out in the rain and it still looks good as new.

In terms of portability, this BBQs feet unhook from each other and fold around the top of the BBQ. The legs then sit tight on the lid, ensuring it's sealed shut to avoid any spillages.

Nothing is needed to maintain this BBQ, just ensure that you dry it all after washing to prevent rust.

How does the Weber Go Anywhere rate online?

It's unsurprising to us that the Weber Go Anywhere is highly rated online, in both the US and the UK.

On Amazon, reviewers have given it 4.8 stars out of 5. Comments include how it's brilliantly easy to use, built to last, and easy to clean.

At Walmart, customers rate it 4.6 stars out of 5. The majority of reviewers say they love how lightweight and easy to travel with it is, plus how it can make a huge range of foods.

Customers at Go Outdoors rate this BBQ very highly, with some reviewers calling it a must-have item. They say it's high-quality, great for feeding families, and even more perfect for use on the go.

How does it compare to similar models?

We've also tested the other portable BBQ sold by Weber – the Smokey Joe. So, we can compare both of them and how they cook to help you decide which one is best for you.

The Weber Go Anywhere offers a larger cooking space and it's best for taking on the go, whether that's to the beach, a camping holiday, or even for a picnic. The Smokey Joe, on the other hand, is slightly smaller in terms of cooking space as it's round instead of rectangular. And, its lid doesn't lock on so it's probably best for patio cooking, just to be safe when it comes to carting around a used BBQ. Both differ in price, with the Go Anywhere being £109.99/$71 and the Smokey Joe £99.99/$57. 

Anyone with a keen eye for design, note that the Smokey Joe comes in a range of colors, whilst the Go Anywhere is only available in black.

Should you buy the Weber Go Anywhere?

In one word: Yes! I loved using this little BBQ, and the fact it can do everything a larger charocal BBQ can but without taking up any floor space is a dream. 

I have a small patio and live with only one other person, so it offers plenty of space for us and we can use it when we have guests over for dinner. Our outside space isn't private, so we avoid leaving it outside when we're not in – it fits neatly in our kitchen cupboard. My only complaint? It doesn't come in a range of colors. I'd love it in cream, or something more colorful to make a statement atop my table.

 About this review, and the reviewer

Annie is our Deputy Ecommerce Editor at Gardeningetc and she reviews everything from hot tubs to patio cleaners and BBQs for us. Annie has a small terrace in South London and is forever looking for things to buy to maximize her outdoor space. 

Annie tested this BBQ over several months, and she cooked on it a total of four times. She cooked on it for just her and her husband-to-be three times, and once she cooked for seven people, in batches. She has reviewed three other portable BBQs in total.

Annie is allowed to keep this Weber BBQ and will be updating this review again once she has used it several more times.

For more information on how we test products, see our dedicated piece.

The Char-Broil Big Easy Smoker, Roaster, and Grill is in a class of its own. Similar in style, if not quite as stylish as the Big Green Egg, it earns the Easy moniker by being gas-powered. No poking about with charcoal here. It’s also pretty easy to set up and clean.

Featuring Char-Broil’s celebrated Tru-Infrared technology, the Big Easy uses radiant heat to cook quickly, without drying the meat out. Smoking in the Big Easy yields superior results, flavor-wise, compared to any grill-top smoker box we’ve tried, but the size of the grill means this isn’t the best choice for regular BBQ fodder, such as burgers and sausages. 

The Char-Broil Big Easy’s small footprint makes it perfect for small patios and even balconies, but don’t be fooled by its diminutive scale – it can pack away an 11kg turkey should you be entertaining the masses on Thanksgiving or Christmas Day! We tried the Char-Broil Big Easy in prime summer BBQ season, testing out various recipes from the Big Easy Grilling Guide, as well as a few lazy Sunday roasts (with salad, it was far too sunny for all the trimmings!). 

Once you’ve found out how we got on, why not take a look at the other contenders in our best grills guide.

Char-Broil Big Easy product specifications:

• Fuel type: Gas
• Number of burners: 1 x 5.3kW
• Dimensions (with lid closed): H92 x W59 x D59.4cm / H36.2" x W23.4" x D23.1cm
• Weight: 22.7kg / 50lbs
• Materials: Porcelain coated cast iron and stainless steel
• Total cooking area: D38.5cm / D180sq"
• Guarantee: 2 years

Unboxing the Char-Broil Big Easy

The Char-Broil Big Easy arrives in an easy-to-manage, if heavy, box which is cleverly packed to minimize wasted space. This did make it tricky to pull everything out without wrecking said box, but there wasn’t an excessive use of plastic or polystyrene inside, which is always appreciated in our household (the council recycling service takes barely any plastic). 

Assembly was easier than some regular BBQs I have tested, but still took about 14 steps and more screwing and bolting together than I’d have liked. It took around 40 minutes to connect the gas valve and control panel, add on the legs and various handles, plus the lid, base, and grease tray. The drip plate on the underside didn’t fit very well, but since you’ll never see it after assembly, it’s no biggie. 

Overall, the Char-Broil Big Easy looks like a serious piece of kit – well-built and substantial – but there are a few less robust elements that let it down a touch. For example, the grease tray was quite clunky to slide in and out and the smoker box didn’t latch on terribly smoothly. The two control switches also felt loose and plastic-y. In my opinion, wobbliness at these touchpoints can make the entire product feel cheaply made, even if that’s not the case.

On the plus side, I did admire the handy hanging spots around the Big Easy, which ensured all the BBQ tools and accessories were kept on board and close to hand. It also comes with a handy thermometer probe, plus clips for hanging ribs inside. And there’s no denying the materials used to make the Big Easy are top class. We’re talking a cast iron exterior, porcelain coated grill, and decent-grade stainless steel inside. 

Using the Char-Broil Big Easy

While the Big Easy arrived with printed copies of the Assembly Instructions and Operating Instructions (which were VERY basic), there was no sign of the Grilling Guide that I’d spotted in the downloads section of the website. Luckily my printer was stocked with ink (rare) so I could print it out as it contains a lot more information than the literature sent and includes some handy recipes at the end. Definitely download it if you don’t receive one.

Like the grill on most BBQs, the Big Easy’s stainless-steel cooking chamber needs to be seasoned before first use. Following the guidelines, I used an oil spray bottle to blitz the interior with vegetable oil and then gave it a wipe down with a kitchen towel to get rid of any puddles. I then turned the Big Easy on the High setting and shut the lid to let it burn off. 

Around 10 minutes later the chamber had stopped smoking and the metal had turned bronze, which is how you know it is good to go. Char-Broil recommends adding a light spray of oil after each use to keep the chamber seasoned and help prevent any rusting. The instruction guide suggests you treat the cooking chamber in the same way you would a cast iron skillet – i.e., keep it well seasoned and the more you use it, the hotter and more evenly it will cook. 

Cooking on the Char-Broil Big Easy

There are two settings on the Char-Broil Big Easy – High or Low. To turn it on, you just turn the left-hand control knob to your preferred setting and then twist the right-hand ignition knob until the gas ignites, which it did on the first turn, every time.

Smoking
I’ve never used a smoker before, so was excited to see how it would impact the taste of our food. The Char-Broil Big Easy has a smoker box attached to the side, which you fill with wood chips. You can fill the box with real wood chips or smoking pellets; the former will smoke for about 45 minutes and the latter twice as long. Since my husband is a cabinetmaker, we went with the real wood, which he made by chipping a piece of oak. If you buy pellets, you can get more adventurous flavors like applewood and hickory. 

To test out the smoker capabilities we decided to smoke a shoulder of pork for Sunday lunch. I filled up the smoker box with oak, taking care not to overfill as per the instructions, and turned the Char-Broil Big Easy on High, closing the lid. Once it started smoking, around 10 minutes later, it was time to lower the pork in. I placed the joint in the bottom of the basket with the thermometer inserted, then turned the heat to Low and left it to it. 

I was hoping to slow roast the pork, pulled pork style, but it was obvious within the first hour that wasn’t going to happen. In fairness, my joint was only about 1.9kg, whereas I’ve always bought a much bigger joint to do pulled pork in the past. 

It took a little under two hours for the pork to cook through, ready to go. Any longer would have just dried it out, and I didn’t want to add tin foil because that would surely block out the smoked flavor! 

Having done a bit of digging online, it appears if you want to slow cook with the Char-Broil Big Easy, you’ll need a substantial joint and two layers of tin foil, possibly some marinade, and to make sure the joint is on the bottom of the basket. But I still don’t think the burners go low enough for a really slow roast. The official heat range is 135-260°C (275-500°F), but according to the supplied meat probe, it never stayed as low as 135 degrees for longer than 10 minutes. In fairness, Char-Broil does not make any slow roasting claims for the Big Easy. 

Anyway, back to the smoking. We topped the smoker box up once during roasting, which required another 10-minute burst on High (I set a timer to make sure I didn’t cremate the joint), and the flavor really was sublime. I was skeptical about how much difference a few chips of a tree could make but everyone really noticed and enjoyed the taste, especially on the outer edges of the pork, but it was also noticeable all the way through. It made an inexpensive joint of meat hugely satisfying. 

We also tried smoking chicken thighs, this time putting them on the higher shelf of the basket (using the inserts) as the instructions state the smoking is more intensive the higher it’s placed. This was a huge success; the meat was juicy and tender with a lovely smoked flavor. Oh, and if you're looking for pizza oven ideas, wood-smoked pizza (use a pizza stone and the High setting) was a taste sensation.

I did find it tricky to get the wood-chip box in and out. You need to line up a hook but the triangular shapes that the box slots into just aren’t conducive and it takes a fair amount of shunting and jiggling to get it on. 

Oh, and on the subject of trickiness, it’s not very easy to get a large joint out of the bottom of the basket without scalding your arms. We used two long BBQ prongs to wrestle the pork out. Char-Broil advises leaving your meat to rest in the basket, which will help it lift off the basket without sticking and give the metalwork a chance to cool down. 

Roasting
In the USA, the Char-Broil Big Easy is heavily marketed as an oil-free, healthy way to BBQ a turkey (presumably on Thanksgiving). With no turkeys to hand, I bought a large chicken weighing about 1.5kg from our local butcher. The instruction book recommends roasting for about 10-15 minutes per pound or using the thermometer supplied to ensure the center of the meat is 75°C (167°F).

I made a slight boo-boo with seasoning, as I bought a BBQ flavor dry rub from the butcher that included sugar. Only after I had roasted the chicken and noticed the skin had turned black did I spot the paragraph in the instruction book that says not to use seasoning containing sugar as it will burn. Luckily, we weren’t hosting a garden party for guests! I just pulled the skin off before serving and dinner was quickly devoured, again noticeably moist and tender. 

We also roasted a joint of beef and lamb during our testing period, and each time I was amazed and impressed by the speed (much quicker than our fan oven or AGA) and moisture retention. According to Char-Broil, this is down to its patented Tru Infrared technology that turns convective heat into radiant heat, which equals moist and juicy food. There are pretty diagrams to help explain this alchemy but all you really need to know is that it works!

Grilling
Even if you've got some top grilling tips up your sleeve, simple BBQ grilling is perhaps where the Char-Broil Big Easy lets itself down, but only if you have a big family or are entertaining. The 38.5cm diameter grill area was perfect for our family of four but there just wasn’t space to feed more. 

Also, you need to turn the Big Easy on for 15 minutes, on High, before you can begin grilling, which is a lot of wasted gas. The burners are at the bottom of the drum, so it’s easy to understand why it takes so long to heat up, but my regular gas BBQ is ready to cook in just over five minutes. 

On a more positive note, you can smoke on the grill (on Low with the lid down), which of course we did and enjoyed delicious smoked burgers, corn and sausages. Yum.

I also noted that the food cooked very evenly on the grill, so you didn’t have to keep reorganizing the burger layout to get them evenly browned. A final plus; the grill has an unusual grate design that means nothing falls through (I’m looking at you, chicken kebabs), and as the burners are under the drum, you don’t get any eyebrow-burning flare-ups (or scorched food) when the fat drips down.

Cleaning the Char-Broil Big Easy

When it comes to cleaning the BBQ, the official advice from Char-Broil is to use soapy water and a non-abrasive scouring pad. The FAQ section at the back of the Grilling Guide manual also suggests burning off excess grease at the end of each cooking session with a 15-minute blast on High (lid closed) until it stops smoking. 

You can use a wire grill brush on the stainless-steel drum but not for cleaning the grill plates or exterior. Happily, the basket and grill plate can go in the dishwasher, although they do take up a lot of space. Char-Broil sells aluminum liners for the grease tray, but I didn’t have any so just emptied out the wasp-ridden grease (gag) and cleaned it with soapy water (it can’t go in the dishwasher). 

I’m also fond of using the pressure washer to clean BBQs and can report our pressure washer (on highest power) worked very well on all internal elements of the Big Easy. I went for a lower power on the exterior just to be safe. 

Don’t forget to re-season the cooking chamber after cleaning. I generally just wiped the oil from the bottom of the drum, where the fat fell, to avoid interrupting the lovely seasoning that was building up and because I’m too lazy to re-season constantly! And a top tip: popping a layer of foil in the bottom of the drum, with a hole in the fat tray, speeds clean-up.

Storing the Char-Broil Big Easy

Being tall and slim, the Char-Broil Big Easy is a fairly compact unit that could slide into a corner of your shed or garage with ease. You can also buy a cover, for £21.99, that will protect it from dust, wind, air, and snow so it could feasibly stay on the patio year-round. It is fairly heavy (22.7kg), with no wheels, so you’d need help to carry it. 

How does the Char-Broil Big Easy rate online?

There are only two customer ratings on Char-Broil’s website, both five-star. One reveals they cooked a 2.3kg leg of lamb in 45 minutes, while the other declared the roast chicken is the best they’ve ever had. Praise indeed. Over on Google Reviews, the Char-Broil Big Easy gets a decent 4.4 stars, with a lot of positivity about roasting speeds and smokiness. Apparently, the Big Easy is far superior to using a smoker box on a regular gas grill. 

Complaints generally revolve around the grilling capacity and the basic instructions. More guidance on how to use the Big Easy in terms of predicted cooking times and which temperature is best for which meats were in high demand. 

How does the Char-Broil Big Easy compare?

The Char-Broil Big Easy is rather a unique proposition, and I can’t find a similar-shaped gas-powered product that’s designed to grill, roast, and smoke. The closest match is the charcoal-fuelled Weber Summit Kamado e6 but, like most Kamado-style BBQs, it is four times the price of the Char-Broil Big Easy. Plus, there’s nothing easy about charcoal cooking if you are comparing it to gas.  

A better comparison in terms of functionality would be the Char-Broil Performance Core combined with a smoker box, which also boasts Char-Broil’s Tru-Infrared technology but has a much more useful grilling surface. It has a lid for roasting joints and somewhere to hide the gas canister, making it a more appealing proposition in my eyes. Aside from the price, which is £161.99 more than the Big Easy. 

Should you buy the Char-Broil Big Easy?

Yes, the Big Easy is a lot of fun and offers plenty of flexibility compared to a regular BBQ. It does take a bit of practice to get your head around cooking on the Char-Broil Big Easy; for starters, this is absolutely not a slow cooker. But it’s also not nearly as slow as your regular fan oven so you’ll need to adjust your timing expectations compared to roasting indoors. We’d recommend spending an hour or two on YouTube where you’ll find some great recipes and advice from Big Easy converts. 

A great size for a balcony or small garden, nobody will fall in love with the Big Easy for its dodgy design. Speedy roasts and smoky goodness is where the Big Easy excels; don’t bother if you just want to grill.

About the review, and our reviewer

Linda Clayton is a professionally trained journalist, and has specialised in home, interiors and fitness for more than two decades. She’s a fastidious product reviewer, design obsessive, serial renovator, and amateur runner. 

Now on her fourth reno project (a Victorian redbrick in Devon), she is lucky to have recently completed the garden landscaping and patio area, which are finally perfect for hosting barbecues for family and friends. 

She and her husband tested the Char-Broil Big Easy over several weeks in early-mid summer, trying out a range of grilled, smoked and roasted recipes. 

While Char-Broil does not pay us to review its products, the company prefers not to have used barbecues returned as they cannot be re-sold. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time.

Backyard movie nights have surged in popularity in the last couple of years, so I was keen to review the new Samsung The Freestyle projector in my own garden to see if watching your favorite film or TV show under the stars in the comfort of your own outdoor space is all it's cracked up to be. 

With two young kids, we spend a lot of time in our garden, and enjoy hosting regular BBQs for family and friends during the summer months. We've recently invested in a really comfy outdoor sofa with plenty of space for lounging around as a family, so this review was the perfect opportunity to see if adding one of the best outdoor projectors to our garden would complete our patio setup.

I'll be the first to admit, however, that I'm not the most technically minded person out there. I'm all for trying the latest tech, but it needs to be easy to set up, user-friendly and simple to use. As soon as anything becomes tricky to operate or difficult to install, I quickly lose my patience and often end up handing the gadget in question over to my husband (or even my daughter these days) to sort out. 

One of The Freestyle's main selling points is that it offers you all of the benefits of a Smart TV in a portable projector, with direct access to your favorite streaming services at the touch of a button. So although The Freestyle can obviously be used indoors as a normal projector, I was more interested in testing its capabilities for outdoor use and whether it works as a great addition to an outdoor living setup (Gardeningetc is the home of outdoor living after all!). 

With that in mind, for this review I tested it on our patio over the course of several evenings at the height of summer, hosting a Glastonbury party for friends and then enjoying some family movie nights too. 

So was Samsung's The Freestyle projector suitable for a technophobe like me, and did it give us the summer of fun I was hoping for? Read on to find out how I got on. 

Samsung The Freestyle projector: key specs

• Dimensions: 104.2x172.8x95.2 mm
• Weight: 0.8 kg
• Resolution: 1920x1080
• Screen size: 30-100in
• Light source type: LED
• Light source life: 20,000 hours
• Throw ratio: 1:2
• Noise: 30dB
• Brightness: 550 LED Lumen
• Speaker type: 360 degrees
• Sound output: 5W
• Connectivity: HDMI

Samsung The Freestyle projector: first impressions

My Samsung The Freestyle projector arrived in a really small box with everything packed very neatly inside. The package measures just 155x252x138mm and is lightweight and easy to pick up. 

Inside the box, the projector takes up the bulk of the space, with a plug, cable and remote control in the end section of the package. The projector arrived fully assembled and I simply needed to connect it to a power source and I was good to go. 

There was a single sheet Quick Setup Guide, and mini User Manual inside the box. The User Manual runs through the main features of the projector, explains the different functions on the remote and offers some quick troubleshooting tips.

There is also an e-manual, accessed via the home button on the remote, but I didn't need to use this for the initial set up.

First impressions of the overall design are pretty favorable. Lots of projectors I've seen are simple boring white boxes with no design element whatsoever, but Samsung's The Freestyle is clearly aimed at those who favor a more design-conscious aesthetic in their home.

Its sleek cylindrical shape and white finish mean it looks more like a smart speaker, which is what the Freestyle also doubles up as. A circular cover can be screwed on the top of the projector to protect the lens, but this also turns it into an ambient light, adding yet another dimension to this feature-packed buy.

Getting started

Setting up The Freestyle was much easier than I thought it would be. For ease of use (and because in typical British summertime style it was raining at the time), I opted to do this indoors rather than outside. 

I used our portable fabric projector screen to create a blank screen on one wall, but with hindsight I think it would have been easier to remove a picture from the wall to create a blank area and just project it straight on the wall. As it was the middle of the day, we did need to close the curtains slightly to make the room darker so the projected images would show up on the wall. 

Once you've chosen your language, you can opt to set it up via a Smartphone or the remote control, and I opted for the latter. Once connected to the Wi-Fi, I had to register for a Samsung account using the remote control, which was quick and easy to do. 

You can then configure the projector's setting to suit your viewing environment, but it automatically adjusts itself (more on that later) so I found once we'd gone through the initial setup process it was already projecting a great image on the wall of the living room.

As mentioned, one of the key features of The Freestyle is that it brings you all the features of a traditional Samsung Smart TV in a projector. That means you can connect to all your favorite streaming services (Netflix, Disney+, Apple TV) using the remote control, as well as any streaming services from your choice of TV channel. 

You will have to go through the login process to access the apps on the projector, however, so if you're anything like me and can't remember any of your passwords for your Netflix/Disney+ accounts etc, be prepared for the frustration of resetting your passwords so you can then enter your updated login details on the setup screen.

That being said, it didn't take too long to do and we were soon ready to put it to test outdoors. 

What's it like to use a Samsung The Freestyle projector?

Setting up the screen

Although we have a blank white wall in the garden that we could have used as the projector screen for our backyard movie night, it's not in the best spot for our current patio setup. As I didn't want to have to rearrange our patio furniture every time we wanted to watch a movie outdoors, I bought an inexpensive portable projector screen from Amazon for under £20 (around $24) to use for this review. I went for a basic 100in one without a stand (it's like a large white bed sheet, so you could easily use one of those instead), and it comes with a cord and eyelets at the top and bottom to make it easy to hang it up in your chosen spot. 

If you're a big outdoor movie fan and want a more permanent or stable setup, I would recommend going for a something like a portable projector screen on a stand from Amazon as a basic fabric option needs to be pulled really taut for a perfect viewing experience, plus if it's windy it can move around quite a lot in the breeze and impact on the quality of the image. 

Finding the right spot for the projector

Once the screen was attached to the posts we use for our festoon lights, I placed The Freestyle on the coffee table and switched it on. You can manually adjust it to fit the size of the screen, but with it placed a couple of meters from the screen the image auto adjusted and almost filled the screen.

Samsung advises that for a screen size of 30in the projector needs to be 2.6ft (80cm) from the screen, increasing to 8.7ft (2.66m) for a screen size of 100in. 

Quality of image

The Freestyle offers full HD (1920 x 1080) resolution projection for a sharp image, and up to 550 lumens of brightness. Once it was dark enough outside, The Freestyle projected a really strong, clear image onto the screen. The colors were incredibly vibrant and really jumped out of the screen. My photos don't really do it justice, and as I mentioned before the screen itself had a large part to play in the overall viewing experience. The first evening I used the projector there was quite a strong breeze and I hadn't fastened the screen tight enough so it was moving around a fair bit. 

That being said, thanks to its Auto Focus, The Freestyle projector does automatically project a sharp, clear image on the screen. The flexible stand the proector sits on makes it really easy to point it wherever you want, too. If you were indoors, this means you could simply swivel it upwards and project on the ceiling rather than the wall (perfect for anyone who wants to lie down in bed and watch a movie perhaps!). 

One of The Freestyle's other key features is its Auto Keystone function. In short, this basically means that it will automatically adjust itself to project a perfectly straight, rectangular image, even if it's sitting on an uneven surface or you are using an angled surface for viewing. Clever stuff.  

There were a couple of times when the the projector stopped working and either the image froze or disappeared completely. The age old 'switch it off and on again' seemed to do the trick and after a reboot it worked fine again. I can't be 100 per cent sure, however, whether this issue was entirely down to the projector or more a case of a poor Wi-Fi signal at the time.

As mentioned, we did need to wait until it was reasonably dark to be able to use The Freestyle outdoors as otherwise the image just didn't show up on the screen as it was too bright outside. Placing a garden parasol over the screen helped at dusk, but it was only when it got much darker that we could really experience it in full. At the height of summer, it meant that it was around 9.30pm before we got the best possible picture and full vibrancy of image – something to bear in mind if you're thinking of using this for summer movie nights for young kids! If you have a permanent patio cover or even something like a gazebo to place the screen under, you may find it would be useable in brighter daylight. 

Sound quality

Given that Samsung's The Freestyle projector is also pitched as a smart speaker, you'd hope that the sound quality would pack some punch, and overall it didn't really disappoint. Its 360 degree speaker delivered clear, crisp sound quality in every direction, and you can easily adjust the volume level on the top of the projector or by using the remote. 

As mentioned, we used The Freestyle to watch Glastonbury coverage with friends, and even with people chatting it was plenty loud enough to hear the music really clearly. Any louder and I'm not sure our neighbors would appreciate our late-night outdoor viewing anyway! That being said, there's no denying that it didn't deliver the same depth of audio as I get when using my Sonos One speaker, but as you can connect The Freestyle via Bluetooth to an external speaker or soundbar, you could easily boost your audio experience. 

Smart TV

With direct access to your favorite streaming services at the touch of a button, you can replicate your TV viewing experience outdoors simply by switching on the projector. I definitely made use of this during the review, and easily accessed apps such as the BBC iPlayer (for the aforementioned Glastonbury coverage) as well as Disney+ for the kids. 

One of the things that has put me off investing in an outdoor projector before is that I thought it would be a hassle every time we wanted to use it, but with this you can simply switch on The Freestyle, point it at any surface, and you have instant access to all the same streaming services you would on your normal TV. A big selling point. 

Smart speaker

The Freestyle also has Samsung Bixby and Amazon Alexa built in, ensuring it can also double up as a smart speaker. It means you can switch it on, control the volume and get it to play your favorite music just by asking it to. 

Other features

A couple of features I didn't get chance to make use of during the review (but are worth a mention here) were the Ambient Mode and Mirroring Option.

The Ambient Mode allows you to project one of the pre-selected 20 backgrounds (or one of your own photos) on the screen or wall. There's everything from neon happy birthday messages (perfect for your garden parties) to city views and holiday scenes that will brighten up a blank interior wall.

The TV mirroring function means you can mirror and watch your main TV anywhere in your home (or garden). It will need to be a compatible device, but according to Samsung it means you can connect, control and project your TV in any space, even if the TV is switched off. You can also connect your phone to the Freestyle (using the Samsung SmartThings app) and mirror the content. Holiday photo slideshow anyone?

Additional options

To make a Samsung The Freestyle projector truly portable, you would need to invest in an external battery pack, meaning you wouldn't need a plug socket. You could then take it on camping trips, to the beach or simply use it in an area of your garden where you don't have a power supply. It also means there's less chance of someone tripping over the power cable in the dark (as I did on more than one occasion). 

The Freestyle I was sent to review didn't come with an additional battery pack, so I can't offer any tips on how well it would work or how long it provides power for, but if you are wanting to use this projector in the garden or away from home then I think it could be a useful investment. Samsung advises that 'The Freestyle is compatible with external batteries that are USB-PD and 50W/20V output or above'.

There's also the option of a showerproof Samsung The Freestyle case to keep it protected from the weather and any knocks and scrapes. And if you don't like the white exterior you can opt for a different colored Samsung The Freestyle skin (green, beige or pale pink) to match your projector to your exterior or interior scheme. 

How does a Samsung The Freestyle projector rate online? 

Reviews for Samsung's The Freestyle projector are largely positive. On the Samsung website, users have commented on how easy it is to set up, which certainly matches my own experience of using it. They also love the Auto Focus and how it projects a clear image incredibly quickly, and the sound is better than many people expected it would be. 

Many reviewers loved being able to access so many streaming services direct through the project, with one user commenting, 'You feel you've got a smart TV without anything hanging on your wall, and it's easy to move and use it anywhere around the house.'

There are a couple of negative comments about it rebooting mid viewing, and this happened on a couple of occasions when I was using it, as previously mentioned. 

Should you buy a Samsung The Freestyle projector?

Samsung describes The Freestyle as offering the 'Samsung Smart TV experience, with no boundaries', but I'd suggest that you do need to invest in an external battery pack for that to be entirely true. 

However, there's no denying that this is a smart piece of kit. Being able to access your favorite streaming services so easily is a big win. It's also well-designed, looks super stylish and is packed with features. I loved how easy it is to set up and its auto levelling and auto focus features mean it does all the hard work for you to get a perfectly clear and crisp image. The sound quality is pretty impressive too, and while it won't offer you a full surround sound home cinema experience that you'd get using a sound bar, it does a pretty good job. 

If you are looking for a portable projector to use as an occasional gadget for the odd outdoor movie night or to raise your pizza party or hot tub party to the next level, then there are certainly cheaper options available that would be more than up to the job. However, if you are in the market for a smart projector that you'd use regularly indoors for a home cinema experience and want the option of being able to also use it in the backyard or while you're away on holiday, this would be a great investment. 

About this review, and the reviewer

Beth Murton is the editor of Gardeningetc and lives in the Midlands, UK, with her husband, two children and her dog. Her fairly spacious garden features two patios (one for lounging and one for dining), and she regularly hosts BBQs, parties and garden pizza nights over summer for family and friends. But she also loves nothing more than a quiet afternoon or evening with her family relaxing outdoors and listening to music or reading a good book. 

She tested a Samsung The Freestyle projector over several weeks in summer, focusing on how easy it is to set up, the picture and sound quality, and whether there are any issues that potential buyers might find helpful to know. We are not paid to review this product (nor any products we test), but Samsung did supply it without charge for testing and are collecting it now the review is completed. 

Founded in Sweden in 1934, the Stiga brand has its UK headquarters in Plymouth, Devon, alongside sister-brand Mountfield. Of the two garden tool specialists, Stiga is considered the higher end, almost professional-grade option. Mountfield also has a good reputation but is pitched more towards the cost-conscious buyer. 

We live on a remote hill in mid Devon, with a garden that stretches around 1,200 sqaure metres in various parts around the house. It was once nearly an acre but since we don’t have sheep, or want to spend our lives mowing grass, we sold a plot off. We’re still left with quite a crop to manage, especially when the growing season gets going. 

For this review, I tackled as much of the lawn as possible for six weeks in late June/early July. I may have occasionally succumbed to the ride-on, when time was against me, but most Sunday mornings would see me zooming up and down the lawn with the Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower. Our neighbours were, no doubt, delighted. 

The overall terrain is mainly flat in terms of gradient (albeit lumpy), with a slope at one end. In the front garden I needed to mow as close as possible to a drystone wall, raised flower bed and a cobbled garden path. 

Read all about the highs and lows of my time with the Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower below, before checking out the rest of our best lawn mower line-up.

Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower product specs:

• Deck cutting width: 46cm
• Engine power: 139cc 4-Stroke
• Power source: Petrol
• Cutting height range: 22mm-80mm
• Fuel tank capacity: 0.75 litre
• Engine oil Capacity: 0.5 litre
• Grass box capacity: 60 litre
• Weight: 32kg
• Dimensions: H120cm x W53cm x D151cm
• Lawn size suitability: 1,200sqm
• Warranty: Five years

Unboxing the Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower

Arriving in a substantial cardboard box weighing 36.1kg, it required two people to carry into the garden for assembly. Upon opening, I dug out the Quick Start leaflet for a read and hit Gold – a.k.a. a QR code linking to this video guide. I am a visual learner, so video instructions are always preferable to manuals in my world. 

The greatest benefit of watching the video is it demonstrates how to use the box to support the handle while you attach it, and then where to cut the box so it can be wheeled out. In the past I have always tried to lift a mower out of the box, but as this machine is 32kg I’d have needed extra muscle. Following the video made it very easy to attach the handle and get the mower out without any help at all. Recommend. 

The grass box needed barely any attention, just the sides clipping to the frame, which was a relief as constructing grass boxes generally involves losing at least one fingernail. Then all I needed to do was hook the pull cord onto the keeper, pop in some oil (4 stroke SAE 30) and unleaded petrol, and it was time to start her up.  

What is the Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower like to use?

Starting
The choke is automatic so there’s no need to fiddle with any buttons or levers, just pull the cord and the Stiga Combi 748 S fires into life. Sometimes I had to pull the cord two or three times but that could be down to my weak arms more than engine issues. 

Cutting
Once it was going, there really was no stopping this lawn mower, especially in self-propelling mode, which motors along at a brisk but manageable top speed of 3.7km/h. Having tested a few person-propelled mowers recently, the self-propelling feature was extremely welcome and genuinely made light work of cutting our 1,200 square metre lawn. 

The cutting-height adjustment, in six levels ranging from 22mm–80mm, was similarly easy to manage and lifts at all four corners using one lightweight lever. I tended to stick to a safe mid-height setting, as I’m not keen on scalped grass and the results were impressively neat and even. 

The 46cm cutting width is decent enough but could have been wider to make shorter work of mowing our largest stretch of lawn, which took at least an hour, depending on growth. Ideally, you’d want a 51cm or wider for large lawns (or a ride on/robot), as those few extra centimetres can make all the difference over a bigger area.  

One of my favourite features on the Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower was the very clever Fulcrum handle, which I have never seen before. Essentially it involves a lift-up catch in the centre of the handle that enables the handle to twist 25 degrees to the left, allowing you to easily mow against garden walls and hedges. 

As we have lots of hedges, walls and raised garden beds, the ability to get tight against our lawn edging without receiving a face full of foliage was brilliant. I also think the funky handle is a great design feature; if lawn mowers could be decreed sexy, then the Stiga Combi 748 S would be a strong contender!

Emptying
The ability to discharge grass in four different ways is one of the Stiga Combi 748 S’s most heavily promoted USPs. Choose from collecting in the generous 60 litre grass box, discharging out the side, or mulching the grass back into the lawn. Stiga has also got ‘cut’ on their list, which presumably just discharges out of the back using the pin supplied to hold the back flap up, but I am not sure why you’d do that when you have the other three options to hand. 

Back to emptying; the handle on the grass box is comfortable to grip and the grass falls out freely without getting stuck in the opening (which I have experienced before and had to use a stick to lever it out). I stopped the mower and peeked inside the grass box several times during mowing to see how the grass was building up in there and am pleased to report it compacts well inside, using maximum capacity. Some less efficient mowers require emptying more frequently due to poor compaction so it’s worth checking these things.   

Side discharge
Side discharge mowing is favoured by those who like to leave a nice long gap between mowing. No Mow May supporters will do well to invest in a mower with side discharge for example. Extra-tall grass will fill the grass box too quickly and is prone to getting stuck in the chute anyways, whereas a side discharge system gets it away from the blade quickly, letting you crack on with mowing. 

We don’t leave more than a week between cuts during prime mowing season so side discharge is less relevant to us. Plus, I hate raking up grass almost as much as I hate the kids dragging cut grass indoors. Still, I did have a go with the side discharge in place and can reveal it clips on very easily (no broken fingernails) and the grass absolutely flies out the side chute, into nice, neat, rake-able rows. 

Mulching
The mulching plug slots fairly easily into the grass chute under the guard at the back but I did find it slightly tricky to align the pins that hold it firmly in position. It took a little practice to get them into the holes. 

The mulching, which I did on fairly short grass as recommended, was much more my style and meant I didn’t have a grass box to empty, nor was I wading through piles of cut grass. The Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower does an excellent job of cutting and recutting the grass and it basically disappears into the lawn, giving your lawn care a welcome essential boost. Nice. 

Cleaning the Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower

Now, if you were impressed by the sound of the Fulcrum handle, the Stiga’s wash link feature is going to blow your mind! As you can’t tip any petrol engine onto its side (you’ll flood it), washing the undercarriage is always tricksy. 

Stiga’s solution is simple but effective and I can’t help wondering why all petrol mowers don’t have them. Wash link is a small nozzle designed to connect to your garden hose, which once attached, swills water around the undercarriage of the mower, swishing away all the freshly cut grass. I couldn’t love it more. 

Storage and maintenance

The handle folds down really neatly by releasing the Fulcrum handle and twisting until it sits over the lawn mower engine. You can then rest the grassbox on top with the mulching and side chute inside. This is a medium sized mower so you’ll need a reasonable amount of space in your garage or your shed storage to keep it inside it off-season. 

Before storing for the winter, the instruction manual recommends you should start the engine in the open air and run it idle until it comes to a halt, so that it uses up any fuel left in the carburettor. I’m flagging this up as it’s not something I have done, or heard about, but it makes good sense.   

I didn’t need to do any maintenance during the test duration, but I can confirm that the oil levels are easy to check and the fuel levels easy to see. 

How does the Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower rate online?

There are not many online customer reviews of the Stiga Combi 748 S, at least not in English. Of the few I found, the majority were very complimentary and especially appreciated the auto choke and self-propelling features. 

Complaints were few and mostly revolved around the brevity of the printed instructions, which, admittedly, are pretty hard to comprehend (illustrations-wise) without the back-up of the online videos. 

How does the Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower compare to other petrol mowers?

The Stiga Combi 748 S costs just shy of £400, which isn’t cheap but certainly isn’t expensive given the solid construction and quality build. A similar model would be the Hyundai HYM460SP 4-in-1 Self-Propelled Petrol Lawnmower, which has the same configuration of grass discharging, auto choke and engine size. It has a slightly bigger grass box and fuel tank capacity, but is only aimed at 1000sq m lawns and is slightly heavier at 39kg. The Stiga beats the Hyundai on warranty ­– five years compared to three – and it also has a better range of cutting heights. 

Should you buy the Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower?

Yes, if you are looking for a petrol mower with self-propelling ease, this is a very, very impressive machine. There are plenty of fine petrol mowers out there at around the £400 price point, but, for me, the Fulcrum handle and washing connector widget ensures the Stiga Combi 748 S stands out from the crowds. I loved how easy it was to mow against walls and hedges just by simply rotating the handle a few degrees. And plugging the garden hose into the cutting deck to wash it down is, frankly, genius. 

I honestly can’t think of anything bad or even mildly negative to say about the Stiga Combi 748 S lawn mower, except perhaps that it’s not battery-powered, which is my preferred fuel method because we have solar panels! If you prefer petrol over the best cordless lawn mowers though, get this one on your list.

About this review, and the reviewer

Linda Clayton is a freelance journalist living in the wilds of mid-Devon with her husband, their two daughters and three dogs. Her fairly large south-facing garden is mostly laid to lawn, which gently slopes away with views towards Dartmoor. The smaller front garden is also mostly lawn – primarily because she hasn’t quite got the hang of weeding flowerbeds without weeding out the flowers! 

She tested the Stiga Combi 748 S over several weeks in early summer, focusing on ease of use, emptying and also had her eyes peeled for any issues or red flags that potential buyers might find helpful. We are not paid to review this product (nor any products we test), but Stiga did supply it without charge for testing and are invited to collect it afterwards. 

With a large lawn to keep tidy, testing the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower at the start of summer when the grass was long and in need of a trim was the perfect opportunity to put this petrol mower through its paces. 

Mountfield is a UK manufacturer, now based in Plymouth, that has long been associated with reasonably priced, well-made rotary mowers. My parents still use the one they bought when I was a gawky teenager. Established in 1962, the brand became part of the Stiga Group in 2000, and Stiga now makes many of the engines for Mountfield mowers, including the entry-level model I tested for this review. 

Our garden measures somewhere around 1,000-1,200sq m, the majority of which is at the rear and side of the house, with a smaller, more recently laid lawn at the front. That’s quite a lot of grass. My husband Nick and I usually tackle it in tandem – him on a ride-on and me sorting out the edges and hard-to-reach parts with a cordless strimmer and mower.

For the purposes of this review, I took over the whole shebang for six weeks in late May/June. Great for my step-count, not so great for my leisure time – Nick was delighted. As the grass was growing like billy-o, I was able to alternate the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower with another mower I was reviewing, cutting twice a week (once with each mower). 

The overall terrain is mainly flat, with a fairly mild slope at one end. In the front garden, I needed to mow as close as possible to a drystone wall, raised flower bed and a cobbled garden path. 

In our verdict, this is one of the best lawn mowers around. See how this four-star model fared in our testing.

Mountfield HP185 139cc lawn mower product specifications:

• Deck cutting width: 46cm
• Engine power: 139cc 4-Stroke
• Power source: Petrol
• Cutting height range: 22–65mm (six intervals)
• Fuel tank capacity: 0.75 litre
• Engine oil Capacity: 0.44 litre
• Grass box capacity: 60 litres
• Weight: 23kg
• Dimensions: H110cm x W54cm x D148cm
• Lawn size suitability: Up to 1500sq m
• Warranty: 2 years

Unboxing the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower

Arriving in a substantial cardboard box (measuring H49xW56xD82.5cm), I don’t think the Mountfield HP185 would fit in the boot of my car, so delivery to my door (they brought it inside the hallway in fact) was perfect. I mention this because Mountfield sells a version of this mower (same size, different engine) in B&Q and I’d recommend double-checking your boot capacity before buying in-store. 

Inside the box was the main mower, the handle, grass box and mulching plug, plus an instruction manual and a few bolts to get it all together. There was also a single A4 page with assembly instruction with bigger, better illustrations that were much easier to understand! 

Assembly was pretty straightforward and essentially involved attaching the handle (in two parts) with the easy-screw motion-head bolts and quick-release clips supplied. Then I had to build the grass collector box, inserting a metal frame and screwing it into position. The latter was a tad tricky as the angle of the screwdriver was awkward in relation to the screwheads, but I grabbed the electric screwdriver for extra power and soon had the frame locked down. The netting grass-box sides then clamped onto the frame with relative ease. 

Finally, the pull cord needed to be hooked onto a keeper on the handle so it’s closer to you when starting, or you can leave it where it is if you don’t mind bending down. If you are struggling with the print instructions, it is well worth checking out this assembly video by Mountfield. It's also worth noting that some gardening specialists stocking the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower offer pre-assembly as part of their delivery service (the mower is assembled and tested before it’s delivered on a pallet), which could be worth considering if you’re not confident with a screwdriver/too busy.

What is the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower like to use?

As with any petrol mower, before I could start thinking about how to mow the lawn with it, I had to add petrol and oil, neither of which are supplied. The Mountfield HP185 runs on 4-stroke oil (we had some universal SAE 30 4-stroke engine oil in the shed that was compatible) which, obviously, goes in the oil tank. Then you just need to add unleaded petrol, taking care not to overfill or overtighten the cap. A small amount of air comes in through the cap threads and overtightening can cause the engine to fail.

Starting
As the choke is automatic, there’s no need to prime the engine or adjust the throttle, you simply hold the brake lever into the handle and pull the cord sharply towards you. On my very first pull, the engine started with a slight puff of smoke and a heartening roar! Happy days.

The grass was pretty long on first use, which was during the first decent spell of summer sunshine after far too many weeks of rain, so I notched the cutting height quite high to prevent the long grass clogging everything up. I loved that the height adjustment was all on one handle – I’ve tested mowers where you have to adjust at all four wheels, which is tiresome – and found it very easy to change through the six levels.  

I’m not going to lie, that first mow was hard going, but more down to the length and wilderness of our grass than the Mountfield HP185’s cutting prowess. Saying that, I would have given my back teeth for a self-propelling mower (or ride-on) and ended up with a blister in the middle of my right hand when the job was finished, a couple of hours later. Subsequent cuts were significantly easier, and blister free, so I won’t hold it against the Mountfield HP185.

Cutting
Overall, the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower did an admiral job on our lawns, which, I may have mentioned, are not perfectly kempt. It is fitted with an anti-scalp plate at the front that is designed to prevent that scalping effect you can get when you hit uneven ground and it worked really well. None of those mad bald patches and alarming grinding noises I’ve experienced near the edges of the lawn with past mowers. 

I never got down to the lowest height setting, as that would have left us with scrappy, brown lawns, but there was definitely plenty of adjustment for my needs to allow me to keep on top of our lawn care. I also liked how close the Mountfield HP185 could get to the walls and borders, which minimised the need to use a strimmer. 

While a self-propelled or riding lawn mower is always going to be my preference, after that first hellish cut, pushing the Mountfield HP185 along really wasn’t hard at all, even on the part of our lawn that slopes. This smooth ride is most likely due to the robust 20cm diameter wheels and also the lightness of the mower, which makes it almost effortless to push along, especially when on level ground. It looks a lot sturdier than its 24kg weight, and I could just about lift the whole thing to get it off the steps of the patio (where I built it), using the chunky handle at the front.  

Emptying
Moving on to better news. Grass box emptying is very easy – the usual lift up and shake out technique – and the grass compacts well inside so you don’t have to empty it with annoying frequency, even when the grass height is insane. The flapper-style ‘box full’ indicator (when the flap shuts flat, it’s time to empty) was simple but very effective, too.   

Grass discharge
During the mowing test period, I also tried out the Mountfield HP185’s other two grass dispelling options. The first is rear discharge and involves removing the grass box, popping a pin under the guard to stop it blocking the exit point and allowing the grass to belch out the back. Rear discharge is generally aimed at rougher ground or really high grass, perhaps an orchard for example, where you just need the grass cut without getting blocked in the chute and don’t mind raking it up or are happy to let it rot down. I can confirm it worked as it should, but I’m not into raking and don’t like the kids traipsing dead grass into the house so this option was not for me.  

The second option, the mulching plug, slots easily into the grass chute under the guard and then the mower cut the grass into fine blades before blasting it back down into the lawn. Much more useful, especially if you are cutting, as I was, twice a week. Not having the dead weight of a grass box to push along was very welcome, and I also appreciated not having to empty said grass box. Luckily, there wasn’t much evidence of the mulched grass coming into the house (via small feet and paws) and I think I noticed the lawn was greener looking a couple weeks along, too. We’re not talking verdant fertilizer-induced green with brilliant lawn mowing patterns, just a little healthier.

Cleaning the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower

As you can’t tip the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower, or any petrol lawn mower to be fair, onto its side, keeping the undercarriage (cutting deck) clean isn’t terribly easy. I went with a slight backwards tilt and then used the garden hose at full pressure to wash off any pulped grass post-mowing. A wooden stick also works. If you don’t then the grass will harden in storage, making future cleaning a whole new ballpark of awkward lifting and scraping. A lesson learnt the hard way. 

As mentioned, the grass collection box is very easy to empty and it’s also no biggie to pull out any lingering grass from the chute before you store the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower away. I did give it a bit of a hose down one day, after noticing the mesh was clogged with grass. Blocked mesh is something to be avoided as it reduces how much grass the box will hold before the ‘box full’ indicator comes on, and ultimately increase the number of times you’ll have to traipse to the compost heap. 

Storage and maintenance

The handle folds down easily using quick-release grips at the side. This isn’t a huge lawn mower but nor is it targeted at compact, space-saving storage so you’ll need a decent size shed or garden storage to house it. There is a large handle on the front of the blade deck, which is helpful for lifting the Mountfield HP185 over small obstacles or up steps.

I didn’t really need to do a lot of maintenance during the test duration, but I did attempt to check the oil levels, which is good practice. Being black, the oil dipstick isn’t very easy to read but I could see that it hadn’t raced through the oil and there was still plenty in the tank after several weeks. 

The fuel is easy to top up if you have a petrol can with a flexible hose, and the fuel consumption also seemed fair. It’s hard to quantify without the kind of stats you get on a car, but, roughly speaking, I was refilling the 0.75 litre tank every other time I mowed.

Lubricating all moving parts is an essential longer term maintenance chore that you’ll need to be willing to do before buying any petrol mower.

How does the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower rate online?

First up, when checking out reviews, it’s important to make sure they are for the right Mountfield HP185 model. The one I tested had a 139cc Stiga engine, but there also seems to be a slightly cheaper 125cc model with a Briggs & Stratton engine out there.   

Once I’d tracked down the correct reviews, I couldn’t really find any negative feedback for the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower. Most owners have found it very reliable, solidly built and great value for money. There were comments about rubbish assembly instructions and difficulties constructing the grass box but once the mower is built, the comments are hugely favourable. Lots of love for the automatic choke and easy height adjustment. 

How does the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower compare?

Retailing at around £219.99-£249.99, the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower is, undeniably, excellent value for money. 

The closest competitor from an equally well-respected brand would probably be the Cobra M46SPC lawn mower (available at Amazon), which also has a 46cm cutting width, but it is self-propelled and costs a little more at around £279.99. 

The Cobra offers a few more cutting heights (10, ranging from 25mm to 75mm) but it’s a little heavier (33kg) so could be harder to manoeuvre when the engine isn’t running. The Cobra does seem like a good option if you are seeking a self-propelled alternative to the hand-propelled Mountfield.

Should you buy the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower?

It’s really hard to find fault with the Mountfield HP185 lawn mower, which is a strong recommendation in itself. Comfortable to use, not excessive on the vibration front, nor painfully loud, the grass box is easy to empty and the generous 20cm wheels are easy enough to push along. The powder-coated steel chassis looks and feels ruggedly robust, and fuel economy was also decent, which is important given today’s petrol prices. 

While the Mountfield HP185 is lightweight and not hard to push, personally I prefer the extra assistance you get from self-propelled mowers, especially when tackling our main lawn, which can get a bit laborious after a while. I also suspect those with steep lawns in a sloping garden might struggle to push the Mountfield HP185 back up slopes.

In short, if you are looking for a low cost, hand-propelled petrol mower, then the Mountfield HP185 should be at the very top of your hit list.

About this review, and the reviewer

Linda Clayton is a freelance journalist living in the wilds of mid-Devon with her husband, their two daughters and three dogs. Her fairly large south-facing garden is mostly laid to lawn, which gently slopes away with views towards Dartmoor. The smaller front garden is also mostly lawn – primarily because she hasn’t quite got the hang of weeding flowerbeds without weeding out the flowers! 

She tested the Mountfield HP185 over several weeks in the early-to-mid cutting season, focusing on ease of use, emptying and also had her eyes peeled for any issues or red flags that potential buyers might find helpful. We are not paid to review this product, but Mountfield did supply it without charge for testing and are invited to collect it afterwards. 

For more information on how we test products at Gardeningetc, see our guide.

The Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer is somewhere in the middle of the brand's hedge trimmer range. With models measuring from 45cm to 65cm, and long reach variants of some of these, we decided the 50cm model would be a good all-rounder for those wanting a reliable hedge trimmer.

Ryobi is well established for its cordless tech, and this tool uses the same battery as other products in the ONE+ power range, which includes over 150 battery-powered tools. From drills to strimmers and everything in between, we can see the appeal of this particular single battery system for anyone looking to build out their power tool arsenal. You can buy the bare tool to save money – but only if you already have one of the 18V ONE+ batteries from something else.

With savings to be made if we got on with this product and other tools in the range, we were keen to see if the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer is worth the money. We also wanted to see how it matches up against the best cordless hedge trimmers on the market.

Find out how it fared when put to the test in my garden.

Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer specifications

• Power: 18V
• Standard equipment: Hedgesweep attachment, blade sheath 
• Blade length: 50cm
• Blade speed: 1350 rpm
• Blade type: Diamond ground
• Max cutting capacity: 24mm
• Weight (without battery): 2.4kg 
• Weight with battery pack (EPTA): 2.8kg 

First impressions 

The Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer is presented in a well designed, custom-shaped box that is actually not much larger than the trimmer itself. Similar to other products I have seen in the past, Ryobi’s distinctive branding and colour scheme was present on everything, both inside and outside the box. 

I was pleased to see that there was no plastic packaging and everything was recyclable. That said, it still felt well protected and very secure. I've commented on Ryobi’s approach to this in the past and think it is something other manufacturers should follow. 

The only other items in the box were a plastic ‘Hedge Sweeper’ (more on that later), an instruction manual and a leaflet with service centre contact information. 

Getting started

Unlike larger power tools, the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer required no assembly at all. Simply slide off the protective plastic cover, plug in a battery and you are ready to go. 

Like other Ryobi models in the ONE+ range, there is no battery or charger included in the box. This means that unless you are already a Ryobi customer, you will need to purchase at least one battery before you can use the machine. Hopefully this shouldn’t catch too many people out because there is a red warning to this effect on the box and it is sold as a ‘bare tool’.  

I prefer the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer over models such as the Flymo SimpliCut li because the battery is removable. Should a battery fail, it is far better to be able to replace it than lose the entire tool. 

The accompanying manual comes in the form of small booklet featuring the usual dos and don’ts for how to use a hedge trimmer along with instructions in the form of illustrations. Everything is very clear and easy to follow and it is definitely worth keeping hold of. I like Ryobi’s manuals because, in my experience, well-drawn illustrations are usually far easier to follow than photographs. 

I was pleased to find that the hedge trimmer feels like a well made piece of equipment. The plastics are of a good quality and the switches operate with a satisfying click. Interestingly, the base section of the machine appears to be lifted straight from Ryobi’s power drill range. I wasn't sure if that was for ergonomic reasons, although this is the claim on the packaging, or just to accommodate the ONE+ battery, which also works on drills. 

The cutting bar feels very sturdy; the metal is both thick and well finished. I think that it would take quite a lot of effort to physically damage the blade and, with proper use and maintenance, it should last a very long time. 

What’s it like to use

The Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer is a very simple piece of equipment to use and operation is simply a case of holding down the switches in the handles by gripping them. I found that it performed well on a variety of different hedging plants, including privet, beech and conifer. The blades were sharp and a standard trim took very little effort. 

While I thought the battery run time was good, it’s hard to be too specific on exact times since it depends so much on what you are cutting, how much you are cutting and how you are cutting it. The packaging claims a run time of 64 minutes, but I would always treat this with caution. What I would say though is with a 72Wh battery, it should be adequate for light to medium jobs in one go. 

One thing I did notice was the wide spaces between the blades. At 26mm, this is wider than a lot of its competitors and this is both good and bad. On the plus side, it allows you to cut through larger material and reduces the risk of the hedge trimmer becoming jammed. The trade-off, however, is that it will give a rougher finish on your hedge than would get from a trimmer with smaller spacing. 

One feature I do like about the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer is the ‘Hedge Sweep’, a piece of plastic that slides along the length of the blade to clear the trimmings as you go and help them fall clear of the working area. 

I liked the simplicity of this and how easy it was to attach and take off again. I also liked that its single-piece plastic construction means that it is very easy to clean. While it might not suit every situation, it proved less useful with larger material and it’s nice to have the option. 

In terms of noise level, I found the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer to be comparable to other hedge trimmers of a similar size. When compared against a Stihl HSA 45, I did notice that the trimmer sounded a bit less smooth, but this was simply an observation rather than a criticism.

Over time, I noticed that the weight of the machine became a bit of an issue, especially for our smaller-framed tester. Bearing in mind that some hedges are higher than others, this is something to take into account.

While it's similar in weight to the other manufacturers’ models of the same size, I do think at 2.8kg, it is a relatively heavy piece of equipment to hold for a prolonged period. I would recommend that you try holding one before you buy it and see if it is something you are happy to work with. Otherwise, you might find you are more comfortable with a smaller sized hedge trimmer or a wired model that does not carry the weight of a battery.   

Ease of use

I found the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer a very easy hedge trimmer to use. There was no aspect that could be described as complicated in any way and I think that it would be the ideal machine for the novice gardener. 

Anyone who has used a petrol-driven hedge trimmer before will find this buy a lot less complicated, and just like the cordless options on our best lawn mower list, there is no chance of accidentally cutting through the cable of a wired one. 

An interesting feature of this hedge trimmer is how the weight is distributed. The battery is located at the base, clipping on to it in the same way as you would attach a battery to a power drill. This means that although the weight of the battery and the weight of the blade offset each other, the ends of the machine do feel quite heavy. Other trimmers, such as the Stihl HSA 45 have their battery located in the middle of the machine, giving a more central weight distribution. I'm not saying that there is a right or wrong way of doing it, but I do recommend picking up a few models before you commit, so you can get an idea of which you prefer. 

One area where I did feel that this hedge trimmer was lacking was the battery readout. The only way to see how much charge is left in the battery is to look on the battery itself, at the base of the machine. While this is not a particular problem, other machines such as the Cobra H5024v have a readout on the top which is far easier to see. 

The Cobra H5024v also has two speed settings, ‘turbo’ and ‘eco’. When I tested it last year I did think that it was useful to have different settings according to what you were doing and I was sorry to see that the Ryobi did not have this. 

Something that did concern me was the switches in the handles. As with most hedge trimmers, you need to depress two switches at the same time to run the it. In this case, they are mounted in the two handles, but herein the lies the problem.

Ryobi have made them quite large and quite sensitive, so that they are comfortable to hold down for a long time while you are you using the machine. The problem is, this sensitivity means that it is very, very easy to start the machine by accident. For example, if you were to pick it up off a bench or the floor using both hands, the places you hold to pick it up are the very places where you turn it on and it starts up straight away. If you did this without checking the area was clear, it would be possible to hurt someone or damage something nearby. The risk of injury may be minimal, but other hedge trimmers I have tested have had a locking function to disable them until the user was ready and it would have been good to see one on the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer as well.  

Additional features

The main and most important additional extra you will need for this hedge trimmer is at least one battery and a charger. This won’t be a problem for anyone already using the Ryobi ONE+ battery system but it should be factored into the cost of purchase for anyone else.  

Ryobi also sell safety goggles and ear defenders, which they recommend you wear when using the hedge trimmer. 

How does the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer rate?

I found that the online feedback for this hedge trimmer was overwhelmingly positive. One user commented that this was his first battery hedge trimmer, after being forced to switch away from petrol since the introduction of E10 fuel and he was very impressed at the performance. I thought this was a particularly interesting comment since, until recently, battery-powered tools were nowhere near as powerful as their petrol counterparts. There was also a great deal of praise for the solid construction and durability of the trimmer. 

I am going to give the Ryobi 18V ONE+ cordless 50cm hedge trimmer a rating of 3.5 out of 5. This is not because there is anything wrong with the machine or because I particularly disagree with the feedback other users have given it. I felt that it was a thoroughly competent piece of equipment that would be an asset to your garden. 

However, I have tested other machines that offer features the Ryobi does not, such as speed settings or a top mounted battery readout. I was also not happy about the lack of cut off switch. This, to me, feels like a very obvious (and slightly curious) omission. There really should be some way of disabling the machine when you are not using it, especially if you are working in a garden that has young children. If Ryobi were to bring out the exact same model with a safety switch, I would be happy to increase this rating.

As well as judging the Ryobi 18V ONE+ Cordless 50cm Hedge Trimmer one on its own merits, there are also two other things you need to consider. First, if you are not already on Ryobi’s ONE+ battery system, make sure that you want to go with Ryobi as opposed to another supplier. Lots of different manufacturers, such as Flymo, Stihl and Einhell, offer ranges of tools based around a proprietary battery system. It is worth looking at the entire ranges, rather than individual tools, as the battery system you pick may influence your choice of power tools for years to come. 

Second, make sure that you actually need a battery hedge trimmer. If you have several hedges far from any buildings, then battery power is an ideal solution. However, if you have just one hedge, not that far from a mains outlet, then you might be able to save money by going for a wired model.

 About this review and the reviewer 

Steve Bradley is an established gardening expert who has written and co-written over 40 gardening books. His practical gardening knowledge is put to fine use in his residency answering listener's questions for BBC Radio Kent, BBC Radio Sussex and BBC Radio Surrey.

When he is not advising others he is tending for his own garden and helping a neighbour with hers. This gives him plenty of opportunities to test the latest gardening products like this hedge trimmer. Ryobi sent the trimmer free of charge (along with their Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm cordless lawn mower) for Steve to test over several weeks. He put it up against a range of hedge types including beech, privet and conifer.

Find our more about our testing process.

The Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower is one of over 150 tools in Ryobi's power share range. This means the mower along with a wide selection of drills, sanders, strimmers and other power tools, can all be powered from the same battery. 

The appeal is obvious. Not only can you save money buying the bare tool if you already own the battery, but you can save space on cords, cables and fuel for all of your tools and have one or two batteries fully juiced up for when you need them.

It is amazing to think this ample mower with a 40cm cutting width (not the biggest, but not that small either) and generous 50 litre grass bag could run off the same battery as much smaller tools, so we were keen to seen whether it had the power to match the best lawn mowers around.

See how it got on in my garden as I tested it over several weeks.

Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower specifications

• Deck size: 40cm
• Drive mechanism: Push
• Mulching capable: Yes 
• Mulching plug supplied: Yes 
• Weight: 17kg 
• Power: 18V
• Included: Grass catcher, mulching plug 

 First impressions 

The first thing you notice when you open the box is all the intense bright green. Ryobi have clearly worked hard on their branding and their logo, and the distinct colour scheme is prominent on virtually everything, both on and in the box.  

The next thing you notice is how complete the Ryobi 40cm Cordless Brushless Lawn Mower is, unlike others I have tested. There are very few parts, nothing needs major assembly and the handles are already semi-connected to the base unit, thanks to the electrical wire.

I was also pleased to see that there was a lot less protective plastic film compared to the Flymo 340R Li I tested recently. The vast majority of the packaging was recyclable cardboard, which definitely a good thing. 

Getting started

The Ryobi 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower is about the easiest mower to set up I have ever encountered. There are three main parts: the mower, the handlebar and the grass box. The telescopic handles are already connected to the mower by an electrical wire, but need to be fastened using two bolts. 

I was pleased to see that Ryobi had included an Allen (hex) key with the mower for this, so no additional tools are required. I found one of the bolts took a couple of goes to seat properly, but this is being picky, otherwise it was a very easy process.

One thing I did notice was the cable that connects the base unit to the switch on the handle. Some mowers require you to clip it on during set-up using special clips provided. The Ryobi does not, but in several places it is held in place using black cable-ties. While this is no doubt functional, I felt it did undermine the quality of the machine. On a more positive note, I was impressed that it had a protective shield around the cable, something I had not seen before. 

The grass box for the mower is also already complete. Being part canvas, as opposed to rigid plastic, allowed it to be shipped as one unit so, unlike models from Bosch, Flymo and Stihl it just clips straight on the back of the mower with no assembly. 

The manual that comes with the mower is a bit deceptive. While it looks very thick, this is because it includes about 10 different languages and the amount of information is actually quite short. All the instructions for putting the mower together were pictorial and located (a bit confusingly) at the back. I would estimate that anyone would be able to get this mower up and running within about 10 minutes. 

What it's like to use?

Overall, I found using the Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower very simple and straightforward. Startup is a simple case of unfolding and extending the handlebars, clipping on the grass box and pushing in a battery. It comes with the standard safety features, two button operation and a removable key to disable the operation of the mower.

In terms of construction, the mower does feel solid overall. All the components seem to fit together well and you do get that reassuring ‘sturdy’ feel when you use it. Yes, there are a few scratchy plastics that probably won’t wear that well and I did think the switch handles felt a little flimsy. However, these points are minor and it certainly doesn’t feel like it's going to drop apart as soon as you use it. One area where I was actually very impressed was the telescopic handlebar, which felt very solid and was far better quality than the Flymo 340R I tried recently.

The handles are coated with a layer of foam to make them softer to grip. While I'm not sure how long this material will last, I did think that it made pushing the mower more comfortable than gripping either hard plastic or a metal bar. I also liked how the handlebar had two angles of incline; shallower for the shorter user and steeper for the taller one. I thought that this was a clever touch and again, makes the Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower more comfortable to use. 

When it came to mowing the lawn, I tested the mower on a variety of different grasses and grass lengths and found that it gave a good standard of cut in every case. The cutting height is very easy to adjust using the handle on the side of the mower. I found that it picked up most, but not all of the grass as it went. Not the best I've seen (the Stihl Cordless lawn mower RMA 235 wins that one), but certainly better than a hover mower. 

While the Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower is on the heavier side, it is very maneuverable and turns easily. I did notice that it left quite pronounced wheel marks in the lawn, but this did not affect that quality of the cut. Considering the weight, I think it would have probably benefited from a roller on the back to leave those attractive stripes people love for their lawn decoration. 

As with most mowers, the Ryobi does have the option to be used with or without the grass box attached and like most other models on the market, a hinged flap either rests on the grass box or closes to prevent the ejection of cut grass when the box is not there. There is also a mulching plug included with the mower.  

When you are finished, the Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower packs down well, thanks to its telescopic handles which simply shorten and then fold across the top of the mower. The canvas grass box squashes down very easily allowing the whole mower to be packed into a very small space. 

 Ease of use

The biggest asset the Ryobi 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower has to offer when it comes to ease of use is its telescopic handle bar, which can be lengthened and shortened by simply undoing a couple of clips. 

There are handles to lock and unlock the angle of handlebar, or to fold it away. This is far easier than other mowers I have tried that have bolts which need to be loosened in order to the fold down the handle. However, I would have preferred the handle to be slightly wider and I suspect broader-shouldered users may find the mower uncomfortable for prolonged use. 

Where I did feel that the Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower came up short though was the grass box. While it does the basic job of collecting grass, some of the design choices seemed questionable. The box is mounted to the mower at a very steep angle and has a full width opening with no lip at the bottom. This means that as soon as you unclip it, grass will inevitably spill onto the floor, even if there is not much in it. There is also the risk, as it gets full, of grass falling back out while you are still mowing.

The grass box is constructed with a rigid plastic top, canvas sides and thin plastic base. This makes it ideal for storage, as it collapses to almost flat with no effort, however it also gives a very odd weight distribution when the box is full. One of our (shorter) testers noted that she would not relish trying to empty it into a full height wheelie bin. Additionally, the carry handle, while smooth on the top, is ridged underneath (where you grip it) so even without any weight, it digs into your hand when you pick it up. 

Other battery powered mowers, such as the Cobra MX4140V, have a readout on the handlebar that shows you how much charge is left in the battery. Some models allow you to check the charge on the battery while it is still mounted in the machine. The Ryobi requires you to remove the battery from the machine so you can you use its readout function. Not a huge issue, but we did feel that this let it down compared to other models for convenience. 

Finally, I think the single best feature of the Ryobi 40cm Cordless Brushless Lawn Mower is the battery power. The elimination of an electrical cable makes it a great deal easier (and safer) to use, especially on larger areas. We imagine that anyone switching from a cable mower will find increased convenience will offset the other problems.

 Additional features

The main and most important additional feature you will need for this mower is at least one battery and a charger. There is no battery included if you buy the bare tool so you will need to buy one (or two) to actually use the machine. There is actually a red warning label on the box to let you know. This won’t be a problem for anyone already using the Ryobi One+ battery system, but it should be factored into the cost of purchase for anyone else. 

What is interesting about this mower is that it can be used with either one or two batteries. So how much battery power you choose to buy will depend on the size of your garden and what your demands are of the machine.  

Ryobi also sell replacement blades for when the original blade eventually wears out and even branded safety glasses for when you are using your mower. These feature on the images on the box.

How does it rate?

Our research showed that consumer feedback on the Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower was largely very positive. On Amazon it has a 4.4 out of 5 star rating from 142 reviews. I thought this figure was slightly higher than I would have given it, but not by very much.  Many people were impressed by the build quality and the convenience offered by battery power.

The main criticism was its grass collection. Like me, many people had issues with the high angled grass box causing grass to fall back out of the box. It was also mentioned by several people that they did not find the mower to be as powerful as they had expected. I did not find this, although the lawns I tested were not particularly overgrown. Anyone who is going to be particularly demanding may want to take this into consideration. 

I have decided to give the Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower 4 out of 5 stars. I think that, overall, it is a well built and capable machine that would be a good option for medium and larger sized gardens, especially if you are already using the Ryobi One+ battery system. 

I liked the telescopic handlebars and think that they are well designed and convenient for the majority of users. I also liked how well it packed down and thought that the option to stand on its end made it great for storing in small spaces. I thought it was actually (ironically) easier to store than than the Flymo EasiStore 340R.

I have to say that I thought the biggest negative of the Ryobi 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower was the poorly designed grass box which, in many ways, is the Achilles heel of this particular machine. It could have been better thought out and if 100% grass pick-up is your top priority, then this is probably not the machine for you. I also thought that having to take out the batteries to find out how much charge was left was annoying. Not a deal breaker by any means, but it is not as good as other machines on the market. 

The decision to purchase the Ryobi 18V ONE+ 40cm Cordless Brushless lawn mower shouldn’t be taken in isolation. By buying this mower, or any mower that requires batteries, you are choosing a battery system that will influence your choice of power tools for years to come. If you are already on the Ryobi system, we think that this mower would be a good bet. Yes, it does have a couple of flaws, but certainly nothing serious enough to warrant purchasing a competitor that would not be compatible with your existing batteries. 

If you are not on the Ryobi One+ system then make sure to not only to consider this mower, but also the rest of the One+ range. Compare it to what other suppliers are offering to decide what you will be happy buying and using over the short to medium term. 

About this review and the reviewer 

Gardening expert Steve Bradley has written no fewer than 40 books on the subject. His lean towards practical gardening advice has given him air time on a number of publications and a regular seat as garden advisor for listeners of several local BBC Radio stations.

When he is not helping others make the most of their gardens, he is looking after his own. It is here where he tested this Ryobi mower, which was sent to him free of charge by the brand. He measured its worth in his own plot, and helping care for a neighbour's garden, at the same time as testing a hedge trimmer from the same range to really give the battery system a good run.

Add the Outsunny Outdoor Charcoal Pizza Oven to your summertime mix, and your family pizza nights will never be more fun, or better tasting. The summer season is in full flow, which is a happy call for more alfresco dining and time spent in the garden. 

It’s no secret that a pizza oven is a great addition to any garden, because not only can they look fabulous, they make the authentic taste of wood-fired pizza possible from the comfort of your own home. So when the opportunity to test the Charcoal Pizza Oven from Outsunny came up, I jumped at the chance to put the product through its paces and see if it was up to the challenge of creating a fun, delicious and hassle-free pizza night.

This outdoor furniture brand doesn’t specialise in pizza ovens, but that doesn’t make Outsunny’s Two-tier Charcoal Pizza Maker any less impressive. After assembling the product, I was amazed at how aesthetically pleasing the oven looked in my garden, with the matte black structure and shiny silver frames complementing each other perfectly. It was a talking point when the family came over, and we quickly agreed to use the oven to host my niece’s first birthday party. My brothers, sisters and their children were as excited as I was about the oven, and they weren’t going to miss out on a chance to use it! 

I’ve used Outsunny’s Pizza Oven enough times to give a well-informed review on whether it’s worth your cash. We’re now a few pizza nights down in this house, yet still planning our next one. The joy of making our own pizzas and tasting the delicious results, either outside on the milder evenings or indoors on the wetter, chillier nights, has become one of our favourite weekly rituals. Keep reading to find out how I got on, then head to our buying guide of the best pizza ovens for more options to browse.

Outsunny Outdoor Charcoal Pizza Oven specifications

• Fuel Type: Charcoal 
• Dimensions: H160 x L50 x W36cm
• Pizza Size: 12 inches 
• Weight: 24 kg 
• Oven heat-up temperature: 300˚C 
• Time to reach temperature: 45 mins 
• Pizza cooking time: 15 mins 
• Accessories included: No 

First impressions 

The pizza oven arrived in one fairly large box, which was heavy enough for me to ask a family member to help me carry it to the garden. But given the size of the oven once it has been assembled, overall the packaging was compact. There were 16 individually wrapped parts contained within the main structure, so there was a lot of protective bubble wrap to unpack, as well as big pieces of cardboard, polystyrene, and a plastic cover. 

Though the amount of packaging was excessive, it did an effective job of maintaining the pristine condition of the oven’s parts during transportation, and what can’t be recycled can definitely be reused. Once everything had been unwrapped and laid out in front of me, the task of assembling the oven seemed somewhat overwhelming, and I’d recommend setting aside a good couple of hours to put everything together.

Getting started 

I used the instruction booklet to do a thorough stock check before I began assembling. Some diagrams were slightly confusing because they showed parts as pre-assembled, which isn’t how they arrived. This was soon figured out though, and overall I would describe the instruction booklet as comprehensive and accessible. If you have prior experience with flatpack furniture, assembling the oven should be a smooth process, and even those with no DIY practice could put it together without needing an extra pair of hands. I fall into the latter category and managed to assemble the oven in under three hours.

Make a note though that you’ll need your own basic tools to get started, including an Allan key, a pozi screwdriver, and an adjustable spanner. I also had to buy my own pizza peel before I could start cooking any food, though a 12-inch pizza stone was included with the oven.

Lighting the Outsunny Outdoor Charcoal Pizza Oven

If you're thinking of including some pizza oven ideas in your garden, you'll need to consider where to place your outdoor oven. We placed the pizza oven on our flagstones away from any other furniture, so it could be used as safely as possible. 

Though the oven is quite large, the two wheels make it easy to move around, so if you find the wind is hampering your experience while cooking, you can move it to somewhere more sheltered. The mobility of the oven is a definite plus if you’re someone who likes to rearrange your garden a lot.

Adding the charcoal into the oven is easy enough as both tiers can be opened fully using the handles on the doors. On our first pizza night, we simply added a 1kg bag of charcoal into the second tier of the oven and lit this using a standard BIC Mega Lighter. After 15 minutes, the charcoal had turned white and we were ready to start cooking our pizzas on the oven’s top tier.  

One of the oven’s handier features is the bottom tier drawer which serves as an ash catcher, so you don’t need to worry about messy aftermath in your garden. You can just dispose of the ashy remains later by removing the drawer and emptying the contents into the bin, once they have fully cooled down of course.

Cooking pizza in the Outsunny Outdoor Charcoal Pizza Oven

While the oven grill is spacious, there was still only enough room to cook one pizza at a time using the pizza stone. If your family is making individual pizzas, someone will inevitably be waiting a while to eat, as one pizza takes around 15 minutes to cook. Not only was this an exercise in patience, it was somewhat tricky to maintain a hot temperature inside the oven by the time we got to cooking the third pizza. 

We learned that it’s important to maintain a temperature between 180˚C and 200˚C; anything lower will result in a half-crispy, half-soft pizza. The more charcoal you add at the start, the easier it will be to maintain a good level of heat over an hour, which gives you enough time to cook several pizzas – essential if you're hosting a pizza party for family and friends. The maximum weight on the second tier shelf is 10kg, so don’t go stingy with the charcoal and your taste buds will thank you for it later.

Taking all this into consideration, the second time we used the oven the pizzas tasted delicious, worthy of being served up in a restaurant in fact. We added 2.5kg of charcoal and doused it with a firelighter, to help make sure all the pieces caught fire. The result was that the oven stayed hot for much longer, and all the pizzas were cooked through more evenly. Fifteen minutes on the top shelf created a deliciously crispy base, and the cheese melted to perfection. We also turned the pizza half way through cooking this time, another game-changer trick.

The best feature of the Outsunny Outdoor Charcoal Pizza Oven is definitely the thermometer, which means you can easily regulate the temperature inside the oven without opening the doors to check the charcoal is still burning, which is a surefire way to lose heat. Keeping an eye on the temperature means you can avoid burning your pizza too. 

Controlling the temperature was also made easy by the vents on the door of the second tier, which slide open and shut via a handle. We kept ours partly open throughout, to keep a healthy amount of oxygen circulating inside the oven, which Outsunny recommends you do for carbon combustion. Plus, the chimney also has a vent which can be opened or closed to either dissipate or retain heat. Judging how much air you want to let inside the oven is pretty straightforward because of the thermometer; if the temperature starts to drop, try closing the vents for a while and let it heat up again. 

Cleaning the Outsunny Outdoor Charcoal Pizza Oven

It’s important to keep the inside of your pizza oven clean, so old remnants of charcoal and grease aren’t present each time you cook. The day after I’d used the oven for the first time, I removed the grates from the two tiers and washed them in my sink using hot soapy water and a washing up sponge. Definitely wear rubber gloves at this point, as the combination of grease and charcoal isn’t something you want to be scrubbing out of your fingernails later. 

As I mentioned earlier, the ash catcher drawer can simply be pulled out and emptied into the bin. Just make sure enough time has passed since cooking for the ash to completely cool down. Between 24 and 48 hours is ideal. 

My aim was for the inside of the oven to look pretty much new the next time I came to use it, and it was simple enough to achieve this. I used a handheld brush to sweep out any lingering bits of ash and charcoal, and went over the outside of the oven with a microfiber cloth and disinfectant. A quick and simple cleaning process I now perform after each use.

Cleaning the outside of the oven can be kept to minimum hassle if you invest in a protective cover. Not only will this keep the oven safe through all weathers, it will keep dirt at bay and make maintaining the product’s tiptop condition a lot easier. That being said, the stainless-steel body is supposedly tough enough to resist scratches and rusting, so purchasing a cover is optional, though something I’d recommend to increase the longevity of the oven over time. 

How does it rate? 

Online reviews are relatively mixed for this product. There are plenty of people who like me, want nothing more than to sing the oven’s praises, but there are others whose expectations weren’t met and found achieving the desired result difficult. I think it would be helpful if the oven came with some instructions on how to use a pizza oven, as it does take a couple of tries to perfect the technique. Adding more charcoal, waiting for it to go fully white, and turning the pizzas halfway through cooking meant our second round of pizzas were a lot better than the first.

Outsunny has a range of alfresco BBQ products, but this is the only one marketed as a pizza oven. A great selling point is that there are plenty of options for what you can cook in a pizza oven as well as pizza, so you wouldn’t need to have space for both the oven and a regular BBQ in your garden. 

There are a few near-identical looking models on the market, from brands like Vevor, Super Grills, and BillyOh, all of which interestingly have a slightly higher price point than Outsunny’s product. 

A lot of other pizza ovens in the market are smaller and more portable, such as the Ooni Frya Pizza Oven, but personally, I think the tall design of Outsunny’s oven is what makes it great. It looks fabulous in our garden and we love showing it off when family and friends come round.

 About this review and the reviewer 

Katie Sims writes for Gardeningetc on a freelance basis, and has been creating ecommerce content since earlier this year. A homebody at heart, she loves making her home and garden as comfortable, enjoyable and fun as possible, so she’s keen to try any products that can help her achieve this. 

She currently lives in Lancashire with her mum, brother and sister in the same house she grew up in. The garden has always been her favourite thing about the house, given its spaciousness and natural beauty. Gone are the trampolines and swingball sets which resided there in her childhood, replaced with garden furniture and alfresco cooking equipment for the whole family to enjoy. Katie is the youngest of six, and now that several of her siblings have children of their own, it’s important that her home remains a place where all the family can come round and enjoy themselves.

As with all our reviews, the Outsunny Pizza Oven was tested in her own garden, and used in the same way as you would so that you could know exactly what you were buying.

Looking after the lawn is something which we take great pride in, especially since we've grown each and every blade from seed. Our back garden used to be laid to gravel when we moved in four-or-so years ago so, after shifting five tonnes of the stuff, sifting soil and sowing seeds, I'm sure you'll appreciate that we want to continue to look after it.

Keeping the grass in a regularly trimmed state is important for promoting growth, we know, so when the opportunity came up to review the Landxcape LX796 robotic lawn mower I couldn't wait to get (it) mowing. Like any new tech, though, it can be tricky to get your head around the concept, but with a lot of persistence and even more trial and error, I did manage to tick 'mow the lawn' off the to-do list eventually. 

Read on to hear more, then check out our best robot lawn mower guide for more top buys.

Product specs for the Landxcape LX796 robotic lawn mower

• Lawn area: up to 400 m²
• Cutting width: 16cm
• Cutting height: 20-50mm
• Max. Gradient: 25% (15°)
• Battery power: 20V Max / 2.0 Ah Li-Ion
• Recharge time: up to 4 hours

Delivery and unboxing

The Landxcape LX796 robotic lawn mower arrived wrapped in a plastic bag which was providing some waterproof protection to the branded cardboard box inside. In its entirety, the package felt heavy and it is a fairly large and awkward size which didn't easily want to be carried down our narrow hallway entrance.

Taking up most of the space in the box was the lawn mower unit which had some bubble wrap wrapped over the top of it. Tucked in around it, down two of the four sides to the box was the instruction manual, 130m boundary wire, 180 pegs, 7 screws, power supply, 3 blades and screws and 1 hex key. It sat neatly on top of the charging base which lined the base of the delivery box.

Setting up

Although the Landxcape LX796 doesn't need much set up itself there is a fair bit to do before you're ready to start using it. I turned to the instructions, of which there are five separate documents/booklets to go through. I found the instruction guide, owners manual and 20v robot lawn mower charger booklets to be the most useful at the point of set up, and at the point of using it to cut the grass.

Choosing a suitable spot in the garden for the robot mower to reside during the summer months was the first thing to do, and this was subsequently the first challenge. 

In the installation guide it was advised to 'find a flat surface for the charging base, dry and away from direct sunlight' but in the lawn mower charger booklet it says 'for indoor use, do not expose to rain'. 

I've since received clarity that it is the charging base to be on a flat surface, preferably protected, and the plug is to be indoors or in a proper outdoor socket which could be a limiting factor for many. 

We found that the cable to the plug is just about long enough to reach a cable extension through a window in our extension – not ideal but it was fine. I've had it confirmed that the robot lawn mower is perfectly able to withstand the rain and sunshine, and are completely waterproof (except when turned upside down) so don't worry too much if it's not undercover.

The next stage in the set up was to set the boundary wire. It's recommended in the installation guide to use a lawn mower or grass trimmer to cut the grass where you are going to be pegging down the boundary wire, and I'd also recommend this. I would also say to not rush to replace your lawn mower or strimmer at any point soon either, because you're going to want to regularly cut along the boundary wire every couple of weeks since the robot lawn mower is unable to cut the grass close to any borders or flower beds you may have.

Pegging the boundary wire as you lay it would be a useful tactic. I used one peg per 15-20cm, sometimes a shorter distance depending on level of the ground. Despite our best efforts, our garden is uneven in most places so lots of pegs were used, and I had some left over so the supplied 180 pegs were plenty for me. If you need more, however, another pack of boundary pegs can be bought from Amazon for £22.74.

Once you've laid the boundary wire and are happy with how aligned it is next to the edges of the garden, the wire will need to be led back to the charging base to connect it all up. 

A length of OUT-wire will need to be left out for inserting into the groves of the charging base and connecting to the terminals. In the installation guide, a length of 80cm is advertised but this seemed a lot to me and I managed with just half this amount. Peeling back the plastic at the end of the wires was slightly scary, not only because I was trying to scrape away the plastic with scissors and my barely-there finger nails, but also because I didn't want to get any kind of shock, of which there is no risk of – I'm just well out of my comfort zone. Just make sure that any power going to the charger base is off until you're ready to start using the mower.

Before the Landxcape LX796 robotic lawn mower starts to mow for the first time you'll want to charge it up and do a trial run, which is documented in the installation guide as 'Verification'. This is just to check that that boundary wire keeps the mower within the boundary; the grass is a tolerable height and it can start / stop when you need it to. 

I found that by setting the grass at a maximum height of 60mm no grass was cut because I'd already been over it a day-or-so before with a lawn mower and you'll need to press 'OK' five times, not four as stated in the guide to take you to step 4.

As part of the set up I also tried to scan the QR code on the side of the Landxcape LX796 but nothing happened. I also downloaded the Landxcape app to my smartphone but I couldn't connect it to WiFi. Turns out that this is not a WiFi enabled smart robot lawnmower. This is obvious when looking on the Landxcape website, and yet not so obvious looking in any of the five booklets or if you're to go by the QR code on the side of the mower. So if you want a smart robot lawn mower then this is not the one for you since it's more of a 'press-and-go' type of robot lawn mower.

WORX garage

If, like me, you feel more comfortable protecting your £400+ investment then there is such a thing as a garage for it. I was also sent the WORX WA0810 Landroid Foldable Garage to review which, yes, is an additional £199.99 on Amazon but it'll protect the Landxcape 796 from wind, leaves, rain and direct sunlight. 

I found that it was mega easy to set up, which was a good thing since there were zero instructions to follow. It took me no longer than 10 minutes to figure out how to assemble it and then assemble it, frequently referring back to the image on the front of the box it arrived in for reference. The lid tilts up and down with a simple mechanism but I think for the duration I'm testing it and therefore using it, I'll keep the lid down since the space I have allocated for it isn't protected from the elements in the slightest. 

Performance

There are four adjustable cutting heights on the Landxcape LX796 so, after the trial run, I set it to cut the grass to a 40mm height. With zero programming required, just power up, enter the pin, 'start' and 'OK', meaning getting going from the charge base was really easy. Just make sure the charge base is on because it will not work unless it is. 

It will choose its direction of travel at random, and as long as there was nothing in its way, it easily took on our 100m2 garden in one charge (it's capable of gardens of up to 400m2) and returned to base when it had finished the job.

It does move at quite a pace so hitting 'STOP' at any point was a bit of a chase. I also found that the robot mower got stuck in a few dips on our uneven ground, and wasn't a fan of any tight turns in the garden. It also bumped into the washing line and a stone which I used to cover a hole, rather than divert around things which I had become accustomed to in the home when using a robovac. 

When it did get stuck every now and then, the Landxcape did some manoeuvres that either worked or didn't, which in most cases meant that it chewed into the ground (a bit), gave up and turned itself off. Should this have been a smart robot mower I would have received a notification about this, rather than having to watch it for the duration of a mow in case of any incidents.

I soon learnt that I also needed to re-lay the boundary wire after a few goes, just once though, because the robot lawn mower kept getting stuck on the garden edging to our flower beds, and running into the plants. Although this isn't in the installation guide or any of the others, I'd leave at least 20cm of ground between the boundary wire and the edge of the flower border / pathways etc to avoid any damage. There is a handy-looking measure gauge that can be cut out from the cardboard box, though, which I only saw after pegging the boundary wire but is something that you may find useful.

Having said all this, the Landxcape LX796 robot lawn mower does cut the grass and does a pretty good job of it, too. It stays within the boundary wire and returns to base by following the wire when the mow is complete, so long there is nothing in its way. 

There is no bin to empty, either, since the grass falls to the ground to serve as a natural fertilizer, promoting healthy lawn care. And, of course, the more times the Landxcape sets out to mow the lawn, the stronger the grass grows back, too, so happy days. You will need to grab your best strimmer every couple of weeks or so, though, to keep the strip of grass trim between the border edges and boundary wire.

If you have a family garden and at any point children (or pets) take an unavoidable interest with the working mower, there are lifting and tilting sensors which provide some additional safety. It is quite heavy and cumbersome to flip on the side but in the event that this does happen, the blades will stop immediately and a beeping noise will sound as the alert. You'll also see error code E6 displayed, which won't disappear until you've put it safely back into position and reset it to start cutting the grass again.

The only kind of programming which you can do on the Landxcape LX796 is to set up a default working schedule, essentially providing an automated mow. The trick here is to have today's time and date set, and always have it switched on and charging at its base. 

I'd failed to notice that the robot lawn mower was switched off most times when at the base, for various reasons, which meant that it didn't venture off on its own accord despite numerous attempts of checking the time, date and start times. 

We got there eventually, though, and I'm so glad I persevered because now this is working like clockwork, I don't need to worry about mowing the main areas of our lawn. For our small-ish garden, however, following the default working schedule (Monday - Friday) – which can not be changed – is a little overkill so when I see it doing the rounds mid-week, I'll be hitting 'STOP' and manually docking it, until I feel that our grass is ready to be cut again.

Other settings which you can tweak is the PIN code so it's no longer default, but a code which only you know. Referring to the owner's manual provided some sort of guide but, as with my experience thus far with the set up, it wasn't that easy to follow and found that I was doing a bit of trial and error before getting it all right. A bit of perseverance helps, and remembering a memorable PIN – obviously.

Cleaning, maintenance and storage

The Landxcape will look a lot tidier and be a lot happier if it's cleaned regularly. The body and underside can be cleaned with a moist rag, just be careful of the blades when it's flipped over to clean and wear gloves because those are sharp. Longer term, you may want to replace the blades with those supplied every season. A pack of 24 blades can also be bought from Amazon for £11.68.

It's advised that you only use the Landxcape LX796 during the summer months, or warmer weather, to preserve the life of the battery. It can be stored in a shed or garage, once it has been thoroughly cleaned, had a full charge and is powered 'off'. If you also have the garage, I would be inclined to store this away, too, when not in use so it's in a good condition for when you next need it.

How does it rate online?

There's not a whole lot of reviews out there just yet for the Landxcape LX796 because it's new but we have seen some on Amazon about the older LX799 that it's replacing. As far as we know, the spec is very similar if not the same. The newer version can just cover an additional 100m2 of ground, and after reading through the reviews it sounds very familiar to my experience so far with the LX796. 

The ease of set up and pleasing results after a mow is the general consensus, with advice shared to perfect the boundary wire. To read the instructions and reviews is also advised, before attempting to set up your new lawn mower. I would add to this to say to digest what is being said, too, and really understand the specs. 

I've seen that one reviewer has had their Landxcape LX799 for one year now, who have confirmed that it still works (always good to know), it gets stuck every once in a while and there's no need for a shelter.

How does it compare to other robot lawn mowers?

A noticeable difference with the Landxcape LX796 to other robot lawn mowers is the price. This one retails at £479 which is a good £100-or-so cheaper than the likes of Worx and Flymo, and some other Landxcape models in the line up. The main factors which affect this difference in price is the lawn size it can mow and any smart capabilities.

It's also a little on the noisy-side – I can hear it when I'm sat in the dining room with the window open to the back of the house. We live in a terraced house so I'm sure our neighbours can hear it, too, especially when they are sat in their gardens. 

When we wrote up our Worx Landroid M500 robot lawn mower review one of the most impressive things to note about it was how quiet it was, so that's a consideration if noise levels are important to you.

Should I buy the Landxcape LX796?

There's a lot of good things going for the Landxcape LX796, but equally there are a few niggles which may affect your decision. Compared to other robot lawn mowers, it's affordable. It's also a quality bit of kit, too, which does ultimately mow the lawn to your preferred length. Once you're confident that you know how a robot lawn mower works, it is also relatively quick and easy to set up.

If you want to get the same out of it as you do with perhaps a robot vacuum cleaner in the home, then I would highly recommend you set up the scheduling because it's this which will ultimately provide you with an automated mow. You can't change the default working pattern (Monday to Friday) but you can change the start time to suit.

I would also recommend buying the mini garage for it. It was really quick and easy to set up, and I don't find myself worrying about the lawn mower (I am a worrier) when there's a heavy shower because I know it is protected – it also acts as a good shelter from the birds. I appreciate this is more money, but totting up the price of the garage plus the Ladxcape 796, you're still not spending as much money as you easily could with another brand / model.

It isn't, however, WiFi enabled / smart which makes controlling the Landxcape LX796 very manual. It means that you can't control it remotely, nor can you pause or stop scheduled mows. This could suit you perfectly well because it's one less thing to set up but if it is, you may want to take a closer look at the LANDXCAPE LX810I which covers the same m2 area of lawn. It's also a product which isn't going to replace the lawn mower nor strimmer which are needed to trim around the boundary wire and when the robot lawn mower is in hibernation during the winter months, although this is (probably) the same for all robot lawn mowers, it is worth a consideration.

About this review – and our reviewer

Jennifer (Jen) Oksien is our Large Appliance editor who was sent this product to review at home, in her 100sq ft garden which is laid to lawn. The ground is uneven, the garden has an edging and Jen hadn't reviewed a robot lawn mower before so it was the perfect challenge for the Landxcape LX796.

We are not given any compensation for our reviews, but we may be gifted the product meaning that we can test it over a greater length of time, and update our reviews if required. We also receive affiliate commission for some products brought through our site.

Flymo is a brand that many people associate with hover mowers, however the Flymo Easistore 340R Li does, in fact, run on wheels. This cordless mower, powered by two rechargeable batteries, offers a 34cm cutting area and is targeted towards people with small to medium sized gardens. The ‘Easistore’ model name shows that Flymo see the main selling feature of this particular model as how easy it is store, and it does deliver. A clever design allows it to pack down into a very small space for storage, ideal for smaller sheds and tight spaces. 

We tested this model in a variety of different lawn settings and were very pleased with the results. The grass was cut well and the rear roller is great for lawn stripes if you’re trying to impress the neighbours. We found that the 30-minute run time was quite adequate for our medium-size garden and when you use a battery-powered mower, you do realise how much easier it is than worrying where the cable is. The collection of the cut grass was good, certainly compared to a hover mower (which tends to blow clippings everywhere!). 

For more recommendations when it comes to grass-cutting, see our best lawn mowers guide. 

Flymo Easistore 340R Li: product specifications

• Corded or cordless? Cordless
• Cutting Width: 34cm 
• Adjustable height settings: 5
• Cutting range: 2.5 - 6.5cm
• Grass collection box: 35L 
• Battery: 2 x 20v Li battery plus charger
• Weight: 11.2kg 
• Guarantee: 2 years 

First impressions

The first thing that struck me when I opened the box was how compact it is. The mower is packed to fill the available space completely. There is very little packing material around the mower and, in terms of volume, what you see really is what you get. That said, there was still protective film and bubble wrap around the various parts of the mower so nothing was damaged in transit. 

Everything was well organised and it took very little time from opening the box to getting all the components set out and ready to put together. 

 Getting started 

Assembly was very easy and didn’t take too long. The mower was up and running in under half an hour. All the components were well packaged in clear bags or boxes along with instructions and warranty documentation. 

I was very pleased (and slightly relieved) to find that the instructions were clear and easy to follow, and all the steps were story-boarded with clearly drawn diagrams. There were not actually that many things to do and, unlike other models, items such as the wheels are already attached. 

Yes, there are a few bolts and things, but not that many, and you don’t need a tool kit. The DIY-phobe has nothing to fear with this one! Although, I would say that while it is perfectly possible to put the Flymo Easistore 340R Li together yourself, it might be more convenient to have a friend to help for jobs like putting the handles onto the base unit. 

There were one or two issues with build quality that I noticed, which sadly let down an otherwise excellent product. There was some poor finishing on the handle bar (or possibly a fault) and some of the plastics felt of questionable quality. The most noticeable area for this was the adjustable handle bar, where the plastic cogs do not bite together as well as they could. 

However, on a more positive note, the sections of the grass box clicked together very well. Once put together, it felt very solid and clipped to the mower easily and securely. 

It is noticeably more rigid than the one provided with the Bosch 18V 4.0Ah Li-ion Cordless 32cm. We also thought that the main body of the mower felt very solid. The plastic wheels felt tough and the lid over the batteries secured with a reassuring click.

What the Flymo Easistore 340R Li is like to use

I found that mowing a lawn with the Flymo Easistore 340R Li was a very pleasant experience. The angle of the handle bar is fully adjustable without any tools so you can set it to a comfortable height. The cut length is adjusted using a handle on the front of the machine and takes literally seconds. I really liked this as it completely avoids turning the mower upside down and having to take the blades off and add or remove spacer washers. 

While the Flymo Easistore 340R Li performs very well on an already short(ish) lawn, I did find that it started to struggle on longer grass and the motor did cut out once or twice. Sadly, this is more down to the limitations of battery power (as opposed to mains voltage) than a reflection on this particular model. 

The Flymo Easistore 340R Li, I feel, is far better suited to taking a few millimetres off the lawn on a regular basis, rather than heavy duty mowing. Mowing shorter grass will also give you a much longer run time from the battery as the motor will not be working as hard. 

In terms of overall construction, the mower feels very mid-range. It does not feel as sturdy as models such as the Cobra MX41 40V but it does cost less. Some of the plastics do feel a little soft or a little scratchy, but it certainly does not feel like a budget product that will break within a few months. I actually thought it was a significant upgrade on the slightly smaller Flymo Easistore 300R Li that I tested last year. 

The finish it gave on the lawn was very good. The grass was cut evenly and effectively with a single pass and grass collection was very good overall. There were a few clumps by the wheels in places, but the vast majority of the grass went straight into the grass box. And as previously mentioned, the rear roller is great for lawn stripes, so a good option if you want to perfect your lawn decoration ideas.

The box itself feels well made – actually quite a bit better than some of its competitors – and it has a good collection capacity. When it’s full, it detaches easily for emptying and fits back onto the mower very quickly. The only slight issue I had was that, while it came in several pieces, it doesn’t feel like it could be collapsed again to get it back in the original box if required. I'd be worried about breaking it. Probably not an issue for most people, just something I noticed.  

When you are finished mowing the lawn, the Flymo Easistore 340R Li packs down to a very compact size and I felt that this will probably be the reason a lot of people would choose this mower over its competitors. 

Standing on its end allows the mower and grass box to be stored vertically and the footprint is incredibly small. It feels well thought out and it would be perfect  if you're short on garden storage space and only have a small shed or the corner of a garage. 

Ease of use

I found the Flymo Easistore 340R Li very easy to use. In fact, there was not a single aspect of either set up or use that I would class as being difficult or even particularly challenging. Features such as the cutting height adjuster are very handy and easy to operate. 

I also liked the being able to raise or lower the handle bar for comfort and felt that this made using the mower easier on the wrist and the shoulders. It also suits users of any height. The mower itself doesn’t weigh that much (under 12kg) so it doesn’t feel like a chore to push it up and down the garden, even on an incline.

When it comes to recharging, the batteries, located under the plastic dome on the top of the mower, are straightforward enough to slot in and take out. The charging adapter also allows you to charge them both together, rather than having to charge one after the other.  

There is a safety ‘key’ that needs to be inserted next to the batteries and turned to the ‘on’ position before the mower will work. It’s a useful feature to disable the mower and Flymo provide two that are bright orange. However, it is an easy thing to miss when you first use the mower, so if you put two batteries in and nothing happens, this may well be the reason.   

A major advantage of this mower compared to a hover mower is that you never have to lift it up. You can simply push it along on its wheels to wherever you want to use or store it. The raised height of the body meant that I could even get it up a small step just by rocking onto the back wheels. I thought this, combined with the light weight, would make it ideal for older users or those with physical limitations. 

Additional features

I couldn’t find any accessories that are on sale to go with the Flymo Easistore 340R Li. The main thing that a potential user might consider to go with this model is an extra set of batteries, if they have a larger lawn. 

Having the option of charging the next set of batteries while you are using the mower will open up more options for continued use. However, if you do think you may need extra batteries before you buy the mower, it might work out cheaper just to buy a bigger machine. 

 How does it rate? 

From what I saw, overall consumer feedback was very positive. Amazon showed a star rating of 4.2 out of 5 from over 3,000 reviews. I felt that this figure was very much in line with what I thought from our test. 

Many people praised the design for its compact storage and the convenience and safety of not having to worry about an electrical cable. Some people experienced the same issue I had with the mower struggling on longer grass and recommended a long cut followed by a short cut to give the best result. I would strongly recommend this as it is both kinder to the mower and to the lawn. 

The main criticism I found seems to be about the batteries rather than the mower itself. A number of people have complained that they found the batteries failed after 2 or 3 mows and they had to get in touch with Flymo to get them replaced. I had no such issues and the problem may well have been rectified. 

I have given this mower 4 out of 5 stars and feel that it is a good option for a small to medium lawn. I liked how compact it was and found it both trouble-free to use and ergonomically friendly. I liked features such as the cut length adjuster and the lightweight design. 

This mower is a good option for someone who does not want to push around a large, heavy piece of machinery. The ‘Easi’ storage, which is a key selling point of this model, lived up to the claims and is very well thought out. For anyone who doesn’t have much space, this mower is well worth considering.

While I did find one or two build quality issues, these were minor compared to the benefits that the mower will offer to the majority of users. It would not be fair to present this as an exclusively Flymo failing. I tested a similar mower from Bosch several months ago, which had far worse plastics and felt a much less durable machine.  

A major point to consider, before deciding to purchase the Flymo Easistore 340R Li (or any other battery mower) is the commitment of being locked into one company’s battery system. Flymo, like Stihl, Ryobi and many others, use a proprietary battery system across their range of garden tools. So if you are considering buying a hedge cutter or a leaf blower in the future, you should factor this into your decision.  

Flymo do offer a corded version of this mower, the Flymo Easistore 340R (without the ‘li’ at the end) for around £150 pounds less. It’s hard to recommend one over the other because the version you go for depends entirely on your circumstances. Battery power is both safer and more convenient than trailing a cord behind you, but this is not a small price difference and anyone with a limited budget should consider both options carefully. 

About this review

Despite offering a number of ‘wheeled’ models, the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V mower is the product that most people probably associate with Flymo. Hover mowers literally ‘float’ on a cushion of air, making them incredibly light and easy to move around as there are no wheels to cause friction with the ground. Flymo’s latest offering, the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V has been designed for small to medium gardens, with a 33cm cutting width and a powerful 1700W motor running on mains electricity. 

I tested the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V on a variety of different lawns and came back with somewhat mixed results. While I was happy with the quality of the cut on a variety of different grasses and thought it excelled when it came to lawn edges, I found it blew grass all over the place and a 10m cable is nowhere near as long as you think it’s going to be. 

See our best lawn mowers guide for more recommendations when it comes to cutting your grass with ease.

Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V: product specifications

• Watt: 1,700
• Cutting width: 33cm
• Adjustable height settings: 4
• Cutting height: 1 - 3cm
• Grass collection box: 20L
• Power cable length: 10m
• Weight: 8.5kg (grass collection box empty)
• Guarantee: 2 years

 First impressions

The first thing I noticed when I opened the box was how complete it looked. The body of the mower fills the box with the handlebar laid on top. 

Compared to other models I have tested, there are very few components in addition to the main body of the mower (only 8, including spacer washers). I already knew I wasn't going to be attaching wheels to this one but it was nice to have something that felt like it would need so little assembly.

Everything felt well packed and the few bits and pieces that did come with it were secured in a clear plastic bag, tucked away in the grass box. 

 Getting started

I put the mower together in a very short time and would estimate that the average person will be up and mowing within about 10-15 minutes, even if they have never assembled any type of mower before. 

In line with other models, such as the Flymo Easistore 340R, the instructions are clear and easy to follow. Everything was presented in the form of easy-to-follow diagrams. The few steps that were involved in putting the mower together were all very straightforward. 

However, putting it together is where I found the first problem with build quality. There are two hooks that attach to the metal handlebar to allow you to store the electric cable when the mower is not is use. A good idea in theory! 

However, when tightening the hooks, I found that the metal bar was squeezed to such an extent that the paint split. Not a great start and considering the force of pushing the mower is transferred through this apparently quite thin metal bar, I do feel this may be a potential concern in terms of the longevity of the machine. 

I stopped tightening before doing any more damage, but this left the cable hook looser than I would have liked. 

Before you start mowing the lawn with the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V, you have the option to adjust the height of cut. This is done by turning the mower upside down, removing the blade and adding spacer washers (three are provided) between the motor and the cutting blade.

Adding more spacer washers means a lower blade and therefore a shorter cut. I found this the most complicated part of the set up and would recommend you wear gloves to protect your hands and to do this stage on grass to save scratching the machine. 

 What is the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V like to use?

The first thing you notice when you start mowing with the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V is how light it is to push. This really is the benefit of a hover mower; it quite literally glides along when you push it. This makes using it easier on your shoulders and wrists if you are mowing over a larger area. It also means that bumps and uneven ground are not a problem.

The Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V also does very well when you reach the edge of the lawn, provided the border or patio are lower than the grass. Simply push it slightly over the boundary and you have short grass right up to your lawn edging without having to worry about wheels going down and grounding the mower (and scalping the grass). 

Another plus point is that the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V is a relatively quiet machine with most of the noise coming from the fan that lifts it up. It certainly won’t be loud enough to upset the neighbours on a Sunday afternoon.  

It’s not all good news, however, and one big drawback I found was grass collection. Hover mowers never perform brilliantly in this area because the air cushion pushing them up also tends to take some of the grass with it, so some errant blades in the borders are to be expected. 

However, I estimated that it collected only half to two thirds of the grass it mowed and sadly the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V left a mess wherever it went. If grass collection is a high priority then I would recommend you avoid a hover mower entirely and go for a Stihl RMA 235, which actually vacuums it up as it goes. 

What does make it to the grass box is easy enough to dispose of, although here is where I found another build quality issue. An orange flap (lid) connected to the main body of the mower is supposed to clip to the top of the grass box. I found that the plastic it is made from is so flimsy that it is virtually impossible to connect it on both sides without it springing out of position. 

While this does not particularly affect the functionality of the mower, I found this to be very unimpressive. I fully understand the need to to keep weight down on something that hovers, but this seems to be a compromise too far. 

I think it is probably fair to say that the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V does not feel like a premium product in any way, but to be fair, the price reflects that. 

Flimsy components and scratchy plastics meant that it felt like it was designed to be aimed solely at the budget end of the market. I actually thought that this was a real shame because this mower offers some clever features that feel overshadowed by just a few too many compromises.   

Ease of use

Overall, I found the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V fairly easy to use in a variety of different settings. It is light to push when you are mowing and the handles are comfortable to hold, even for prolonged use. When it comes to the edges of the lawn, a hover mower does have clear benefits over a wheeled one. 

One area where the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V mower does do well is when you come to pack it away. There are rollers at the front that allow you to push the mower back to the shed. Unfortunately, these only work on completely flat ground and you will still need to lift it up if you have a step, but it is still a big improvement on carrying the mower the entire way. 

The handle then folds down and the mower stands on its end. I liked this design because it means that it takes up a very small amount of shed storage or space in  the garage. I also liked the way the cable stores on the side of the machine, I was just disappointed the hooks weren’t better. 

Sadly, there is no escaping the fact that compared to battery mowers, a mower with an electrical cable is a pain. You have to be aware at all times where the cable is, how much you have left and (crucially!) whether you are in danger of chopping through it. This is probably not an issue for someone who is already using a mower with a cable, but if you are used to using battery power, I am pretty sure this will annoy you. 

However, the biggest single drawback of the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V is the grass cut adjustment and it is a very big drawback. Having to turn the mower upside down and then remove the blade with a special tool is both time consuming and irritating. There is also the risk of injury by being that close to sharp blade. 

This is in stark contrast to many wheeled machines such as the Mountfield Electress 38Li Kit or the Cobra MX41 that simply have a handle on the side that allows you to select a setting within a few seconds. If you frequently have to change cut length, we would strongly suggest that this is not the machine for you. 

 Additional features

I couldn't find any accessories to go with the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V. However, the main additional feature that anyone who buys this mower will want to consider is an extension cable. 

Unless you have a very small garden, ideally with an outdoor power outlet, you are going to find the 10m cable too short. We would urge anyone considering buying this mower to factor in the cost of an extension lead with an RCD, that cuts out if you mow it by mistake, as part of the purchase.

How do we rate the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V overall?

We checked other reviews after we had tried out the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V ourselves, to get some idea of what other people thought of it and found the feedback to be quite mixed. Many users praised the mower for its ease of use and storage. There were also positive comments about the value it represented at its price point. This is an opinion that we would be inclined to agree with to a large extent as, compared to a battery powered mower, it is a lot cheaper. 

However, there was also quite a bit of criticism about the build quality. A number of people complained that they too found parts of the plastic flimsy. Users also mentioned the grass pickup, or lack thereof, as being a problem. One user even stated that he found it picked up around 20% to 25% as much grass as another mower he had used. I didn’t think it was quite that bad but I was not impressed. There was also some criticism about the weight of the machine. I had mixed feelings about this because while just over 8kg is heavy to some people, others will find it very light. So this point is probably quite subjective, but worth considering depending on how much you feel like lifting. 

Amazon showed the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V as having an average 4 out of 5 stars across 500 reviews. I actually thought that 4 out 5 was very much on the generous side. While I did think that it was an easy machine to use and that some of features were clever, the number of build quality issues, compared to other mowers I have tested, meant that I was not prepared to give it any more than 3 stars. If it had been better made, I would have rated it higher. 

Overall, I think that the Flymo EasiGlide Plus 330V would be best suited to people with small garden who is looking for a cheap and cheerful mower for light to moderate use. However, anyone with a bigger garden who is looking for something to take on more demanding tasks should look elsewhere. I certainly wouldn’t bet on this mower still being around after even a couple of years of heavy use. 

About this review

The Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer is a cordless cutter that does exactly what it’s supposed to, without fuss or fanfare. It is part of Cobra’s 40v Li-ion system of lawn mowers and handheld garden tools that can share batteries and charger, which saves money and shed space. I am lucky enough to already own a cordless Cobra lawn mower, which I love, so I saved around £173 by already having a battery and fast charger to hand. 

Our main garden is kept under control by a ride-on (or robot mower if I’m testing one), and the front garden by the aforementioned Cobra lawn mower but none of these garden tools are capable of getting right to the lawn edges, around flower beds or tight up to pathways and steps. 

When our ancient petrol strimmer (that was heavy, smelly and unfathomable to start) died, I was ready for something smaller, lighter and more manageable. When shopping for the best strimmer, I knew I didn’t want any fancy functions that I’d never work out how to use. I just wanted to get our lawns smartened up as quickly and easily as possible. 

Oh, and because a new grass trimmer isn’t nearly as exciting for me as, say, a new handbag or trainers, I was also keenly focused on price. I bought the Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer to keep, but this review follows the initial opening and three week’s worth of strimming (once a week after mowing). The initial strim, the first of the season, was naturally much tougher going than the subsequent two. 

Keep scrolling to see how we got on then head to our best strimmer buying guide for more finishing touch options for your lawn.

 Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer: product specifications

• Power type: 40v Li-ion battery (not included)
• Battery life: Up to 80 mins
• Charging time: Approx. 90 mins
• Warranty: 2 years
• Cutting width: 28-32cm
• Cutting Line: 1.6mm Twisted Line
• Weight: 4kg

First impressions of the Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer 

Upon opening the cardboard box, I found exactly what I was expecting – a fairly basic but well-built grass trimmer. The Cobra GT3240VZ is clearly not aimed at professional/industrial use but nor does it look flimsy or cheap. I was also (and always) pleased to spot that it wasn’t going to require a lot of complicated construction before I could begin blitzing those nettles.   

Setting up and getting started

The instruction manual boasts simple illustrations along with explanatory text, which is better than those I have tried to follow with images or text only. To assemble, I needed to attach the safety guard onto the motor housing with two small screws. Make sure the cutting line isn’t trapped on the wrong side of the motor housing before you screw it down, like I did…oops! 

Attaching the handle and shoulder strap went without a hitch, and then all I needed to do was slide in the battery. I specifically bought a Cobra trimmer because I already had a Cobra 40v battery and charger from my lawn mower that will fit it, but you’ll have to buy one separately if you don’t. You also need to remove the blade cover, which is just there for safe transportation, before you start trimming. 

What is the Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer like to use?

To turn the Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer on you need to depress the safety lock and the switch trigger simultaneously. It’s a simple action that feels intuitive as part of your overall grip, although I did lose my hand position a couple of times while trimming which just meant I had to turn it back on again. Mildly annoying but no biggie. 

As a novice with a trimmer, it took me a little while to suss the best angle to trim the grass effectively. And without scalping the lawn! But once I’d nailed the angle (about 30 degrees to the grass) and perfected the Cobra-recommended technique of cutting from the top and working down on areas of tall overgrown grass/weeds, it sloughed through the chaos. Not quite like a knife through butter but very close. 

I found the Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer surprisingly noisy for a battery-powered garden tool – ear defenders are recommended – but not so loud I couldn’t listen to an Audiobook on my AirPods (under the ear defenders) as I worked. The vibrations were also quite noticeable and in fact my hands were shaking, very slightly, for several hours after I’d finished trimming all around our garden on the first, longest, attempt. The second and third goes, a week apart, were quicker and therefore much better on the hand-shaking front.

Ease of use

At 4kg, the Cobra GT3240VZ isn’t the lightest grass trimmer on the block but nor is it the heaviest. The shoulder strap, when properly used, takes a lot of the weight off the arms, which is very helpful if you’re not built like The Hulk. I found the adjustment kept sliding on the shoulder strap, so I grabbed a trusty safety pin and pinned it firmly down. Again, mildly annoying but easily solved. 

The telescopic height adjustment on the trimmer itself was very simple to adjust and, happily, stayed locked firmly in place. Once I’d mastered the standard trimming swing (back-and-forth, like using a metal detector), it took just over an hour to trim all the garden borders and edging in our approximately 1000sqm garden. There was still a little juice left in the battery had I needed to continue, but barely any in my own tank so I was very glad to be done. 

Using the Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer as a neat path edger was a little beyond my skillset. It was easy enough to rotate the trimmer to get the motor head at the right angle via a push-and-turn button near the motor. You can then use the metal plant guard as a guide, which definitely helped but my lines were embarrassingly wonky on the first attempt. Two more goes, and I was showing signs of improvement but wouldn’t win any prizes for precision. 

Admittedly this was probably due to user inexperience, but a supportive edging wheel would have helped carry the weight of the motor, and, I’d like to believe, would have produced neater or at least straighter lines along the paths and lawn edging.   

Additional features

As I’ve mentioned, there are few bells and whistles on this entry-level grass trimmer but, with the exception of the edging guide wheels, I’d say the Cobra GT3240VZ has everything needed to keep your garden trim. 

To lengthen the cutting line, which will inevitably get shorter as you cut, you just have to tap the spool button gently on the ground while the trimmer is turned on and spinning at full bore. There is also a button on the spool casing to allow you to do it manually. Fancier machines will have fully automatic line extension, which means there is no lull in trimming action. 

One feature I did appreciate was the battery power indicator on the 40v battery, which lights up at the touch of a button to show how much power is left. Speaking of power, the battery lasts 80 minutes, which was enough to trim our whole garden and then get the lawn mower out, switch the battery across, and tackle the small patch of lawn at the front that the ride on mower can’t reach.

The cutting line is supplied in cartridge form, which means there’s no annoying and fiddly rewinding of cutting line required. I haven’t needed to replace the line yet, but I did go through the motions for the benefit of this review and can tell you it’s an easy four-step process that’s similar to changing the spool in a sewing machine. If that’s not helpful to you, the instruction book provides good directions. 

There is also a metal plant protection bar, which allows you to trim around delicate plants and shrubs without risk of decapitating limbs. I mainly had it pinned back out of the way as I didn’t feel I got close enough to what needed strimming with it on, and luckily my foliage survived. 

How does the Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer compare to other grass trimmers?

I chose the Cobra GT3240VZ grass trimmer primarily because I already own the battery and charger but also because I have been very impressed with the build quality and performance of my Cobra mower. 

For an extra £20 you could get the Cobra GT3024V grass trimmer, which is much lighter (2.4kg) and has a few more features, like an edging guide wheel, adjustable power and slightly more speed. However, battery life is only 30 minutes and, as mentioned, I was looking to spend as little as possible. 

The cheapest Cobra grass trimmer, the Cobra GT600E (£49.99), has a cable, which I suppose would be a good option for anyone who doesn’t already have the battery and charger but does have outdoor power sockets and a relatively small garden. I’d need about 16 extension leads to get it around our garden.

 About this review - and our reviewer

Part of surviving Midwestern snowstorms is digging your way out, so I was stoked to hear I’d have the chance to test the impressive Husqvarna ST 430T snow blower in the recent snow blizzards. 

If you grew up here, you know there are techniques to shoveling and snowblowing, and you learn them at a young age. It’s practically a winter pastime in the Snowbelt, and most households have an assortment of snow removal tools, including one of the best snow blowers, at their disposal. If you leave the snow too long, you might as well get an ice pick. If you go out too soon, odds are once won’t be enough. Turn the snow thrower chute the wrong way? Get ready to eat snow. 

With years of snow removal under my belt, I couldn't wait to get my hands on the Husqvarna ST 430T snow blower and put it through its paces. I’m a fairly small individual, so when this beast arrived on a giant pallet, I have to admit I was intimidated. To my surprise, getting it off the pallet was the hardest part! (And truthfully, not even that hard.)

Wondering how it stood up to the recent snow blizzard? I’ll give you a hint: it did not disappoint. 

Husqvarna ST 430T snow blower: key product specifications

• Working width: 30 inches
• Fuel tank volume: 1.32 gallons
• HP: 12.5 horsepower
• Transmission: hydrostatic
• Dimensions (inches): 62L x 31W x 48.25H
• Weight: 373 pounds
• Start: electric

First impressions of the Husqvarna ST 430T snow blower

There wasn’t much unboxing to do, because the Husqvarna ST 430T snow blower arrived on a wooden pallet. This was a welcome bonus, because (speaking from experience here) assembling a snow blower from scratch is no easy task. 

First things first, I read the manual from start to finish. I learned my lesson early on that this step is non-negotiable. 

Before hitting the pavement, this model requires both oil and fuel (good-quality unleaded is recommended). Outside of a quick run to the local gas station, this part was quick and easy. 

Just a note: using fresh gas is very important! Stale gas can prevent the snow blower from starting, or even damage the machine. 

What's it like to use the Husqvarna ST 430T snow blower?

One the snow blower was gassed up, I was ready to roll. The Husqvarna ST 430T model has three settings: boost, fast and slow. Boost and fast are meant for heavy or wet snow, which this was. I decided on fast, because the snow was still fresh and not too compact.

Before turning on, I made sure the key was in the ignition, and the fuel switch was set to on. Since it was my first time using the machine, I primed it twice. Priming more than three times can cause the engine to flood, so it’s important to be conservative here. 

Next, I put the throttle in the fast position, before turning the on/off switch to start. Once the engine starts, you can release the key. The manual suggested letting the engine run for a few minutes before starting to throw snow, so I waited five minutes.

Of course I wanted to try out the heated handles, i.e. my favorite feature. At the touch of a button, they started to warm up, producing enough heat to be felt through my gloves.

Maneuvering the snow blower wasn't nearly as difficult as I was anticipating. It felt very much like a lawn mower, but not quite as fast. 

If you’re new to snow removal, it's worth learning how to use a snow blower properly to make sure you can get the most from your new machine.

Benefits of a two-stage blower

Single stage blowers are great for mild to moderate snowfall, but are only recommended only for paved surfaces.

The Husqvarna ST 430T, however, is a two-stage blower with an impressive clearing capacity and premium features. Designed for heavy snowfall and/or commercial operations, tackling large common areas and inconsistent terrain is no problem. 

Two-stage blowers have a metal auger and snow is discharged by an impeller fan, which throws it farther. It can also be used on gravel driveways as well as pavement, and the auger does not touch the ground. Two-stage throwers also clear a wider path than a single-stage snow blower, typically up to 30 inches.

Notice in the image below, the metal auger. This is a great tool for breaking up icy snow – something single stage snow throwers can’t do. A single-stage machine is a broom in comparison, sweeping snow out of the way versus cutting through it. 

January proved to be a bitter cold month, raking in between 3-8 inches on two separate occasions. Unfortunately for drivers, there was a layer of sleet underneath, making the snow a heavy, wet mess. Six inches was borderline difficult for my Troy-Bilt Squal 179E snow blower to push through, but a cake walk for the Husqvarna. 

Fairly unsurprising, however, because single stage snow throwers are recommended for snow of six inches and less, and definitely not for ice. The ST 430T had no trouble crushing the layer of sleet, thanks to the steel auger, and wasn’t phased by the deepest of the snow. 

Living in a textbook suburban neighborhood with an asphalt driveway (measuring in at 20ft W x 25ft L), both the single-stage rubber auger and two-stage steel auger worked well for my needs. The Husqvarna took no more than 15 minutes to clear both the driveway and sidewalk, while the Troy-Bilt Squal 179E took roughly double that, struggling to move forward in areas. 

Key features of the Husqvarna ST 430T snow blower

• Key electric start The last thing I want to do in the bitter cold is yank on a pull start – especially with gloves on. Thankfully, the Husqvarna ST 430T snow blower comes through yet again with the most sought-after feature (in my book, at least): an easy electric start. Seriously simple, you turn a key and you’re on your way to clear paths.
• Heated handles If you’ve ever been car shopping, you’ll resonate. Right here is the difference between an economy car and a luxury car. Heated handles take this bad boy from basic to extra, and it’s worth every dime. Sure, gloves are great…but have you ever experienced heated hand grips? A shovel will no longer feature on your list of snow removal must haves once you have! 
• Remote chute rotator The chute can be adjusted with minimal effort using the rotator. Changing the direction of the chute is important when you’re snow throwing in windy conditions. The last thing you want is your cleared garden paths to be covered in picked up snow. 
• LED headlight In the middle of a snowstorm, don’t underestimate the value of headlights. Snowflakes flying at your face can really decrease visibility, and the LED lights help a ton. Extra lighting to your path is especially helpful when clearing in the early morning or evening hours.
• Heavy-duty auger The strong auger rips through ice and wet snow, which is invaluable in heavy snowstorms.
• 30in working width Many snow throwers have a clearing capacity of half of this Husqvarna. That’s double the passes, meaning extra time. When you’re working in frigid conditions, speed is the name of the game. Weighing in at a whopping 373 pounds, the Husqvarna ST 430T is shockingly easy to maneuver and push – even with a 30in working width.
• Adjustable bucket height The user can adjust the space between the auger housing and ground at the touch of a lever. This feature is awesome when you change surfaces (i.e. gravel vs. pavement).
• Clearing stick In the chance you experience any build-up in the chute, the heavy duty clearing stick (appropriately placed above the auger housing) can clear it right up. 

How does the Husqvarna ST 430T compare to other snow blowers?

There are two primary categories of snow blowers: residential and commercial. The ST 430T is a commercial model, meaning it is more powerful (and for good reason). Commercial models are designed to clear larger, heavier amounts of snow, and across varying types of ground. 

Many other two-stage models don’t come close with clearing width, which is a keen advantage of this Husqvarna. The ST 430T clears a path of 30” in one sweep, while the majority of two-stage competition falls between 24”-26”. Husqvarna does offer additional options when it comes to commercial blowers though, and I’d bet they are just as strong and mighty as the 430T! 

The Husqvarna ST 424 snow blower has heated handles and an LED headlight, and is a runner-up to the ST 430T. The only major difference is the clearing width, which is 24” vs. 30”. The Husqvarna ST 427 snow blower boasts the added luxuries like heated handles and ample lighting, with a working width of 27” vs. 30”. As you can see – all three Husqvarna commercial models are fairly similar, less their clearing width. Definitely something to take into consideration as you pick the best model for your environment. 

When it comes to actual physical labor, I found this model much easier to maneuver than every other snow thrower I tested. For reference, I’ve since tried the Troy-Bilt Squal 179E, Ariens Classic Two Stage, and my neighbor’s Craftsman. Considering the hefty weight of this tool, I’d consider that wildly impressive. 

When the second snow storm rolled around, I had the pleasure of giving the single-stage Troy-Bilt Squall 179E a go. Even though both models did their job, the Husqvarna was undoubtedly sturdier and steadier. The Troy-Bilt struggled on the sidewalks (approx 4 inches of snow), while the Husqvarna plowed right through it. I also noticed it took four passes to clear snow using the Troy-Bilt, vs. 1-2 with the Husqvarna. 

Is the Husqvarna ST 430T snow thrower worth the money?

The burning question – is it really worth nearly $3,000? Well, it depends. While I would recommend this to anyone and everyone with an oversized area to clear, I admit it’s a tad overkill for an average-size driveway like my own.

If you’re on the market for a heavy-duty snow blower that can attack heavy snowfall and ice – you’ve met your match. The Husqvarna ST 430T snow thrower is super easy to maneuver and features premium features I found nowhere else. I loved this model because it was easy enough for a newbie residential user, but is also tough enough for commercial jobs. It truly is a jack of all trades snow blower. 

If, however, you’re willing to ditch the luxuries to save a buck, there are plenty of options available. Leaving behind headlights and heated handles can cut back nearly $1k off the price tag, and for many a thicker pair of gloves will do just fine. Even reducing the clearing width by 3”-6” shaves off up to $750. 

There are also a few super economically friendly choices – like Snow Joe – which get the job done, but with slightly more effort. The lower power models are tougher to control and steer, get easily clogged with snow, and can’t clear nearly as well as the heavy-duty options like Husqvarna ST 430T. 

The way I see it, a snow blower is an investment. Like a fridge or oven, you hope to have them for a long period of time. If you live in an area that gets pounded with snow, my opinion is to pay for comfort and convenience. If you have a single-car driveway? Save your cash and opt for a more reasonably priced option.  

With all that being said, if you’re considering the Husqvarna ST 430T two-stage snowblower, I assure you it’s a great machine that delivers great results. Effortlessly driving through untouched sidewalks, I would buy this snow blower over and over again – and I’m sure my neighbors would say the same! 

The 30” clearing ability is no joke, I physically measured it with a measuring tape. Perfect for large driveways and gravel surfaces, this model is, without doubt, a contender for the best snow blower of 2022. You can send me a thank you note later with your toasty warm hands, courtesy of the temperature controlled handlebars!

I’ve always wanted a yard full of trees and that’s exactly what I got when I bought my first home. I have 15 trees, all of which require pruning and trimming on occasion. I’m lucky in that my dad has helped me with my yard maintenance for the last two years, but there are times when he’s not available. I want to be able to do it all by myself.

To manage my trees, I needed another yard tool in my arsenal – a pole saw. I have one of the best hedge trimmers, but this can only tackle shrubs and anything within reach, so trees were becoming a nightmare to prune. Thank goodness I had a chance to try the Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw. Pole saws are essentially chain saws on the end of a pole, which can be used to prune and trim trees, tall bushes, or any other greenery out of reach.

It might have taken me some time to figure out how to use the Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw, but with a bit of help, I’m well on my way to becoming a pole saw pro. Read on to see exactly how I fared using the Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw on my yard full of trees.

Troy-Bilt TB25PS pole saw: key specifications

• Power: Gas
• Kickback bar: 8-inch low  
• Gas tank: 25 cc
• Pole length: 7 feet (with 26-inch removable extender section)
• Max reach: 12 feet
• Weight: 8 inches
• Warranty: 13.8 lbs
• Bar oiler: Automatic

Setting up the Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw

The Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw arrived in a long box. After connecting the three pieces of the pole together and attaching the strap, I adjusted the handle to a position I liked.

I mixed the included 2-cycle engine oil with a gallon of gas and put it in the gas tank. The pole saw came with a bottle of premium chain, bar, and sprocket oil, which I poured into the chain oil reservoir. Troy-Bilt included a small tool to loosen and tighten a screw at the top of the saw which releases oil onto the chain. I loosened it slightly counterclockwise to allow oil to automatically flow.

According to the instructions, I needed to adjust the chain before using it for the first time. To do that, I had to loosen two bolts on the bar cover and use a screwdriver to loosen the chain tensioning screw. After loosening it, I tightened it until the chain was firm, but not too tight, on the guide bar. I hoped this would be good enough. The instructions noted that the new chain would need to be readjusted the first five times I used the pole saw. This is normal as the chain breaks in. 

Setting up the Troy-Bilt TB25PS took longer than I would have liked. This was probably because of my lack of confidence and practice with using a pole saw. If you know what you’re doing with a pole saw, I see no reason why the setup process wouldn’t take between 10–15 minutes to complete.

• For a manual pruning solution, see the best hand saw

What is the Troy-Bilt TB25PS pole saw like to use?

Starting the Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw is a multi-step process. First, I put the strap over my shoulder and then I pressed the primer bulb 10 times. Yes – 10 times! Then I flipped the choke lever clockwise (or to the left) and pulled on the starter rope until it started. Sometimes it took up to 12 pulls to get the Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw to start; other times, it took 8 pulls. This might have been because I tested the pole saw in November and December (in Texas, mind you) when the weather at night dipped to the 50s and 60s and the daytime weather was in the 60s and high 70s. I’d be curious to see how easy it starts in the summer.

Once the machine roared to life, I let the engine idle for 30 seconds before I picked up the pole saw and walked to the tree I needed to trim.

The first time I used the pole saw, I included the extension section so that the entire pole saw was 7-foot in length. I wanted to see just how high I could cut. When I found a dead 1-inch branch that I wanted to cut, I gripped the throttle and the chain spun on the guide bar, cutting through the branch quickly and efficiently. 

As I moved up to two- and three-inch branches, I’ll admit that the 7-foot pole saw wasn’t easy to handle. I had to maneuver the pole saw upwards and keep it steady as I cut, all the while, the engine vibrated. Handling the pole saw was difficult for me, and my arms and shoulders got tired very quickly.

I hadn’t cut but four branches when I noticed that the chain had come off the guide bar. I put the pole saw down and pressed the on/off button above the throttle. The machine turned off and I let it rest for a little while.

When the pole saw had cooled down, I went to work trying to fix the chain on the guide bar, but no matter what I did, I couldn’t seem to get it tight enough. The bottom part of the chain drooped. I felt out of my element and couldn’t figure out how to fix it, so I waited until my dad could help me.

I’m glad I sought help from someone who knows how to use a pole saw. The Troy-Bilt instructions are pretty thorough, but my dad quickly surmised that the chain had come off the guide bar. I wasn’t able to see that had happened until we took off the bar cover. He guided me on how to put it back on the guide bar and then gave me some tips on tightening the chain and doing maintenance on the pole saw in the future.

After my dad helped me to put the chain back on, I removed the pole extender and went back into the yard to cut some dead branches. Without the pole extender, the pole saw was a little over 5 feet in length, which allowed me to handle the pole saw much better. Of course, I couldn’t reach branches higher than 10 feet, but that was just fine as I was more focused on getting a feel for how to use the pole saw properly.  

With the Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw, I’ve been able to cut through some pretty thick branches. I think the thickest branch I’ve cut through was about five-inches in diameter. This is not to say that I couldn’t cut through thicker branches. I think I could, but it takes some patience and finesse. I don’t want to ruin the chain trying to cut through something that should be cut with a large chain saw, rather than a pole saw. Overall, I’m impressed with the pole saw and feel much more capable now that I’ve learned how to use it.

Notable features of the Troy-Bilt TB25PS pole saw

There are a few important features to the Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw. It’s equipped with an auto oiler to keep your chain well oiled at all times. The 8-inch low kickback bar helps to cut through limbs and prevents the tip of the saw from touching the branches. If it touched the branches, the pole saw could ‘kickback’ creating a safety risk. The kickback bar prevents that from happening.

Beyond a two-year limited warranty, the only other notable thing about the pole saw is that it accepts TrimmerPlus attachments. What does this mean? It means that you can exchange the pole saw with other Troy-Bilt attachments such as a brushcutter, edger, cultivator, line cutting head, high-performance blower, and hedge trimmer. This means you can adapt it to do things like pruning shrubs or cutting back overgrowth.

You’d have to buy these attachments separately. They cost between $79–$110, but once they arrive at your house, all you do is click them into place on the pole. Rather than have a cluttered garage or shed with seven different yard tools, you have one pole, seven attachments, and a lot more space.

How does the Troy-Bilt TB25PS pole saw rate online?

The Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw has 17 reviews on the Troy-Bilt website that result in a 4.8-star rating (out of five). On Home Depot’s website, 53 people have reviewed the pole saw which has resulted in 91 percent of customers recommending it.

Like me, some reviewers noted that it can take some time to start the pole saw – even during warmer months. I also noticed that other women had difficulty using the pole saw with the extender. They noted the length added some weight to the pole saw – which makes sense. Most women are less than six feet in height, and with the extender, the pole saw is seven feet long which can be difficult to handle.

How does the Troy-Bilt TB25PS pole saw compare to similar models?

I haven’t tested other pole saws, but there plenty with comparable features. The ECHO PPF-225 is similar in most respects though it has a 10-inch bar (rather than the Troy-Bilt 8-inch) and a fixed shaft that’s 7.8 feet long with a 3-foot extender if you need it. With the extender, you’d be able to reach three more feet with the ECHO than with the Troy-Bilt. Remember, this will make it heavier to use so keep that in mind before you buy. The biggest drawback of the ECHO pole saw is that it’s $200 more expensive than the Troy-Bilt.

What sets the Troy-Bilt pole saw apart from the rest of the pole saws on the market is the attachment capabilities. Milwaukee offers something similar with their M18 FUEL Pole Saw Kit. In addition to the 10-inch Oregon bar and chain with an automatic oiler, the pole saw comes with a 20-inch hedge trimmer blade that can cut through 1-inch branches. It’s also compatible with an edger and string trimmer attachment, though those aren’t included in the package.

If you bought the Troy-Bilt hedge trimmer attachment in addition to the pole saw, it would cost you about $330. The Milwaukee combo package is $559. That’s pretty expensive, though this may be because the Milwaukee is battery-powered (whereas the Troy-Bilt is gas powered) and has an articulating head that offers 270-degree blade rotation and 13 different operating positions.

Should you buy the Troy-Bilt TB25PS pole saw?

The Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw is a smart buy, especially since it’s much cheaper than other gas-powered pole saws on the market. Depending on your height, you can reach branches that are 12 feet high with the extender in place. Once you get the hang of how to tighten the chain and do the multi-step startup process, it’s not a very complicated machine (no matter how intimidating it seemed to me at the beginning). I was happy to see that the saw cuts through thick branches evenly and swiftly.

Tack on the fact that you can buy additional attachments from Troy-Bilt, like a hedge trimmer or a leaf blower, and this is a great, versatile product to have on hand.

About this review, and our reviewer

Alex Temblador is a Dallas-based award-winning author and freelance writer that has covered home, design, architecture, and art in publications like Real Homes, Gardeningetc, Home & Gardens, Dwell, Architectural Digest, Artsy, Neighborhoods.com, Culture Trip, among many others. She recently bought her first home, a green Sears & Roebuck house that's over 100 years old, sits on half an acre of land and features a stunning wraparound porch, original hardwood floors, pocket doors, and a butler pantry. Alex loves to test products for Gardeningetc, Real Homes, and Homes & Gardens buying guides and reviews which has helped to expand the richness of her first-time homeowner life. The Mixed Latinx writer can usually be found working or relaxing in her outdoor spaces. 

As with all our reviews, the Troy-Bilt TB25PS Pole Saw was tested first-hand in Alex’s backyard, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand unless we are able to keep it. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time. 

Mowing any yard can be tiresome – especially with a heavy or cumbersome lawn mower. That’s why the Honda HRN216VKA lawn mower caught my eye.

I’ve used self-propel lawn mowers in the past, but most self-propel systems required a little bit of a push. When I discovered that the Honda HRN216VKA boasted a self-propeller that could reach speeds up to 4 mph, I was ecstatic to try it out. Would it make mowing my lawn easier? Faster? With a half-an-acre yard and some slopes to contend with, I discovered those answers soon enough.

Keep on reading below to learn all about my experience testing the Honda HRN216VKA and whether it makes the cut as one of the best lawn mowers.

Honda HRN216VKA lawn mower: key specifications

• Deck cutting width: 21 inches
• Power source: Gas
• Cutting height range: 7 adjustments ranging between 1–4 inches  
• Self-propel speed: 0–4 mph
• Bag capacity: 1.9 bushels
• Weight: 82 lbs
• Wheel size: 8 inches
• Warranty: 3 years

What is the HONDA HRN216VKA lawn mower like to use? 

The Honda HRN216VKA arrived at my home already assembled, but from what I’ve read, assembly is simple and could take up to 10 minutes to complete.

As it is a gas mower, I filled the tank with the suggested amount of gas (the oil had already been added to the tank when it arrived at my house). Then, I adjusted the wheels with the dual levers to my preferred height. I’m not a fan of the Honda’s plastic wheels, but I can overlook that because it has seven different cutting adjustments that range from 1–4 inches. Plus, I liked how easy it was to adjust the cutting height with the levers on the wheels.

Clipping collection and mulching options
Before I started the mower, I had to decide whether to mulch, bag, or discharge the yard clippings. The Honda HRN216VKA has a Clip Director on the side of the deck. All it takes is sliding it to the right or left to choose which function I desire the mower to do. The Honda comes with a 1.9-bushel bag – which is easy to get on and off – but I preferred to use the mulching feature most of the time. I tested the lawn mower in the fall/early winter so my yard was full of leaves and I wanted to recycle the leaves as mulch so as to provide my yard with some nutrients.

As far as the discharge option, it’s a rear discharge which means it is designed to spit the clippings on the backside of the mower – right on your legs. This seems like an unnecessary (and messy!) feature to me, but the option is built into the mower if that’s something you prefer.

• Learn more about the benefits of mulching

Operation
To start the mower, I pulled the flywheel brake safety system lever toward the handle and gripped it with my left hand while my right hand pulled the recoil starter rope. It usually takes one or two pulls for the engine to start. I like that it doesn’t require an engine choke.

Of course, the first thing I wanted to try was the Smart Drive Self Propel system. The folks at Honda made the lever an ergonomic paddle lever that can be pushed down with your thumbs or palm. I use my thumbs on both hands, but you can easily use just one hand if you’d like. The lever can be adjusted in five different positions which means I was able to find a comfortable position for my wrist.

I will warn you – the Smart Drive Self Propel has a kick. It can go from 0 to 4 mph immediately. Too much pressure and the lawn mower will buck and zip forward. If you’re not holding on tight, it could escape your grip. However, if you don’t apply enough pressure, you’ll basically be pushing the lawn mower (I did push the lawn mower without the self-propel to see how heavy it was and it’s not too bad). I can attest that it took me a few tries to intuitively get a feel for how to use the Smart Drive Self Propel.

Once I got the hang of it, I got to work mowing the lawn. When I pushed the Smart Drive Self Propel lever all the way down, thus achieving 4 mph, I found myself jogging to keep up with the lawn mower. This was good on evenings when the sun set early, and I wanted to finish the lawn before it got dark. Of course, I didn’t always use the 4 mph setting, but even 2 and 3 mph is a brisk walk.

As I mentioned, if you push too hard on the lever, the lawn mower will buck off the ground, which isn’t great for the plastic wheels when the mower comes crashing down. That said, the Honda’s self-propel lever provided a great burst of power when I needed to mow up an incline and around corners.

On the other hand, if I was mowing horizontally on an incline, I tried to use a lower speed. When I used a higher speed mowing horizontally on an incline, the lawn mower seemed to bump up and down more than I liked and missed blades of grass. The last thing I’ll note about speed has to do with the mulching feature. I found that the leaves were better mulched at a lower speed than a high one.

The 21-inch cutting deck is on the smaller end of standard push mowers, which typically range between 21–36 inches wide. This isn’t a major drawback because the Smart Drive Self Propel offers speeds that allow me to cut just as quickly as I might have with a larger cutting deck.

Self-Propel Smart Drive on the Honda HRN216VKA lawn mower

The most notable feature of the Honda HN216VKA lawn mower is the Self-Propel Smart Drive feature. Most self-propel features on lawn mowers are designed as levers that you pull, however, Honda engineers worked with an ergonomic specialist to develop a control and cone clutch transmission in the form of a paddle lever that you adjust with the simple push of your thumbs or palm. You can use one hand or both hands and even adjust the position of the lever up or down in five different settings for the comfort of your wrist.

Best yet – it provides instant speed up to 4 mph which is fairly fast. I believe the fastest self-propel systems reach 6 mph. With this function, you don’t have to really push the lawn mower, only guide it along the path you want it to take.

Mulch, bag and discharge feature on the Honda HRN216VKA lawn mower

Honda has made it easier to choose what to do with your grass and leaf clippings thanks to their 3-in-1 system with Clip Director. On the deck, you’ll see find a green clip that can be slid left or right and stops on three different functions: mulching, bagging, or discharging.

You don’t have to add attachments to mulch or discharge, but you will have to add the included 1.9-bushel bag if you choose the ‘bagging’ setting. This shouldn’t take but a minute or so.

How does the Honda HRN216VKA lawn mower rate online?

On the Honda website, the Honda HRN216VKA has a 4.2 rating out of 643 reviews, and on the Home Depot website, 82% of customers out of 4,640 reviews recommend the HRN216VKA.

With ratings like that, it’s fair to say that most customers are satisfied with their purchase. Some reviewers weren’t fans of the plastic wheels, and a few pointed out issues with the self-propel feature. Some reported that it required a learning curve, while others noted that it occasionally stopped working and needed maintenance under the three-year warranty plan.  

How does the Honda HRN216VKA lawn mower compare to similar models?

The only other lawn mower that I’ve personally tested is the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower. It’s more affordable than the HRN216VKA Lawn Mower and has a self-propelling system. Although Troy-Bilt doesn’t advertise the speed of the lawn mower’s self-propel system, I can confidently say that the Honda is much faster. Where the Troy-Bilt has front-wheel drive, the Honda has rear-wheel drive. The main area where the Troy-Bilt excels above the Honda is its SpaceSavr design which offers the option of vertical storage. It also does slightly better when mowing horizontally on an incline.

The one lawn mower that is most comparable to the Honda HRN216VKA is the Toro 21382. It’s equipped with a Honda GCV160 engine, mulching, bagging, and discharge system, and a similar self-propel system. The difference is that the Toro lever is not ergonomically designed (like the Honda is), however, the Toro can reach speeds up to 4.8 mph, where the Honda only reaches 4.0 mph. (I don’t think that extra 0.8 mph will make a difference) Other areas where the Toro stands out is the 2.1-bushel bag, a five-year-warranty, and higher-quality wheels. Perhaps this is why the Toro is $699, which is about $180 more than the Honda.

Should you buy the Honda HRN216VKA lawn mower?

The Honda HRN216VKA is a solid lawn mower. It may take you a few times to figure out how to use the self-propel lever properly, but once you have it down, you’ll be amazed by how easy mowing becomes. You essentially won’t have to push the lawn mower, just guide it to where it needs to go at speeds up to 4 mph. This is especially helpful for those with inclines in their yard.

Yes, the mower is on the pricier end, but this has to do with the high-quality and high-power GCV170 engine and outstanding features like the mulching, bagging, and discharge system, MicroCut twin blades, seven different cutting heights, eight-inch wheels, and rear wheel drive.

With this Honda lawn mower, mowing your yard will be a whole lot easier and less stressful on your body.

About this review, and our reviewer

Alex Temblador is a Dallas-based award-winning author and freelance writer that has covered home, design, architecture, and art in publications like Real Homes, Gardeningetc, Home & Gardens, Dwell, Architectural Digest, Artsy, Neighborhoods.com, Culture Trip, among many others. She recently bought her first home, a green Sears & Roebuck house that's over 100 years old, sits on half an acre of land and features a stunning wraparound porch, original hardwood floors, pocket doors, and a butler pantry. Alex loves to test products for Gardeningetc, Real Homes, and Homes & Gardens buying guides and reviews which has helped to expand the richness of her first-time homeowner life. The Mixed Latinx writer can usually be found working or relaxing in her outdoor spaces. 

As with all our reviews, the Honda HRN216VKA was tested first-hand in Alex’s backyard, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand unless we are able to keep it. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time. 

I have a large section of brush along the edge of my yard. It’s full of trees, shrubs, hedges, and vines – a chaotic mass of greenery that the previous owner left behind. I like to keep the brush as best trimmed as I can, but with the variety of plants, not every hedge trimmer is beast enough to handle it. But, the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer is.

Black + Decker is a top-name power tool brand, so I was excited to test their hedge trimmer. Outfitted with a 60V battery, it was sure to offer some power, without the noise and pollution of a gas-powered hedge trimmer.

Recently, I was talking to a friend about how long it takes to complete my yard work. I cut, trim, and edge a half an acre property all on my own, and if there is one thing I have learned, it’s that the tools you use matter. Read on and see why the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer is the hedge trimmer that I always want in my hands. 

When you're done, check out our best hedge trimmer guide. 

Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer: key specifications

• Blade length: 24 inches
• Power source: 60V battery
• Cutting capacity: 1.5 inches  
• Weight: 8.4 lbs
• Dimensions: 39 x 8 x 7 inches

What is the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer like to use?

The Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer arrived mostly set up and ready to go. I only needed to charge the battery for a few hours before I took it outside and went to work on the brush in my backyard.

Because it’s battery-powered (and lacks a cord), starting up the hedge trimmer was quick and simple. I connected the battery to the charger and with the pull of a lever under the back handle, the machine revved to life.

Whether you are right or left-handed, this hedge trimmer is easy to handle. I'm ambidextrious so I've used it both ways and have found it equally user-friendly no matter which hand holds the front handle and which one wraps around the back handle. I always wear gloves while I do yard work (which is always advised when learning how to use a hedge trimmer), but I like that there's a front handle guard for extra protection. 

At 8.4 lbs, this Black + Decker hedge trimmer isn’t the lightest among hedge trimmers, but it’s not the heaviest either. It sits right in the middle. I didn’t have any trouble handling it for about 40 minutes at a time (though I did switch back-and-forth between arms so one wouldn't ache more than the other).

With dual-action blades, I was able to cut limbs on either side of the blade, which made for quicker trimming sessions. The 24-inch blade felt like a great length for cutting my hedges.

The one thing that stood out to me pretty quickly was the power. I own some 20V battery-powered yard tools, and you can immediately tell the difference. With a 60V battery, this hedge trimmer has the kind of ‘oomph’ you get with the gas-powered hedge trimmers. It easily cut through branches that were 1.5 inches in diameter. In fact, it was able to cut some of my nearly 2-inch branches in the brush.

It only got stuck one time as it tried to cut through a thick branch. All I had to do was press the POWERCUT button on the top of the machine and the blade cut through the resistance of the limb until it was completely severed. It’s this particular feature that makes this hedge trimmer a standout among hedge trimmers.

I’ve used the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer a few times, about 30–45 minutes each time, and I haven’t run out of juice just yet. Unless you have a gigantic amount of hedges or brush in your yard, you’ll be completely satisfied with the power and time this battery-powered hedge trimmer offers.

There are only two drawbacks to this hedge trimmer. One – it lacks a safety measure. For instance, some hedge trimmers have a two-button set up so that you have to press both buttons at the same time to start the machine. If you have kids, a safety feature like this can prevent accidents from happening. The only safety feature the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless hedge trimmer has is the front guard. 

The other thing to point out is that the hedge trimmer did not come with a sheath for the blade. A sheath would offer the blade some type of protection from the elements and prevent accidents. It’s a small thing that could be easily remedied by Black + Decker.

Standout qualities: the power cut feature

The POWERCUT feature is by far the most exciting built-in tool I've used on a hedge trimmer. Although the hedge trimmer does a great job cutting through 1.5-inch limbs, there may come a time when the blade gets stuck on a branch. 

Rather than pull out the blade and possibly damage it, you simply press the button at the top of the machine and the blade saws its way through. It means that trimming a hedge becomes much simpler and quicker. 

The battery power of the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer

The hedge trimmer comes with a 60V Max 1.5 Ah battery that can be used on other Black + Decker yard products. If necessary, the charger can charge a 20V battery as well. 

After using the hedge trimmer twice for about 30–40 minutes each time, I found that the battery had barely gone down to half a charge. You can see this by pressing a button on the side of the battery. Most people complain that battery-powered tools aren't as long-lasting or effective as gas-powered machines, but this hedge trimmer gives those gas-powered ones a run for their money. 

I accidentally dropped this battery before I even used it (I know!), but thankfully, it’s sturdy and didn’t cause any problems. I’ve dropped another brand’s battery before and it completely stopped working. I’m grateful that this high-quality battery is sturdy and didn't break when I dropped it. A quick Google search shows that the battery alone costs $100.

How does the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer compare to similar models?

Earlier this year, I tested the Snapfresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer. Though it’s cheaper, lighter, and has stellar safety features, it doesn’t have the power that the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer has (the Snapfresh runs on a 20V battery). It can only cut through 0.55-inch limbs, whereas the Black + Decker can cut through 1.5 inches!

The Husqvarna 520iHD60 is more comparable to the Black + Decker except that it has a 40V battery, a blade length that's barely over 23 inches, and a cutting capacity that is 1.26 inches. While the head rotates to allow for trimming at odd angles, this yard tool is close to $400 and heavier than the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer.

Both Craftsman and Greenworks Pro have 60V battery-powered hedge trimmers (Greenworks even has an 80V battery-powered hedge trimmer!).

I like the Greenworks Pro HT60B00 for its rotating rear handle, but it can’t hold a candle to the Craftsman which is more similar to the Black + Decker 60V hedge trimmer. Like the Black + Decker, the Craftsman has a 1.5 cutting capacity and a 24-inch blade. However, it’s about $20 more expensive than the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer.

Should you buy the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer?

While I think there is an argument for using certain gas-powered yard tools (like some of the best lawn mowers), the mega battery power of the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer makes it so you don't have to deal with the hassle of gas anymore. 

This hedge trimmer is lightweight enough to handle longer jobs and has a stellar cutting capacity. With the POWERCUT feature, you no longer have to worry about jams. The price is a bit steep, but not that bad if you start comparing it to brands like Husqvarna and Craftsman.

Power and precision are what you can expect with the Black + Decker 60V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer in your hands – and isn't that what makes for the best hedge trimmer? 

About this review and our reviewer

Alex Temblador is a Dallas-based award-winning author and freelance writer that has covered home, design, architecture, and art in publications like Real Homes, Gardeningetc, Home & Gardens, Dwell, Architectural Digest, Artsy, Neighborhoods.com, Culture Trip, among many others. She recently bought her first home, a green Sears & Roebuck house that's over 100 years old, sits on half an acre of land, and features a stunning wraparound porch, original hardwood floors, pocket doors, and a butler pantry. Alex loves to test products for Gardeningetc, Real Homes, and Homes & Gardens buying guides and reviews which has helped to expand the richness of her first-time homeowner life. The Mixed Latinx writer can usually be found working or relaxing in her outdoor spaces. 

As with all our reviews, the Black + Decker 60V Hedge Trimmer Mower was tested first-hand in Alex’s backyard, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand unless we are able to keep them. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time.

Similar to a lot of people, I’m by no means an experienced gardener, but I do like my garden to look nice. It means that I’m always searching for any tools which help me achieve good results, whilst saving time. Therefore, when the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower arrived for me to test, I was hoping it would be just the machine for the job, encouraging me to keep on top of the lawns throughout the year, and not just in spring and summer.

I finished maternity leave recently, so trying to find time to balance work, the logistics of two children under the age of four and keeping on top of the house and garden is proving very difficult. Anything that can help make my life easier is very welcome indeed. 

Our garden is fairly large, with the lawn split over three levels. Having the best lawn mower to hand is essential if we want to keep on top of our lawn maintenance. For that reason, we already own a cordless mower, which we love, but it’s on the small side, so the grass bin fills up very quickly. 

Our bottom lawn (the largest of the three levels), is maintained by a robotic lawn mower, but we recently installed a climbing frame which has been causing the robotic lawn mower to occasionally get stuck and not cut the whole lawn as often as it should. This means that the grass has become so long in places, the robot mower’s sensors think the long grass is an obstacle and it actively avoids these patches. 

So, as well as the top and mid-sections of lawn, I also needed to do the bottom section, which meant I could really put the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower to the test and see just how long the battery would last and how many trips to the compost bin were required, compared to our current mower.

Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower: key product specs

• Power type 48V 2.0Ah Li-ion battery
• Battery length 40 mins
• Charging time 1 hour (for full battery from low)
• Cutting width 42cm
• Size (packaged) 106cm x 122cm x 47cm 
• Weight 13.5kg
• Grass collection box 50L
• Cutting height 30mm - 80mm

First impressions of the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower

Although the box the lawn mower was delivered in was fairly large, I was surprised at how light it was. Upon opening the box, everything was packaged neatly, with the charger and battery in separate boxes. The Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower also looks very smart – white and black with green accents. I was also happy to see that there was just one instruction booklet, of just 24 pages.

Getting started

The Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower comes mostly assembled and after a quick look through the operating manual, I was pleased to see that all I needed to do was set up the handle, attach the grass box and insert the battery. As I’m no stranger to testing contenders for the best cordless lawn mower list, the first thing I did was charge the battery. This is as simple as slotting the battery onto the charging base and plugging it in. When the battery is fully charged, all four of its LEDs are alight. 

Battery charging, I started assembling the mower. First, you pull the handle upwards and then lock it into place using two handles. These twist to loosen and tighten and then can be pushed down 90 degrees towards the handle, to lock into place on the inside of the frame. 

Next you fit the grass bin, by pushing the base down and clipping it onto the metal rod. You then lift up the protective flap on the mower and hook the grass box into place. This is the only step I found a bit fiddly, as I had to find the exact angle to push the grass box into place, at the same time as placing it on the hooks. Set up took just over a minute and a half.

The battery took just under an hour to charge. To insert it into the mower, you simply lift the visor and slide it into the battery housing with the ‘G’ logo facing upwards. It then clicks into place and with the battery visor shut, you’re ready to go.

What is the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower like to use? 

To operate the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower, you must first rotate the safety key 90 degrees, which can be found on the main body of the mower. When the key is turned, the mower is ready to use. The key should always be replaced to the original position when the mower is not in use. I then adjusted the cutting height to 50mm by simply holding the lever firmly and moving it to the ‘50’ mark. The operation manual offers advice on how to mow a lawn by choosing the most suitable cutting height for the current state of your lawn, and it’s great that the mower has settings in 10mm increments from 30mm to 80mm.

To start the mower, you must press the safety button on the handle, then pull the lever upwards and then the safety button can be released. To stop the mower, you release the lever. The operation manual recommends moving along at a walking pace whilst mowing. 

I started on the top lawn and went round the edges first, then cut in lines from left to right. I then repeated this on the middle section and it was only once I’d finished this, I needed to empty the 50L grass bin. There is a handy indicator flap on the top of the grass bin, which is open when mowing, until the grass bin is full, in which case it closes. To empty the grass bin, you lift the flap at the rear of the machine and then lift and pull the grass bin up and outwards. I had a bit of an issue fitting it back on again, but when it was back in place, I moved on to the bottom section of my lawn.

The grass in some patches was much longer than on the other lawns, but I left the mower on ‘50’ and this was when I noticed a shift in sound of the Gtech’s motor. Every time I hit a particularly long or dense patch of grass, the motor sounded like it was speeding up, then it would return to normal shortly after, when I was mowing shorter grass. As I didn’t know much about this mower before I acquired it, I did a quick search online and found that this is part of Gtech’s omniblade cutting technology. The intelligent blade runs at 2800rpm, until it senses it needs extra power, so it will increase to 3500rpm, to ensure the power is there when needed. I was very impressed with this and it worked throughout cutting the entirety of the bottom lawn.

As the grass was very long in places and strewn with silver birch leaves, I did find myself having to empty the grass box more regularly. I definitely noticed the benefits of the larger grass box, but still had to empty the lawn mower every three laps or so.

I had almost finished the bottom lawn, when I noticed there was just one light lit on the battery. With just a small triangle left of the lawn, the battery finally gave up. I checked the time and I had been mowing for 37 minutes, so it had almost reached the 40 minutes of suggested battery life.

I took the battery back inside to charge and after just ten minutes (just long enough to make and drink a cuppa), the battery had two lights showing and I was able to finish the final section of the lawn. I then stepped back to admire my handiwork and I was not disappointed. The mower had done a brilliant job of tidying up the lawns and they looked neat and healthy. The only thing I was aesthetically missing was the lovely lines you get when you use a lawn mower with a rear roller, which are key if you really want to perfect your lawn decoration ideas. The mower did leave lines, but these were just left from the wheels!

Noise levels

One thing that really struck me when using the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower, was just how quiet it was. Instead of a high-pitched drone, the Gtech emits a low hum, which is easy on the ears. It also meant I didn’t feel the guilt that sometimes accompanies noisy tasks, as I wasn't worrying about disturbing the neighbours.

Ease of use

From the moment you unpack this mower it’s easy to use. The set up is incredibly simple and it’s very straightforward to operate. With its large wheels and long, fairly upright handle, I found moving the mower around the garden comfortable, quick and easy. With all cordless tools, the lack of power cord makes moving around the garden a breeze. There’s no faffing around with sockets, extension leads and having to move wires out of the way.

The cutting width also helps save time, as it’s a generous 420mm and I found it was able to reach a lot closer to the edges, unlike our current cordless mower.

Additional features of the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower

When it was time to pack the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower away in the garage, I was impressed at just how compact you can make the mower, which is good news if you're short on garden storage space. You can remove the grass box and then fold down the handles, so they sit neatly on top of the mower. It also has a convenient carry handle and it’s surprisingly lightweight, so moving it from garden to garage was easy.

The battery has a state of charge indicator, which means you can find out how much power is left, just by pressing a button. What’s also very handy is that you can see the state of charge when the battery is inserted and the mower is running. The fact that the battery charges in just an hour and you get 40 minutes of running time, is great too, meaning that you can finish the job quickly, without having to wait hours between charges.

The indicator on the grass box is a handy feature, ensuring you won’t end up with lots of loose grass cuttings over your lawn and the two safety mechanisms also help me feel at ease, knowing my son won’t be able to start the mower on his own.

How does the Gtech cordless lawn mower CLM50 rate? 

I have rated this mower four and a half stars due to the ease of set-up, simple operation and the great results. The smart blade is an excellent feature and I love that you can charge the battery in just an hour. All of these features will encourage me to keep on top of spring and autumn lawn care more often, as it’s so straightforward to use.  

Online, the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower rates highly, averaging four and a half stars. Users say that it’s lightweight, easy to use, the battery life is excellent and it’s a well-built, robust machine. Although many agree that it’s on the pricey side, they claim that it is worth the money and the proof is in the great results.

As I found, some of the negative comments are due to the grass box being a bit fiddly to fit and some comment that it is too expensive compared to some of its competitors.

Overall, I would recommend the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower and will be using it to replace our current mower, due to the battery life, the larger grass box and the overall ease of use. 

About this review and our reviewer

Bethan Davis is a PR Officer from the West Midlands. She lives with her fiancé and two boys and with a busy family home, is always looking for tools to help keep their garden tidy in a fraction of the time. She tested the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower in her garden this autumn. She has a large garden with a number of lawns on different levels,  giving her plenty of chances to put this mower through its paces. 

As with all our reviews, the Gtech CLM50 cordless lawn mower was tested first-hand in Bethan's garden, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand unless we are able to keep them. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time.

The Gtech HT50 Cordless Hedge Trimmer is a pole hedge trimmer designed to reach foliage higher up and lower down. It’s an upgrade of the HT30 model and features a longer blade (50 per cent longer to be precise), enabling more of your hedge to be cut in one sweep, as well as being able to slice through thicker branches.

We have lived in our house for just over a year and a half and have never trimmed our hedges. Our neighbors’ hedges were also starting to shadow some of the plants on our side of the fence, so with their permission, we decided to tackle all of the garden in one go. 

Now in autumn, we didn’t have the worry of nesting birds and with some of the foliage reaching over two meters, it was a perfect time to test out the Gtech HT50 Cordless Hedge Trimmer. I’ve never used a hedge trimmer before, so I was eager to see how easy it was to set up and use for beginners. I also wanted to put its claim of an impressive 60 minutes of battery life to the test. Find out how it ticked these boxes (and more) to make it worthy of a place on the list of the best hedge trimmers.

Gtech HT50 Cordless Hedge Trimmer product specifications:

• Power type: 18V Li-ion battery
• Battery life: 60 mins 
• Charging time: 4 hours (for full battery from low) 
• Cutting width: 2.5cm 
• Blade cutting length: 55cm 
• Pole length: 144cm
• Weight: 2.94kg 
• Product dimensions: H14cm x W200cm x D14cm 
• Warranty: 2 years 

First impressions

The box was streamline, light and upon opening it, everything was packaged neatly. It looks smart too, being black and white, with green accents. This color theme runs through the operating manual (and Gtech product line), which, I was pleased to see, was the only piece of paper to come with the hedge trimmer. 

Getting started

As I am no stranger to cordless power tools, as soon as I opened the box I found the battery to put on charge, so I could assemble and read the instructions while it was charging. The charger simply plugs straight into the battery, rather than having to slide the battery onto a docking station. 

The battery has four LEDs which progressively pulse while charging until all four are lit solidly, signalling the battery is fully charged. The battery takes four hours to charge fully from being flat. 

With the battery charging, I moved on to assembly. The hedge trimmer comes partly assembled. To finish assembly, I simply had to click the hedge trimmer body on to the head. The shapes on the handle match, so it’s easy to tell which way round it goes. Following this one quick step, the hedge trimmer was ready, although the instructions mention having to connect the blade to the head too, which after checking, had already been done. The fully charged battery simply slots into place. Setup took less than 30 seconds. 

What is the Gtech HT50 Cordless Hedge Trimmer like to use?

Included in the box is a safety harness which helps you work safely and ergonomically. This is worn like a sash and rests on your shoulder, with an adjustable height strap. The harness attaches to the hedge trimmer via clip on top of the handle. It also has a quick release clip, in case of emergencies. 

To switch the trimmer on, you have to push and hold the safety button from either side, then press the trigger to operate. The first four pages of the operation manual booklet offer safety advice, which I recommend reading – especially if you are a beginner user (like me). 

My partner is quite a keen gardener but both of us lack time to give the garden the TLC it needs, as we both work and have two small children. As he has used hedge trimmers before, he came out to 'supervise' and gave me some guidance on how far back I should be cutting. 

The operation manual gives tips on best practice which is really helpful if you don't know how to trim a hedge. Gtech recommends cutting with either a side-to-side motion or up and down, done easily with the double-sided blade. It also tells you to move slowly and steadily, so stems are fed directly into the blade and to cut the sides of hedges first, then the top. With this in mind, I started on the bushes that were overhanging our garden from the neighbors’ side. 

The head on the hedge trimmer is adjustable, so when standing to the side of the bushes, I kept the head at 180° and used an up and down motion to cut through the stems of the overhanging branches. The hedge cutter sliced through the smaller branches with ease. Some of the thicker branches, I had to force a little, but it cut cleanly through after a couple of seconds. 

I then adjusted the head so it was at 135º to the handle. You do this by removing the battery first and ensuring the blade cover is on (for safety), then pressing down on the lever on the head whilst rotating the head at the same time. When the lever is released, it locks into place. This enabled me to face the hedges, with the blade parallel to them, and trim them using a side-to-side motion, which made it easy to cut evenly. 

Finally I rotated the head in the opposite direction, with the blade end pointing towards the hedges. Holding the handle upright, it enabled me to trim the tops of the hedges. I’m only 5ft4, but I could reach the tops of the hedges easily, as the reach is extensive and can cut hedges up to 10 feet tall. 

I made my way down the fence lines, following all of the steps above, until I had finished. This took about 40 minutes and the battery still had a bar of life in it. After putting the discarded branches in our compost and green bin, the garden was looking a lot tidier and I was pleased with my work.

Ease of use

Once the Gtech Cordless Hedge Trimmer HT50 is set up and the harness is adjusted, it is very easy to use. Unlike corded machines, the lack of cord makes moving around the garden simple and there’s no faffing around with extension cables or sockets either, which saves time. I was able to do all of the bushes and hedges in one go, without having to change batteries, or wait for a battery to charge. It also doesn't kick out the noise or stink of a petrol trimmer.

Weighing just 2.94kg, I also found that I didn’t struggle carrying the hedge trimmer, or keeping it aloft for the amount of time I was trimming. The shoulder strap helps to take some of the weight. I also found that the HT50 was very well balanced, with weight distributed evenly down the tool, making it easy to control and use for a long period of time.

The only thing I did struggle with, was cutting small hedges. As the handle is not telescopic, it’s difficult to do the sides of smaller hedges up close. As it is designed for long reach though, that was to be expected, though a telescopic model offers a bit more versatility.

• Thinking of adding to your shrubbery? See the best hedging plants in our guide.

Additional features

The Gtech Cordless Hedge Trimmer HT50 has a battery which is interchangeable with some of Gtech’s other garden tools, such as the grass trimmer. This means you can save money by purchasing just the tool, or you could keep one battery on charge whilst using the other one and then swap them over. 

The batteries themselves come with four LEDs to show how much charge they have left. All you need to do is press the button in the middle and a number of LEDs will light up to show you if there is enough battery to complete the task. When there is no power left, the final LED flashes for ten seconds, then goes out.  

For thicker branches, you have the option of purchasing a branch cutter attachment on the Gtech site. This cuts through branches up to 6cm in width. I would seriously consider purchasing this as it will add another level of versatility to the tool, enabling me to tackle more of the plants in my garden, with just one tool. 

The only thing I would like to see on this hedge trimmer is a telescopic handle, so you could do smaller hedges more easily, or maybe extend it higher. 

How does the Gtech HT50 Cordless Hedge Trimmer rate online?

I have rated the Gtech Cordless Hedge Trimmer HT50 five stars. As this was the first hedge trimmer I have used, I found it really easy to set up, simple to use and it did a really good job, in a short amount of time. I can’t fault it. It would be nice to have a telescopic handle, but for the bushes and hedges in our garden (and our neighbors'), it’s perfect.

Other reviewers rate the Gtech highly, with an average of 4.5 stars on Gtech's website. They agree that it’s easy to set up and use, with some commenting on how they no longer need to use ladders to cut their hedges. Some mention how excellent the battery life is and those with bigger gardens found it more than adequate. The only negative points are some found four hours too long to charge the battery when wanting to do a quick job and some echo my comments about the telescopic handle.

In terms of price, it is one of the more expensive hedge trimmers on the market, but for the ease of use, effectiveness and the fact you can interchange the batteries, I’d say it is worth the price. It has a good battery life – though not as long as the 75 to 105 minutes of the Husqvarna 115iHD45 cordless hedge trimmer we tested, but that model is more expensive.

About this review and our reviewer

Bethan Davis is a PR Officer from the West Midlands. She lives with her fiancé and two boys and with a busy family home, is always looking for tools to help keep their garden tidy in a fraction of the time. She tested the Gtech HT50 Cordless Hedge Trimmer in her garden this autumn. They have a mix of lower shrubs and higher hedges that can be hard to reach over the borders, giving her plenty of chances to use it.

The Husqvarna 115iHD45 cordless hedge trimmer bears all the quality hallmarks you’d expect from this highly respected brand. It delivers decent trimming power for domestic use in gardens big or small and, of course, the cordless operation makes it effortless to navigate around your borders and hedges. 

Two summers ago we planted a small L-shape privet hedge to act as a windbreak on our exposed lawn, which gets all the worst weather straight off of Dartmoor. It grew reasonably well but was starting to look a little straggly as summer progressed, so the arrival of the Husqvarna 115iHD45 cordless hedge trimmer was perfectly timed. 

Since there was still plenty of juice left in the battery once I was done with the privet and a few holly bushes and small firs around our garden, I then popped around to my mother-in-law’s garden and whipped her box hedging and some shrubs into shape, literally. 

Keep reading to discover how I, a complete hedge trimming novice, fared with the Husqvarna 115iHD45. And if you’re looking for more options, do check out our other top choices for the best hedge trimmer, too. 

Key product specs of the Husqvarna 115iHD45 cordless hedge trimmer

• Battery: 2Ah 36V Li-ion
• Battery duration: 75 to 105 minutes (approx)
• Charging time: 70 minutes
• Cutting Length: 45cm
• Tooth Spacing: 25mm
• Weight: 4.0kg
• Cutting Speed: 3000 cut/min
• Modes: Standard or ecoFirst 

First impressions of the Husqvarna 115iHD45 cordless hedge trimmer

In the comically shaped box is the hedge trimmer, battery, charger and instruction booklets. You can also buy the trimmer without the battery and charger, which would be useful if you already had them for other Husqvarna gardening tools. It is compatible with a range of Husqvarna products including pole saws, mowers, strimmers, leaf blowers and even a chainsaw. 

The hedge trimmer itself looks exactly as you might expect a medium-size domestic model to look, with two comfortable handles, solid body and blade protected in a durable casing. 

Getting started

I probably shouldn’t admit this when being commissioned to review a product, but I didn’t actually look at the instruction booklet before I started cutting, despite never having used a hedge trimmer in my life. I simply popped the battery on to charge – it arrives partially charged so took about half an hour to complete – and then slid it into the trimmer, took the blade cover off and pressed the Start/Stop button until the green LED illuminated. Then it’s just a case of holding down the power trigger safety lockout on the front handle, much like you would with the best cordless lawn mowers, before pressing the power trigger on the rear handle. A child could have worked it out. 

For the sake of this test, I have since given the instruction book a good read and discovered that I didn’t miss anything vital. It really is a very intuitive plug-and-play tool. However, if you do need the instructions, I can confirm they are very easy to follow and there is also some useful information regarding troubleshooting and maintenance that might come in handy in the future. 

Using the Husqvarna 115iHD45 cordless hedge trimmer

There are two options settings-wise, full power or eco mode. Next to the Start/Stop button is a second button with a green ‘e’ emblem, which, when pressed, reduces the power for a longer cutting time. Husqvarna calls this the savE mode, and it’s designed to be used when conditions do not call for full power. You’ll earn about 30 minutes extra trimming time and it’s ideal for young and/or well-maintained hedges that are more leafy than twiggy. 

Bearing in mind that this was my first attempt at hedge trimming, the less-than-perfect results in terms of sharp lines and straight levels are 100% user-error! In fact, I’d say the Husqvarna 115iHD45 hedge trimmer did a great job, despite my lack of experience in how to trim a hedge. It cut through our hedges and shrubs like butter, never stumbling or struggling. 

It is designed to blast through twig diameters of up to 25mm, which it did so ably and without pause over at my mother-in-law’s more mature gardens. When inspecting my efforts, my husband, a seasoned hedge-trimmer, was impressed by how it cut cleanly through thicker branches. He also noted that it didn’t break rather than cut when it came across clumpier masses, which is his worst bugbear apparently.

Battery life

I gave the battery two timed run-outs, one in standard mode and one on eco, using my watch as a timer (pausing whenever I shut off the power to move to a different area or give my arms a rest). 

In standard power mode, when I was cutting my mother-in-law’s much older, gnarlier hedges and shrubs it lasted a commendable 73 minutes, and in eco mode on our much younger hedges and leafier bushes, it lasted just shy of 105 minutes. 

In our garden I very nearly ran out of hedges to harass before I ran out of power in fact, which is a happy situation to be in. Charging takes 70 minutes, which is also pretty impressive stuff. I could stop for a leisurely Sunday lunch (or even get out the best lawn mower to tidy up the lawn) before returning to my trimming with fresh vigour. 

Possibly the only downside of this trimmer has nothing to do with the machine itself, but the charging unit. It’s a fiddly plug-in affair that doesn’t sit as neatly on the worktop as a nice docking station. 

How easy is it to use the Husqvarna 115iHD45 cordless hedge trimmer?

As already mentioned, operating the Husqvarna 115iHD45 hedge trimmer is super easy and it’s a pretty compact machine so I didn’t feel that it was hard to manoeuvre. The reach isn’t particularly long, but fortunately I didn’t have any high hedges to cut. 

I did find it harder to angle the trimmer when doing the tops – so on the horizontal rather than vertical plane – but mainly due to holding my arms at an unnatural shoulder height position. I imagine it would be a similar scenario for any hedge trimmer with the same chainsaw-esque two-handle design. 

Weight-wise, this is by no means a heavy hedge trimmer (4kg with the battery in) but my arms did tire after about 30 minutes or so. They were not so tired that I had to stop, but it was enough to feel it the next day! I would think an elderly or generally less-abled person would be able to use it perfectly easily in shorter bursts, especially if their hedges are under waist level and regularly maintained.

Additional features

There are few bells and whistles on the Husqvarna 115iHD45 hedge trimmer, but my husband did point out that it has an excellent anti-vibration system. He has had experiences with hedge trimmers that could rival a pneumatic drill on that score, whereas this model feels very smooth in use. 

I particularly liked the eco mode for its noise-reducing capacity, being somewhat sound sensitive (or intolerant). Anyone with near neighbours will appreciate the low-key noise levels of this hedge trimmer, too. 

I also liked the power level indicator on the battery. This simple feature is handy when charging and also in use as it helps you decide whether you have time remaining to start the next hedge. Nobody needs a partially trimmed bush. Finally, a small point (or not) in the 115iHD45’s favour is the inclusion of a tip protector, which reduces accidental damage to garden fences and garden paths while enthusiastically trimming away. 

How does the Husqvarna 115iHD45 cordless hedge trimmer rate? 

The only customer reviews I can find online are in German. Although I don’t speak the lingo, the star ratings – 4.8 stars on Google and 4.6 stars on Amazon (both out of 5 stars) – are universally recognised as impressive. 

With a little assistance from Babelfish, I discovered German owners found it easy to handle, lightweight and suitable for intensive domestic use, possibly even commercial for up to 90 minutes use. 

About our review – and reviewer

Linda Clayton has been an interiors journalist for 20 years, giving her expert design advice for the likes of Gardeningetc, Homes & Gardens, Livingetc, Ideal Home and Real Homes ever since.  

She currently lives in Devon with her husband and two children, and recently renovated and extended the house. The property was previously a commercial nursery and boasts a half-acre plot, giving her plenty of space to road test the latest garden tools. 

As with all our reviews, the Husqvarna 115iHD45 cordless hedge trimmer was tested first-hand in Linda's garden, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The product was given to us free of charge and we tested it for as long as possible. 

If you’re lucky enough to have a big lawn, you’ll be unlucky enough to know how long they take to mow. Until recently robotic mowers with the manpower (or rather robot power) to tackle anything beyond 500sqm would cost more than your average family car. Cheaper to get a gardener. 

We’re not saying the Husqvarna Automower 415x’s price tag is small change, but it can tackle up to 1,500sqm lawns and is absolutely rammed with top-notch features. We’re talking GPS-assisted navigation (to ensure even cutting, automatically), app-based remote control, blade height adjustment, GPS theft tracking and loads more. It even has headlights so can run through the night, not when you’re using the garden. And, once installed, you can look forward to enjoying those six or more hours per week previously spent toiling over a hot mower. Best of all? No more mowing-dread at the end of a busy day or putting the chore off in the certain knowledge the task will be twice as hard (and the mower will clog endlessly) the next day. Living the dream! 

We tested the Husqvarna Automower 415x for five weeks in peak mowing season (Aug/Sept) on a less than perfect, lumpy lawn measuring around 1,000sqm with fairly mild gradients and one section where it drops off like a cliff edge. Items for the Husqvarna Automower 415x to navigate around included a small hedge, swing set, trampoline and picnic table. Find out if it's made our list of the best robot lawn mowers.  

• Buy now: Husqvarna Automower 415x from £2,199 on Husqvarna

Husqvarna Automower 415x key product specifications

• Lawn size: Medium-Large (up to 1,500sqm)
• Battery: 2.0Ah Lithium Ion
• Drive type: Automatic
• Cutting width: 41cm
• Cutting height: 20-50mm 
• Charge time: 60mins
• Mowing time: 50mins
• Weight: 9.7kg 
• Warranty: Two years

First impressions of the Husqvarna Automower 415x

This is a rugged-looking mower with big, grippy wheels and a robust bumper. It’s easy to pick up and carry, and the flap that covers the controls feels reassuringly solid. The packaging is easy to manhandle – it’s a good idea to keep it for winter storage – and contains the charging station base, extra blades, 10m of low voltage cable and battery pack. It does NOT contain any boundary wire or pegs – these are sold separately to suit your lawn dimensions.

Getting started

We’re not going to lie, set up isn’t easy, but you’ll go through a similarly arduous process for any robot lawn mower contained by boundary wire (which is currently the vast majority). The good news is that it’s the last couple hours of physical labour you’ll ever need to put into cutting your lawn. OK, make that four hours, which is how long it took to peg boundary wire around the full perimeter of the lawn, on hands and knees, and set everything up. There was no need to wire around the swings or trampoline as the Husqvarna Automower 415x’s strong bumper can handle a few minor obstacles. 

The process starts with setting up the base station/charging dock, which comes with a decent 10m of cable to allow reasonable positioning options from an outside socket. Next, we popped the Husqvarna Automower 415x on its base to begin charging while the boundary wires were laid. You can dig the wire in but pegging with a mallet seems the easier option and the wire soon works its way into the ground, so you won’t see it for long.

The instruction manual gives recommended distances to lay the wire from different obstacles (solid wall, level path etc) and a handy cardboard ruler is included to help get it right. The boundary wire is then joined into the back of the base unit. There’s also a guide wire to lay down, which helps bring the mower home, should GPS fail for any reason. The instructions were easy enough to follow but you can also do a search for installation videos on YouTube that explain it all far more visually.

Once the basic settings (language, date, time, pin code) are entered on the Husqvarna Automower 415x’s touch screen panel, you simply download and pair the Automower Connect App on your phone or tablet (Apple and Android). Amazingly this last step worked first time, with none of the all-too-familiar ‘cannot pair’ or buffering pain of home tech.

One tip for installation: do mow your lawn as short as possible to get the boundary wires as close to the ground as possible and give the mower a head start!

What it’s like to use the Husqvarna Automower 415x

The brilliance of Husqvarna’s Automower Connect App really comes into play during use. You can make it as simple as 'park' or 'start' or set up a different mowing schedule for every day of the week. All of the App’s functionality can also be achieved on the actual mower’s display panel of course, but why would you bother when it can be done from the comfort of your sofa/bed/the beach? We have solar panels so decided to set a mowing schedule that starts at sunrise and ends at sunset, making the most of the free electricity. 

Ease of use

A mower that works out the most efficient ways for how to mow a lawn and then does all the mowing for you is the dream, and this is 100% true of the Husqvarna Automower 415x. However, it did take a week or three to properly get to grip with all the settings and tweak the boundary wire, several times, before we could sit back and enjoy complete mowing freedom. 

Despite following the guidance on wire placement to the letter, or rather centimeter, the Husqvarna Automower 415x managed to break out on several occasions. Each time sending a text to alert us of its errant behavior. Its main escape route was at the bottom of the mildly sloping lawn, but only if approaching the wire head-on; at an angle it was fine. 

The solution involved repegging the wire a few centimeters in and adjusting the ‘drive past wire’ setting to its lowest distance (25cm). One day, while on holiday, we got an alarming text telling us the mower was upside down. Somehow it had busted over the boundary wire and plummeted off the edge of the lawn’s highest point, lemming style, landing on its back. Luckily our house-sitter came to the rescue, popped it back on its wheels and reset the PIN code, no damage done. Phew. We couldn’t fathom why the suicide attempt occurred (the boundary wire was well away from the edge) and thankfully it didn’t happen again. 

Settings-wise, we worked out that level six was the best height to keep our lawn neatly cut but not scalped, and we also set the weather timer, which automatically adjusts cutting time according to how much the grass grows. One of the most useful settings dictates how the mower comes into base if the GPS fails. This took a bit of trial and error before we stopped getting ‘charging station blocked’ alerts but success felt so good.

The other part that requires trial and error is settling on the best mowing schedule. Initially we thought 9am-5pm would work, but actually the Husqvarna Automower 415x needed longer so we upped it to 6am-9pm and it coped a whole lot better. For bigger lawns, you may need to keep the mower running overnight. Not a problem thanks to its bright LED headlights. Oh, and cleaning is super easy too; just hose down the underside every couple of weeks to stop excessive grass build-up.

There's plenty more advice on how does robot lawn mower work in our dedicated guide too. 

Additional features of the Husqvarna Automower 415x

The Husqvarna Automower 415x comes with many, many cool features; here are a few of our favorites. 

• Security This mower can’t be stolen, or it can but the minute it’s outside the premises a high frequency alarm will go off that can only be restarted with your PIN code, plus it has GPS tracking so any thieves won’t get far.
• Frost guard Adjusts the cutting schedule according to temperature to prevent damage caused by mowing frosty grass.
• Spiral cutting The mower automatically detects areas of longer grass and starts spiraling instead of zig-zagging until the errant patch is sorted (mesmerizing to watch!).
• Quietness The Husqvarna Automower 415x is virtually silent, which is a big plus if you have hyperacusis (a condition when everyday sounds seem louder than they should), and it could easily run overnight without disturbing the neighbors.
• Spot cutting Brilliant for under the patio table (which needs to be moved out of the way). Just pop the mower in position and press Spot cutting mode on the menu. Once done it carries on with its usual schedule. Clever stuff. 

How does the Husqvarna Automower 415x rate? 

This is a new model for 2021 so the only online reviews are in German and French, but they are very enthusiastic! The app-control is particularly welcome, and one customer said it worked on his lawn that’s much bigger than the 1,500sqm recommended. Approval of the Husqvarna Automower 415x’s quietness and efficiency also came up repeatedly. 

In terms of the end results – the most important information any purchaser needs – the Husqvarna Automower 415x passes with flying colors, and is definitely in the mix  with some of the best lawn mowers. Despite traversing our lawn in seemingly random zig-zags, this little robot obviously knows where it’s going (hurray for GPS) because it cuts with impressive evenness. The grass also looks lusher and greener than it ever has before. This is presumably down to the Husqvarna Automower 415x’s mulching skills, and possibly all the summer showers we’ve had this year. 

Success around the edges of the lawn has been a bit hit and miss, particularly after we had to reduce the boundary line settings to stop escape-artist tendencies. However, we have to strim the path edges and around the tree when mowing with our regular Ride On, so life hasn’t changed on that score. Perhaps Husqvarna could invent a robot edge-strimmer next? 

• Buy now: Husqvarna Automower 415x from £2,199 on Husqvarna

About our review – and reviewer

Linda Clayton has been an interiors journalist for 20 years. Since graduating from Cardiff’s School for Journalism, she's happily writing about the latest trends, product reviews and giving her expert design advice for the likes of Gardeningetc, Homes & Gardens, Livingetc, Ideal Home and Real Homes ever since.  

She currently lives in Devon with her husband and two children, and recently renovated and extended the house. The property was previously a commercial nursery and boasts a half-acre plot, giving her plenty of space to road test the latest lawn mowers, hot tubs and garden tools. 

As with all our reviews, the Husqvarna Automower 415x was tested first-hand in Linda's garden, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The product was given to us free of charge and we tested it for as long as possible. 

The Ryobi RPW120B High Pressure Cleaner is designed to clean vehicles, floors, facades and a number of other surfaces, removing stubborn dirt, with or without detergent. Featuring a powerful 1800W motor, onboard storage, spray nozzle wand and on-demand detergent option, its compact design makes it easy to transport and store away.

I have used several of the best pressure washers before, but never any tools from Ryobi and with a very reasonable price tag attached of just over £100, I was interested to see how this pressure washer compared against similar machines and those of a higher budget. 

I tested it over summer putting it up against a dirty car, paving, windows and many more items around my garden. 

Ryobi RPW120B High Pressure Cleaner specifications:

• Power type: 220–240V Mains
• Power: 1800W
• Max pressure: 120 bar
• Best for: small areas with stubborn dirt
• Hose length: 5m
• Weight: 10.13kg

First impressions of the Ryobi RPW120B Pressure Washer

The first thing I noticed was how light the box was, compared with the other pressure washers I’ve used. Upon opening the box, I was met with 10 unassembled parts, neatly packaged together. I was also pleasantly surprised (and relieved), to find that there was only one booklet with this pressure cleaner. In the past, I’ve had tools which come with four or five different bits of paper and I always think they should be more concise.

Getting started

I started by looking through the instruction manual (only 20 pages long) and noted that the assembly instructions were in the form of just illustrations. Once I had unwrapped all the parts from their cellophane, I started to put the machine together, seeing that I would need a cross-head screwdriver (no size provided). Assembly was really simple and involved pushing most of the parts onto the corresponding slots on the main body of the pressure cleaner. 

You attach the power cord holder and trigger handle holder first, by sliding them into place. You then attach the handle and hose handle together using four screws. Following that you push the handle onto the main body and insert two screws to secure it in place. This is the only hiccup I had with assembly, as I needed to get a longer screwdriver to reach the screws inside, plus the illustration is a bit unclear about which holes you have to insert the screws into. There are arrows pointing to two holes on the machine itself, but the illustrations make it seem as if one screw goes into the hole next to the marked one. I ended up having to use the light on my phone to look into the holes, to see which were vacant.

Once I’d attached the handle, I fit the spray wand to the trigger by simply twisting it together, then attached the high pressure hose to the fitting on the trigger and the other end to the main machine. I then screwed the water inlet filter on to the machine, ready for the garden hose to be attached. Assembly complete, I was pleased to see that it had only taken me ten minutes (two of which were looking for a longer screwdriver).

What is the Ryobi RPW120B High Pressure Cleaner like to use?

Once the machine is assembled, it’s just a matter of wheeling it out, attaching the hose and plugging it in. It comes on wheels and has a handle to easily transport it from shed to garden. It’s also very light, so can be carried down steps with no problems.

Once you’re in the area you want to work in, you simply slot your garden hose onto the water outlet port and turn the hose on. Next you expel any air that’s in the pipes by operating the lance without the power on. To operate the lance, you press the trigger handle lock, followed by squeezing the trigger. After about 30 seconds, water should be coming through consistently.

To start pressure washing, you slide the power switch on the main machine to ‘on’ and then squeeze the trigger. The instruction manual doesn’t offer any advice on how to clean different surfaces, but shows you by means of illustrations, how to operate the machine effectively. You control both the power of the jet and the width of the spray by twisting the relevant parts of the lance. Read our advice on how to use a pressure washer for more tips on getting started.

Stone floor areas
Our garden has quite a large patio, made up of slabs, stones and block paving. I had used our Karcher pressure washer a few months ago on the top level, but hadn’t got round to finishing the middle and lower sections. The pale slabs that make up the steps were covered in moss and black spots, plus there were weeds and grass growing in between. Our Karcher pressure washer came with a tool especially for patios and removed weeds, dirt and black spots quickly and easily. I was interested to see how the Ryobi lance would compare.

I started by setting the spray width to wide by twisting the very end of the lance in an anti-clockwise direction. I then set the pressure to medium, by twisting the section above until it was midway. I used the lance in a sweeping motion to remove loose dirt and debris. Next, I set the pressure at the highest level to start cleaning the block patio. Straight away I could see the stone changing colour, although I found that I had to hold the end of the lance quite close to the surface, to remove dirt effectively. To remove the moss, I changed the spray width to make it as narrow as it could go, which lifted the moss straight away. However, I found the lance wasn’t powerful enough to remove the grass and weeds from between the blocks.

Once I had finished the block paving, I moved on to the slabs, using high pressure and the wide spray. It was very aesthetically pleasing being able to see where I had and hadn’t cleaned. I switched to the narrow spray to remove the black spots of lichen, as the wide spray didn’t have any effect. This removed them perfectly, but I also found that it cut through more dirt which the wide spray hadn’t lifted, meaning I was left with a squiggly pattern from using the narrow nozzle.

I continued to do the block paving and steps, following my previous methods and then left it to dry to see the results. Overall, it took me about an hour and a half to do a fairly small section of my patio. Although the results were visible, compared to the top patio (which I’d used my Karcher pressure washer on), it wasn’t as clean and all the weeds and grass had stubbornly stayed put.

It’s important to note that you can purchase a surface cleaner tool for the Ryobi RPW120B pressure washer, especially for stone floor areas. It looks similar to the Karcher one, so I would hope that this would help cut the time it takes to clean the patio and would be more effective. You can also purchase detergent to help lift dirt on stone floor areas, so with the Ryobi’s in-built detergent dispenser, this may also assist in getting better results.

Cleaning Glass
The section of patio I cleaned is next to our garden office, which I now found covered in dirt that had been disturbed by the pressure washer. As I have used a few pressure washers before, sometimes the instructions recommend using lower pressure to clean glass. I switched the pressure to medium and used the lance to clean all the debris from the glass and surround of the bi-fold doors, which was quick and easy. I also used this setting to clean the timber, which was very effective – a little too effective as it started to strip the wood stain. I stopped to prevent creating a new job for myself, but it did show that you could use the pressure washer for cleaning wooden decking.

Cleaning the car
I very rarely clean my car, my excuse being it’s difficult to find the time with two children under the age of five. Plus, it’s gun-metal grey, so doesn’t show up the dirt too badly. However, it was in need of a good clean, especially as some passing birds had used it as a toilet, so this offered the perfect opportunity to test the Ryobi RPW120B High Pressure Cleaner on its effectiveness of car cleaning.

Although the instruction book offers little advice on how to use the pressure washer for cleaning different surfaces, it does point out in the safety warnings to not use the high-pressure jet on the tyres and to keep a distance of 30cm. With this in mind, I set the nozzle to wide and with medium pressure, rinsed my car from top to bottom. 

I then got to test the automatic detergent function, as we had a bottle of car shampoo. Following the ratios on the shampoo instructions, I removed the soap dispenser, filled it with water and shampoo, then fitted it back into place on the machine. I then turned the water jet pressure to the lowest setting and squeezed the trigger. This dispenses suds, which I sprayed all over my car and then left a minute or two to settle. I then used a sponge to work in the detergent. Without having to remove the soap dispenser, I then turned the pressure back to medium and rinsed the car all over, using slightly higher pressure on tougher spots around the front grill. It took about 20 minutes in total to clean my car (a mid-size SUV).

After leaving my car to dry, I went out to inspect the results. It was noticeably cleaner and had left the windows and bonnet gleaming. However, I did find that there was still a dirty residue on some parts of my car and it hadn’t removed some of the stubborn dirt on the number plate and metal work. The bird poo had disappeared though and for a 20-minute job, I was pleased with the results.

You can purchase a wash brush which is used for the effective cleaning of cars, bikes and other vehicles. This might help lift the dirt more effectively and you can use it to distribute detergent too.

Cleaning other objects
In addition to stonework, glass and vehicles, the Ryobi RPW120B pressure washer instruction manual claims that it can also be used to clean machines, buildings, floors, facades, terraces and concrete walkways. We have recently purchased some family bikes, so I would definitely consider using the Ryobi to hose these down if they got muddy.

Ease of use

As I own a pressure washer and have used other pressure washers in the past, I found the Ryobi RPW120B pressure washer very easy to use. I do think that if you were new to pressure washing, some more written instructions would be helpful, such as what setting to use the pressure washer on for different surfaces.

It’s great that you can vary the pressure and the spray width all using the same lance and the automatic soap dispenser is a great feature which saves you from fiddling around with buckets and sponges, or extra accessories.

The one thing I did find tricky was when it came to putting the pressure washer away. The instructions give advice on what to do, but when it came to winding in the hose, this was very tricky as I had to twist it and coil it in a certain way as I was wrapping it up. This took me a good five minutes before it was neat enough to place on the integrated hose handle. I found myself wishing it had an integrated hose reel instead. However, once sorted, the hose was packed away more neatly than some other pressure washers I have tried, taking up little space in my garage.

The other aspect that had me stumped was a small metal tool, attached to back of the instructions. Nowhere in the instructions does it explain what this tool is for. It was only after sending a picture of it to my family WhatsApp group, that I got the answer from my sister – a nozzle cleaner. It would have been useful if the instructions included the use of this, as otherwise I might have thrown it away.

Additional features

As well as the integrated hose handle, the Ryobi RPW120B High Pressure Cleaner also has a rack to store the lance and a hook for the power cord, meaning everything can be tidied away and stored neatly, saving room in your shed. It’s also very compact, light and the wheels and handle make transporting it from job to job, a breeze.

The integrated detergent function is another bonus and the 1800W motor, providing 120 bar of maximum water pressure, makes this little machine very powerful.

There are a number of tools you can purchase to complement your cleaning, including a turbo nozzle, spray nozzle, wash brush and surface cleaner. You can also buy a compatible adapter for use with Karcher pressure cleaner accessories, which is mentioned in the instruction booklet. It can seem like a lot of extra stuff to buy to make the pressure washer tackle jobs more easily, but as the unit is a low price point to start with, you can level up without too much outlay.

How does the Ryobi RPW120B rate?

I have rated the Ryobi RPW120B High Pressure Cleaner four stars due to how easy it was to assemble and use, plus how effective and powerful it is for the price – it's very good value for money.

Most reviewers agree and rate it four or five stars. They comment on its affordability, how light it is and how powerful it is, with some preferring this machine to the more expensive Karcher models. I actually gave it the same rating at the Karcher K5 Power Control Pressure Washer I reviewed which is over twice the price. The Ryobi doesn't feel as sturdy, but car cleaning and accessories were comparable – though the K5 comes with app-guided cleaning for better results.

Those who have given the Ryobi RPW120B a low rating have had issues with some of the parts being a bit flimsy and breaking, or have had problems with the machine leaking. A few have also commented that the machine is quite noisy, compared to other pressure washers. 

Overall, I would recommend this pressure washer to those who are looking for a small and compact machine, which is effective, but a decent price. It may not be suitable for large stone areas with just what’s in the box, but with the option of purchasing additional accessories, it would be an ideal tool to add to any gardening arsenal.

About this review and our reviewer

Bethan Davis is a PR Officer in the tourism industry. She lives in the West Midlands with her fiancé and two sons. With both under the age of five, she is always looking for ways to keep their family garden neat, safe and tidy with ease, so was happy to give this pressure washer a go. She tested it for a couple of weeks this summer on various garden and outdoor cleaning tasks. 

As soon as the sun makes an appearance in Britain, it brings with it a surge of people rushing to the shops to purchase barbecue food. My family are no different and it’s safe to say that my partner would barbecue all our meals if he could! We have been looking for a gas barbecue for a while now, to replace an old, rusty, but well-used kadai, so we were thrilled when the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S Barbecue appeared on our doorstep.

We have lived in our current house for just over a year, but have not had the chance to host more than a handful of people outside. We decided to give the barbecue a really good first test, with a gathering of 20 people – kids, adults, picky eaters and vegetarians!

I was interested to see if we could comfortably cater for this many people, how quickly we could serve the food and if there was enough room to keep the meat away from the vegetarian options. I was also hoping that with the Campingaz InstaClean Aqua System, I would save time clearing up, when I’m usually having to scrub grill pans and trays. The verdict? This is one of the best BBQs you can buy, although assembly is a struggle. 

Campingaz 4 Series Premium S: specs

• Fuel type: Gas
• Burners: 4 main and 1 side burner 
• Dimensions: 64 x 135 x 119cm (closed) 
• Weight: 66kg
• Assembly time: 3 hours
• Grill surface: 46 x 72cm
• Extras: Side burner, warming racks, utensil hooks, side table, InstaClean Aqua pro technology, grease drip trays.

Getting started

The weekend after we received the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S BBQ, I arrived home to find my partner and two kids in our lounge, surrounded by bits of barbecue. Eager to try it out, he had decided to attempt to put it together on his own, whilst supervising our pre-schooler and 10-month-old.

So needless, to say, he was a bit flustered, but had managed to put it together on his own, although the assembly instructions do recommend using two people for some steps.

Unlike some manuals, the instructions don’t give an indication of how long it would take to assemble the barbecue, but it is broken down in to 28 steps. These are in the form of quite detailed illustrations, with each new part to be added, highlighted in red. You start by constructing the frame and then build the rest on top, finishing with the cleaning accessories and my partner found the instructions easy to follow and said they were clear and concise. He did however find that some of the screws were challenging to align and screw in. This made assembly more challenging and time-consuming than he first thought.

It took him the whole afternoon to put the barbecue together, but that was with breaks to attend to the children. He believes that if he had just been focussed on that task, it would have taken him about three hours. He found it easy enough to assemble on his own, but did say that if I’d have been doing it, I may have needed some help when it came to lifting and aligning some of the heavier parts. (I didn’t take offence to this as he is a 6ft 4 burly bloke and I often have to ask for his help with heavy items!).

What is the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S like to use?

The gas BBQ comes on four rubberised castors, which makes moving it very easy. Between the two of us, we wheeled it through our lounge and out through the patio doors. It is quite heavy, but it feels very sturdy and everything fits together snuggly.

Even the best gas BBQ doesn't come with its own gas cyclinder, so we had to source this from our local B&Q, along with a regulator and gas hose. The gas was easy enough to connect and all we had to do was push the hose on to the circular connector provided and tighten the clamp with a screwdriver. We also needed to insert a battery (provided), to power the ignition. The last step was to fill the two water trays which are located below the grill. These are part of the InstaClean system, so it’s not essential to use them to operate the grill, but is recommended to help with easy cleaning later. Following these last few steps, the barbecue was now ready to use.

Cooking on the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S gas BBQ

When using the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S Barbecue for the first time, the instructions recommend heating it up with all its burners on the full flow position, with the lid closed for about 30 minutes. This eliminates any odours if there is residual coating on the new parts.

To light the barbecue, you open the gas valve and like a gas cooker, turn the control knobs to full flow and press the ignition. This makes a clicking sound and the burner should light straight away, or after a few seconds. As this was the first time cooking, we left the barbecue for the suggested 30 minutes and then started to cook.

As we were cooking for some vegetarians, we found that the grilling space was more than adequate to keep the meat and vegetarian items separate. We cooked all of our favourite BBQ recipes, so burgers, sausages, halloumi, veggie burgers, veggie sausages and corn on the cob. 

A handy feature of the Campingaz Series 4 Premium S, it that it has a large warming rack above the grill, so as soon as the food was ready, it could be kept warm until our guests were ready to eat (or come back for seconds!). This can also be used as an additional grilling area when using the barbecue with the lid closed, like an oven.

As well as the main grill, the barbecue also has a side burner, much like a gas hob, on which a saucepan or small frying pan can be placed, to cook additional items. This is lit in the same way as the main burners. We found that this was perfect for frying onions, which we would normally have cooked inside beforehand. It was great being able to cook everything outside and a lot more convenient.

We managed to cook everything in two rounds, filling and emptying the main grill pans. There is room to cook about 30 burgers on the grill pans, whilst keeping the same number of sausages warm on the warming racks.

Cooking results

The Campingaz 4 Series Premium S boasts that it uses its ‘Blue Flame’ power system to keep food juicy and crispy. This works by generating delicate water evaporation from the water drawers below the grill, which helps to keep food succulent as well as gaining the crispiness you’d expect from barbecued food.

I must admit that the burgers especially tasted a lot better than when we’ve cooked them on the kadai. We also found that we didn’t overcook items, or char them on the outside to find them still pink in the middle, like you can often do with sausages on a charcoal BBQ. The only criticism my partner had was that he missed the smoky flavour you get from cooking on charcoal.

Cleaning the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S

The worst part of cooking outdoors is usually working out how to clean a BBQ quickly and efficiently, especially if you’ve played host to a group of people. Grill pans are usually one of the worst items to try and clean, as the grease is usually baked on and it takes a good deal of time and effort to get them sparkling again. Campingaz uses its patented InstaClean Aqua technology, to make cleaning 'a piece of cake'.

By filling the grease drawers with water before cooking, any residual food waste and grease is captured by the drawers, reducing risk of flare-ups and grease being baked on to the material. A small amount of water evaporates from the drawers during cooking, which also acts as a grease repellent. Campingaz claims that this means you do not need to scrub the grill parts, just rinse them in hot, soapy water. I was interested to see if this was true and just how much easier it was to clean than our kadai.

To start with you wait for the barbecue to cool down completely, then open the grease drawers until you reach the lock position. Help with this is shown in some illustrations in the instructions. You then open the door below, which has a cradle with a grease evacuation container fitted to the door. You remove the drain plug from the grease drawer by unscrewing it completely. The water then drains out into the container and the filter on top catches the blobs of grease and food residue. You then simply empty the containers and dispose responsibly of the grease and food. The grease drawers can be completely removed if you need to clean them more thoroughly and you can use sand in them instead of water if you wish.

When it came to cleaning the grill pan, I sadly realised that this is not one of the ‘grill parts’ that can be cleaned using just soap and water, without scrubbing. The grill parts are the InstaClean elements that surround the burners. These are simply lifted out and do clean easily with soap and water. The grill pans require a stainless-steel barbecue brush, but can be placed in the dishwasher, or left to soak in soapy water. For stubborn grease, the instructions recommend a mix of white vinegar and water.

Additional features of the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S

The Campingaz 4 Series Premium S already comes with a host of features that make it stand out from your conventional charcoal barbecue and even similar gas barbecues. The Blue Flame power system is designed to offer accelerated pre-heating, whilst keeping the heat distributed evenly, ensuring significantly fewer flare ups. The burners are protected by the cast iron grids, which prevent juices and hot grease from collecting, which can result in an increase of the risk of flames. The water from the trays also assists with this, overall making grilling safer and easier.

In terms of storage, the barbecue has a Push2Fold side table to make the barbecue smaller in width. A simple push of a lever underneath the table, folds it down, whilst lifting it up locks it firmly back in place. The side burner does not fold down, but has a cover which you push to open and close. It has two steel doors underneath the grilling space where you can neatly store the gas cylinder and hooks for any utensils or accessories. A downside of the barbecue is that it does not come with a cover, so if you want to keep it protected and free from rain water, you will need to purchase a tailored cover from a Campingaz retailer. We haven’t bought a cover yet and noticed that the water trays do get full, following heavy rain.

There are a number of interchangeable accessories you can purchase to make cooking on the barbecue more versatile. These include a rotisserie, pizza stone, cast iron wok, paella skillet, or plancha griddle, (which after googling I found is a thick slab of cast iron, for cooking delicate foods such as scallops and asparagus). You can also purchase premium utensils, brushes, BBQ cleaners and stainless-steel cleaners.

Should you buy the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S?

We are really impressed with the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S Barbecue, so have rated it 4 and a half stars. It lost half a star due to it taking so long to assemble and the fact that we had to purchase extra items such as the regulator and hose. It’s easy to use, sturdy and the food tasted great. The InstaClean system is also such a simple but effective idea, cutting the time it usually takes to clean up.

Most other reviewers rate the barbecue highly, also averaging about four and a half stars. They agree that it takes a good deal of time to assemble, with some disappointed that it doesn’t come already assembled. But all agree that once it’s ready, it works well, it’s a good, solid unit and that the price tag reflects the quality of the BBQ.

In terms of price, it is expensive, but it does reflect the overall quality of the model and the size. The fact that we could cook easily for a large group of people, who all thoroughly enjoyed the food, makes the price tag worth it.

We would recommend the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S BBQ to anyone looking to switch to a gas BBQ and are hoping to purchase some of the accessories, so we can dine alfresco more often.

About this review and our reviewer

Bethan Davis is a PR Officer working in the tourism industry who lives with her fiancé and two small children. Her other half loves a barbecue dinner and was particularly excited to see how this premium gas model compares to his more rustic charcoal kadai.

As with all our reviews, the Campingaz 4 Series Premium S gas barbecue has been tested first-hand in her garden over a number of weeks, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand, unless we are able to keep them. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time.

The Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart barbecue is a serious piece of kit. If you’re looking for a small BBQ for grilling a few burgers and sausages every now and again, this is not the buy for you. If, however, you love grilling alfresco on a regular basis and want to take your grilling game to the next level you’d be hard pushed to find a better way to wow friends and family than cooking up a storm on this brilliant buy.

With three gas burners, a warming rack and a handy side burner, the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart BBQ can easily handle anything you throw it at it. From slow cooked joints of meat that you cook for several hours and perfectly seared steaks done in a flash to tasty fish or vegetable kebabs or even delicious desserts, this best BBQ can cater for all of your grilling needs.

What's more, thanks to the built-in Weber Smart Connect technology, you don't have to worry about over or under cooking your food either, as you can receive alerts on your phone or the BBQ to let you know when everything is cooked to perfection. It's this temperature monitoring device built into the left side table that gives this grill an extra edge. 

Although I love the authentic experience and taste you get when cooking on a charcoal BBQ, I've always been a fan of gas BBQs, primarily thanks to their ease of use. There's no need to worry about lighting fuel and waiting for the coals to get hot enough before you can start cooking. 

We regularly cook on a two-burner gas BBQ that we've had for several years, but I've never used a gas BBQ with smart technology before. For that reason alone, I was keen to see if the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart grill would make a difference to my grilling experience and guarantee itself a spot on our best gas BBQ list. 

Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart barbecue: key product specifications

• Fuel type: Liquid petroleum gas
• Number of burners: 3 stainless-steel burners, 39,000 BTU output
• Sear zone burner: 9,000 BTU
• Side burner: 12,000 BTU
• Dimensions (with lid closed): H120 x W150 x D74cm / H47 x W59 x D29"
• Weight: 84.8kg
• Materials: Porcelain enamelled lid, stainless steel side tables, painted steel doors 
• Primary cooking area: 68 x 48 cm (3264cm2 or 513 square inches)
• Total cooking area: 4254cm2 / 669 square inches
• Side tables: 2
• Meat probes included: 1
• Batteries required: 10
• Warranty: 10 years (3 years for electronics)

First impressions of the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart barbecue

The first thing I couldn’t fail to notice about the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart grill is it’s huge. And very heavy! The BBQ was delivered in a large box and swiftly deposited on my driveway on a pallet. Then came the task of getting it down my driveway and into the garden. I definitely couldn’t move the box on my own, so needed to call in reinforcements (my husband) for some extra muscle power. However, even with two of us we couldn’t lift the box, and ended up manoeuvring it onto a large heavy-duty skip bag we had in the garage and then dragging the box through to the garden. 

This is something you will want to consider when ordering this BBQ, as you’ll need two (or even possibly three) people to get it into the garden or yard – unless the generous delivery people will do that for you of course.

Once I’d opened the box, the second thing I noticed was just how many parts there are. A quick look at the manual revealed there are 72 stages to building the BBQ, so it's no surprise there were so many different boxes to open! 

As soon as I opened the first packages inside the main box, however, it became clear what a serious piece of kit this is. The materials felt sturdy and good quality, and you realize this is an investment buy that is designed to last for many years, all of which is backed up by Weber's impressive 10-year warranty.

Getting started

Time to get cracking on the 72 stages of the build! I’ll be upfront here and admit that I wasn't very organized when it came to building the grill. I’d advise trying to do it on a dry day if you don’t have a covered patio and allow yourself at least a couple of hours to put it together. 

On the day I built this one with my husband, there were rain showers so we had to keep covering up all the boxes to keep everything dry. Plus, we had two kids constantly pestering us for snacks and a 6-month old puppy that wanted to eat/destroy/hide all the parts and packaging. If you don’t have any of those distractions then chances are you’ll be faster at building it than we were! 

We actually ended up building it over two weekends because of the poor weather, and it probably took us around 4 hours from first unpacking the box to having it fully assembled.

Although assembling the BBQ is quite a lengthy process it’s relatively straightforward if there are two of you working together. The diagrams in the manual are easy to follow and I didn’t have any problems understanding what part or fixing needed to go where. 

The only issue I found is that that because there are so many packages inside the main box, you pretty much have to unpack and unwrap everything to find all the parts. Hence my suggestion of ensuring it’s a dry day and that you have plenty of space to work in. 

Once the main frame of the BBQ is built, you start the wiring and controls for the smart technology (more on that later), before adding things like the burners and the hood. The materials are heavy-duty (you'll ideally need two of you to lift the hood into place) but there's no doubt when you're assembling the BBQ that this is a durable, well-made piece of kit that will be able to withstand all weathers. 

What's it like to use the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart barbecue? 

Thanks to Weber's Infinity ignition, lighting the burners is super easy and so far I've found they always light first time. The grill is quick to heat up (much quicker than previous gas BBQs I've used) and I found it was ready to cook on within 10-15 minutes. 

The angled stainless-steel Flavorizer bars are key to achieving the perfect smokey BBQ flavor we all love. They catch the fat drippings to create the smoke for flavoring your food. So there's no worries about missing out on the smokey flavor you get with a charcoal BBQ here. Plus, any excess fat drains down beneath the grill into a drip tray, which can be emptied or replaced when required. It means there's less risk of flare-ups (upsurges of flames caused by dripping fat) which can be both dangerous and have an impact on the taste of your food. 

Just as with any BBQ, cooking BBQ recipes such as burgers and sausages is pretty straightforward on the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart BBQ, but if that's all you stick to then you'll be missing a trick with this top-of-the-range grill. Where it really comes into its own is with bigger cuts of meat, such as whole roasted chickens, perfectly seared steaks or large slow-cooked joints of meat. 

Cooking on the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart barbecue

First on the menu was a single rib of beef. I like my steak medium rare and have always found it can be tricky to get it spot on when cooking on a BBQ. No such problem thanks to the smart technology on the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart grill. 

Using the Weber Connect app I synced my phone to the BBQ. In the app, I then selected the type of meat I wanted to cook. Within the red meat section for example, there are 17 different types of cuts of beef to choose from. You simply find the one you are cooking (or the nearest match), select it and add in details such as the thickness of the steak and how you want it cooked so it can tailor the instructions to your specific steak. You then follow the instructions as the app takes you through how to prepare the meat, what temperature to set the grill, how to insert the meat temperature probe (there's handy videos to illustrate all of this), where to place the meat on the grill and whether to have the lid open or closed. 

The app then monitors the internal temperature of the meat via the probe and sends you an alert telling you when to flip the steak and then when to remove it from the BBQ to rest it. 

While at first this might sound like a lot of extra work to cook a steak, it's actually really quick and easy to do (especially once you have the hang of it), plus it takes away all of the guesswork that's often involved when trying to cook a steak perfectly. After all, there's nothing worse than spending a decent amount of money on a good-quality steak only to ruin it by overcooking it on the grill. 

I'll admit that I was initially dubious as to how accurate it would be cooking a steak this way, but I'm happy to say I was proved completely wrong. I made sure I followed the alerts on the app and the steak was cooked perfectly, exactly how I like it. The Sear Zone on the grill creates a high heat on the cooking grate to quickly add sear marks to your food for that restaurant-quality feel at home too. 

One thing worth noting is that there are two ports in the temperature monitoring device, so you can cook and monitor different cuts of meat at the same time. The BBQ only comes with one probe as standard, however, so you'll need to buy an additional probe if you want to be using two at the same time. Considering the cost of the BBQ, however, I do think it should be supplied with two as standard. 

Next up was chicken. On the app there's options for cooking everything from thighs to breasts and even a whole chicken. Within the poultry section, it even tells you how to BBQ a turkey on the grill - so that's your cooking sorted for Thanksgiving or Christmas Day too! 

On this occasion we opted to butterfly (spatchcock) the chicken as we wanted it to cook quicker. We didn't use the meat probe for this one as it was easy to check when the chicken was thoroughly cooked. 

Just like the steak, it grilled beautifully and the meat was juicy and flavorsome with a great smokey BBQ taste.  

Alongside the chicken, I also cooked several other dishes on the grill. I parboiled small new potatoes and then roasted them on the grill with a bit of oil, for roughly 25-40 minutes depending on the size of the potatoes. I can confirm they smelled and tasted delicious! 

I also cooked a range of vegetables, such as sweet corn, peppers and purple sprouting broccoli. Cooking an entire meal for 8 people on the grill was no problem thanks to the impressively large cooking area. With so much space to play with, it means you can sear meat in one section while roasting vegetables on a different part of the grill. Plus, the large warming rack keeps everything hot until it's ready to be served. 

Cooking larger joints of meat on the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS gas BBQ

Keen to test how the BBQ would fare with some longer cooking times, I opted for a whole pork shoulder for our next BBQ party so we could serve slow cooked pulled pork to 12 guests. The pork joint weighed just under 3kg (6.6lbs) and I got the butcher to remove the bone and tie it up to make it easier to cook. My husband then added a BBQ rub all over the outside of the joint of meat before we got it on the BBQ. This time, I used the meat probe again, inserting it into the middle of the joint for the most accurate reading during cooking. 

Having already checked the cooking times on the Weber Connect app, I knew this was going to take around 8-10 hours, and this included the necessary resting time at the end. With this in mind, I got it on nice and early at 7am to ensure it would be ready for our late-afternoon BBQ. 

With the meat probe in place, I placed the pork joint in the centre of the grill and used the indirect heat setup to start cooking it. This means you only use the burners at one or both sides of the grill and leave the central burner switched off, so that the food sits over the unlit part on the cooking grate. Placing large cuts of meat that need a longer cooking time directly over the heat would dry them out and burn them. With everything in place, I simply closed the lid and left the BBQ to work its magic. 

Part way through cooking, the instructions advised wrapping the meat in aluminium foil before replacing it back on the grill for the remainder of the cooking time. This helps to retain all the cooking juices and ensure the meat doesn't dry out. 

The beauty of the meat probe and the smart technology is you don't have to guess when it's the right time to do this is. I simply received an alert on my phone telling me to go to the next stage, and then another alert when the meat had reached the correct temperature telling me to take it off the grill and rest it before serving. The pork shredded beautifully, and it was brilliant to serve something different at one of our BBQs rather than the standard selection of BBQ food. 

I've since cooked a pork shoulder joint a second time for a smaller BBQ (so used a smaller joint of meat), and it was even better this time round. By now, I was completely confident in how reliable the app is, so was happy to get the meat on the BBQ in the morning, go out for several hours and know that it would be nearly cooked by the time I got home. The smell in the garden was amazing when we returned home that afternoon! 

I'd even suggest that you could fire up the grill the evening before and cook a large joint of meat really slowly throughout the night if you wanted it to be ready for a lunchtime BBQ the next day. 

It is worth noting that even though you can receive temperature and cooking alerts on your phone, you can't control the temperature or burners remotely, so you do need to be at the BBQ to do this.

As the app gives you an initial estimate of cooking time, my advice would be to allow for a little extra time in case it adjusts the cooking time and takes slightly longer than the original estimate. You can always rest the meat after cooking for a little longer than necessary - that's preferable to having hungry guests standing around waiting for their food!

As well as the above dishes, I've also cooked the more standard burgers and sausages for quicker mid-week BBQs. Other favorites I've grilled for this review include fresh prawn kebabs, salmon, halloumi kebabs, lamb kofta kebabs and a wide range of vegetables. 

The side burner has been brilliant for cooking onions, warming sauces, and I've even used it for cooking blueberry pancakes outdoors for a weekend brunch. 

Additional features of the Weber Genesis II EX-335 smart barbecue

One major plus point to note for this BBQ is that I love the height of it! I'm quite tall (as is my husband) and we often find that we end up stooping over a BBQ when cooking, but no such issues with this gas grill. It offers a great cooking height and we both found it far more comfortable to use than our previous BBQs. 

The side burner is also far better than ones on previous gas BBQs we've used. The burner is housed within the right hand side table rather than sitting on top of it. It means it's really well protected from any gusts of wind, unlike some other gas BBQs I've used where there have been issues with a burner getting extinguished in windy weather. When not in use, you can close the lid on top of the burner to give you an extra food prep surface. 

There are handy tool hooks on the side of the BBQ to show off your best BBQ tools as well as keep them close at hand, plus two heavy-duty doors conceal a practical storage cupboard underneath. 

The control knobs are illuminated too, making it easy to grill after dark and in all weathers. There's also a clip-on LED lamp that you can attach to the lid handle, and it will switch on automatically when you lift up the lid. While we haven't seen the benefit of these features during summer, I know it will come in handy as the evenings get darker in autumn and we still want to be grilling outdoors. 

As you'd expect from a leading grill brand, there are plenty of extras you can add to your Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart barbecue to enhance your grilling experience even further. From pizza stones and wok sets to cleaning kits and more, there's lots to choose from. These are added extras rather than essential, so unless money is no object I'd definitely advise getting used to the grill before investing in any further additions.

Cleaning the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS gas BBQ

After each time I've used the BBQ, I've given the grill bars a basic clean using stiff wire brushes. There's no need to use water, you simply pre-heat the grill and use the brushes to remove any cooking debris from the grill. I decided to invest in the Weber three-sided BBQ brush and the Weber 45cm brush for these jobs and have found them to be really effective. It's also a good idea to wipe down the inside and outside of the lid after cooking, as well as the side tables. Don't forget to empty the drip tray each time too. Other than this, there's not much else you need to do when using it on a day-today basis. 

In the manual, Weber does advise that the grill will need a thorough deep clean at least twice a year, but if you use it fairly regularly then you should aim to do this quarterly. This involves cleaning everything from the lid and cooking grates to the Flavorizer Bars, burners and heat deflectors. There are detailed instructions on what tools you'll need and how to do it in the manual, and the advice is really simple to follow. 

We've done this deep clean once as part of the review, following Weber's instructions. All the parts are easily removable for cleaning, and it's simple to slot everything back into place. Although it's bigger than our previous gas BBQ, we found it much quicker and easier to clean, taking around 45 minutes to go through the entire cleaning process. 

There's lots more tips on how to clean a BBQ in our guide too. 

Storing the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart grill

As you'll no doubt have gathered from this review, the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart grill isn't small! If you want to store it inside over the winter months then you'll need a large space in your shed or garage to be able to keep it undercover. The side tables don't drop down flat either, so you can't reduce the width of the BBQ to help with storage.

As this BBQ is perfect for grilling in all weathers, however, chances are you'll want to keep it outdoors all year long. For that reason, investing in a suitable cover is a smart move. As part of this review, I was also sent a Weber premium BBQ cover which perfectly fits this BBQ. It's lightweight but really durable and water resistant so will protect your grill in all weathers. It also has handy fastening straps to prevent it from blowing off in strong winds. You'll need to make sure these are securely fastened though, as we didn't tighten ours properly and the cover blew off a couple of times during one or two summer storms.  

Should you buy the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart barbecue?

If you love cooking outdoors and want to take your backyard grilling to the next level, then it's a resounding yes from me. Assembly might take quite a while, but don't let that put you off. Once you've built the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS gas BBQ you won't look back, and you'll soon be experimenting with a wider range of BBQ dishes than ever before and enjoying how easy it is to cook them. 

What's more, thanks to the smart tech you won't have to be chained to the grill while your guests get to enjoy your BBQ party. It's easy to monitor everything from your phone, so you can simply let the gas grill do all the hard work while you relax or get on with other chores in the house or backyard.  

Customer reviews on the Weber US website give the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart grill an average 4.7 out of 5 rating, with customers commenting on how easy it is to use and how the smart tech allows them to get fantastic results with minimal effort. One customer even commented 'it makes me feel like a grill master'. Most people also comment on the relatively long build time (four hours seems to be fairly standard), but like me this wouldn't put them off buying it. 

The built-in smart technology is what gives this BBQ its premium price, so if you love the sound of the BBQ but aren't too fussed about the technology then you might prefer to check out the Weber Genesis II EP-335 GBS Gas Barbecue or even the Weber Genesis II E-315 GBS Gas Barbecueas they both have lower price points. 

However, the smart features give you the confidence to try things that you wouldn't have considered cooking on a gas grill before. It removes all of the guesswork and makes it super easy to get the cooking spot on every time. It really couldn't be easier. And with so many recipes to try within the Weber Connect app, there's really no excuse not to be more adventurous in your grilling choices! In a nutshell, think of it as having an experienced grill master that's always on hand to tell you how to prep and cook your BBQ dishes, as well as alert you when they're ready to flip, rest and eat, and that's what having this technology gives you. 

There's no getting away from the fact that the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart barbecue is a premium price product. But you know you're buying a product from a leading, trusted grill brand with an excellent heritage. With its impressive build quality and 10-year warranty, this gas grill isn't meant to be a quick purchase for occasional BBQs, it's an investment buy that you'll get to enjoy for many years to come. So if you're looking to complete your outdoor kitchen ideas in style, this would make an excellent addition to any backyard set-up.  

About the review and our reviewer

Beth Murton is the editor of Gardeningetc and has been writing about homes and gardens for 18 years for a wide range of magazines and websites.

She lives in the Midlands in the UK with her husband and two young children in a renovated 1930s home. The large rear garden was one of the house's biggest selling points, and in recent years she has made lots of changes to the space to make it work for family life. 

As with all our reviews, the Weber Genesis II EX-335 GBS smart barbecue has been tested first-hand in her garden over a number of weeks, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand, unless we are able to keep them. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time.

When I moved into my home in mid-2020, I didn’t have the luxury of buying new lawn care products, so I gratefully took my father’s old riding lawn mower and self-propelled gas push mower when he offered them to me.

My home sits on half an acre with two sides of the property featuring sloping hills (one of which turns into a ditch). I use the riding lawn mower to mow the flat surfaces of my yard and the push mower to mow the remaining third of my property – primarily the sloping hills and the ditch that runs in front of my house. 

Suffice to say, the push mower my dad gave me did the trick, but it was fairly old, and it took me at least three attempts to start it each time I needed to mow my lawn. I was beyond happy to put that lawn mower aside and try the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower when I got the chance.

It only took one lawn care day to realize that I’d hit the jackpot with this lawn mower. Mowing my lawn is now easier and more enjoyable with this Troy-Bilt lawn mower at my disposal. See how we got on and whether it deserves a slot on the best lawn mower list.

Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower: key specifications

• Deck cutting width: 22 inches
• Power source: Gas
• Cutting height range: 6 adjustments ranging between 1.25–3.75 inches  
• Fuel tank capacity: 1 quart
• Engine Oil Capacity: 15 ounces
• Weight: 75 pounds
• Dimensions: 60 L x 22 W x 38 H inches

Setting up the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower

The Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower arrived in a large box with handles. On top of the box, I noticed some instructions that told me to open the top flap and remove the small items on top (the rear bag and a plastic bag with instructions, oil, etc.). It also said to cut the sides of the box so that the box flattened, and I could push the lawn mower out rather than having to pick it up.  

I discovered that the lawn mower was most nearly assembled, or at least the most important parts like the deck with the engine and the wheels. It seemed I would only need to assemble the handle, recoil start, and either the side chute or rear bag. It was far easier than I thought it would be thanks to the step-by-step instructions.

Assembling the handle basically required putting four screws in at the right spot and then unraveling the recoil start and placing it on the handle. After that, I poured the full plastic pouch of oil that was included in the packaging into the lawn mower and added the side discharge chute (I prefer to mulch my yard rather than catch grass clippings). Then I adjusted the handle to my preferred height and I was ready to go.

What is the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower like to use?

I never realized how much effort and labor had been required to mow my lawn before I tried the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower. As I mentioned before, I had to basically stand on my head, pray to the gods of lawn care, wear lucky jeans, and do a full-on ritual to get my old push lawn mower to start. When it came time to use this Troy-Bilt lawn mower for the first time, I felt a sudden dread. How many times would I have to pull the string? How many times would I fail before I got it right?

This particular lawn mower has an Auto Choke design, meaning you don’t have to press a button to prime or choke the engine before pulling on the recoil starter. After holding the blade control handle against the main handle, I’m happy to say that I only had to pull the recoil starter once and the lawn mower purred to life.

Overall, the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower is very easy to use because it has a self-propelling system. To make the lawn mower propel forward, all you have to do is squeeze the single lever drive control and the blade control against the upper handle at the same time. The single lever drive control determines the speed by which the lawn mower propels forward. If you release it slightly, the lawn mower slows down. Release it all the way and the mower stops completely.

My old lawn mower didn’t have a single lever drive control (only a blade control lever), so I did have to get used to holding both levers at the same time. It’s not the most comfortable design feature, but it’s not something that would dissuade me from using this lawn mower. Besides, it allows me to decide the speed by which I want the mower to go.

The first time I used the lawn mower, I quickly realized that the wheels weren’t set at the right height. In fact, they were far too low which caused it to get ‘stuck’ in the thick grass. I stopped the mower and adjusted the cutting height on the front and back wheels. There are six cutting heights that range between 1.25–3.75 inches.

Outfitted with four-wheel drive, I found this Troy-Bilt lawn mower to be easy to maneuver and turn. Combined with the self-propelling system (which seems to have a faster speed than my old lawn mower), I felt like I powered through my mowing session far quicker than I ever had before. If you don't know how to mow a lawn well, these features certainly help the process.

I thought it might take me longer to cut my yard because the cutting width is only 22 inches, which is a few inches shorter than my old mower. That said, I found the smaller deck size easier to maneuver when mowing near the drainage ditch in front of my house. The ditch is a nightmare to cut, and usually requires me to use a weed eater. However, the narrower deck of this lawn mower allows me to mow just a bit more of the ditch than I was able to mow with my old mower – a great feature if you're often wondering how to get rid of lawn weeds and grass overgrowth in a particular spot.

I’ve used this lawn mower a few times on my yard and I’m happy to say that it works fantastically thanks to Troy-Bilt’s TriAction cutting system which rakes the grass at the front of the mower so that it stands up and is evenly cut with the S-blade. The mower then mulches the grass finely and ejects it effortlessly. By the time I’m finished mowing, my yard looks sharp and clean.

Standout qualities of this Troy-Bilt lawn mower: vertical and flat storage

Perhaps the most attractive feature of the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower comes from the name itself: the SpaceSavr design. This design lets me fold the handle forward so that it lays flat on the deck of the mower. To do this, I had to unlock the handle near the back wheels, lay it forward, and then lock it in place again. I could immediately store the ‘flattened’ lawn mower under a bench or shelf, however, I prefer the second SpaceSavr design. After folding the handle forward and locking it in place, I lifted the handle so that the lawn mower stands vertically with the assistance of built-in kickstands.

You may be asking, “Can’t I do this with any lawn mower with a foldable handle?” The answer is no. Not only does the kickstands prevent the lawn mower from falling over in the vertical position, but Troy-Bilt has designed the lawn mower in a way so that the gas and the oil won’t leak in the vertical position, as long as the oil and gas levels are below the recommended mark. There is a small plastic orange piece in the gas tank that indicates where the gas line cannot exceed to prevent gas from leaking out when the lawn mower is in the vertical position.

Troy-Bilt estimates that in the vertical position, you could save 72 per cent more space in your garage or shed. As someone with a three-car garage, I have plenty of storage space. Even so, I love the vertical SpaceSavr design because it gives me far more space to maneuver. Those who only have a small shed or only half a garage to store their lawn mower will love this feature!

• Short on space? Check out these shed storage ideas

Additional features of this Troy-Bilt lawn mower

The SpaceSavr design isn’t the only feature that buyers will love about this lawn mower. In addition to a side discharge chute, the lawn mower comes with a rear bag to collect grass clippings. These are easy to attach.

I’m also a fan of the deck wash adaptor. It allows you to hook up the best garden hose to the top of the lawn mower deck. When you turn on the water, it rinses clippings from the underside of the deck ensuring that the blade lasts longer.

How does this Troy-Bilt lawn mower compare to similar models?

Let me be upfront and say that I have not tested any other lawn mowers (other than those I have owned). That said, I’ve done my research.

When comparing this lawn mower with other gas-powered lawn mowers that are about the same size, the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower sits firmly in the mid-price range. Most lawn mowers this size can cost between $250–$500; this Troy-Bilt mower is $369.

While there are a ton of lawn mowers that have adjustable handles that let you store the lawn mower under a bench, there are far fewer lawn mowers that have a vertical storage feature. However, I found two that are comparable: the CRAFTSMAN M260 Vertical Storage 163-cc 21-in Self-Propelled Gas Push Lawn Mower and the Toro 22-inch SMARTSTOW High Wheel Push Mower.

In terms of price, the Troy-Bilt is the second most affordable among these three lawn mowers. Where the Toro and the Troy-Bilt have a 22-inch cutting width, the CRAFTSMAN mower only has a 21-inch cutting width. 

If you look over the specs and the features, the Troy-Bilt and the CRAFTSMAN lawn mower are very similar. Although the engine displacement is higher for the CRAFTSMAN, the Troy-Bilt has a wider cutting width, is five pounds lighter, and is cheaper.

There are some differences between the Troy-Bilt lawn mower and the Toro. The most notable difference is that the Toro is cheaper, and it has nine cutting heights versus six. They both have 11-inch rear wheels, which is great for uneven terrain.

• Checking out the competition? Browse our guide on the best cordless lawn mower.

Should you buy the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower?

I would not hesitate to buy the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower. This lawn mower is so easy to start, and it moves effortlessly across a yard. The vertical storage feature is a huge bonus for anyone who wants extra storage space or has limited storage space in their home. With this lawn mower, you can easily tackle small, medium, and some slightly large yards.

I should point out that on the Troy-Bilt website, the lawn mower has a 4.3 rating out of 18 reviews and on Home Depot it has a 4-star rating from 55 reviews. I believe this rating is fairly low. After my experience with the lawn mower, I would rate it at 4.7 out of 5 stars. I read through the reviews on both sites and found that the star rating was lowered by a handful of poor reviews that note small manufacturing or shipping mistakes. As with any product you buy over the Internet, mistakes on the manufacturing side happen on occasion, but these seem to be very few and far between. Most of the reviewers overwhelmingly rave about the lawn mower and I’m firmly in that boat.

The Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower is well worth your money and will make your lawn a favorite on the block.

• Looking for a full backyard arsenal? Check out our guide to the best strimmers

About this review and our reviewer 

Alex Temblador is a Dallas-based award-winning author and freelance writer that has covered home, design, architecture, and art in publications like Real Homes, Gardeningetc, Home & Gardens, Dwell, Architectural Digest, Artsy, Neighborhoods.com, Culture Trip, among many others. She recently bought her first home, a green Sears & Roebuck house that's over 100 years old, sits on half an acre of land, and features a stunning wraparound porch, original hardwood floors, pocket doors, and a butler pantry. Alex loves to test products for Gardeningetc, Real Homes, and Homes & Gardens buying guides and reviews which has helped to expand the richness of her first-time homeowner life. The Mixed Latinx writer can usually be found working or relaxing in her outdoor spaces. 

As with all our reviews, the Troy-Bilt TB260 XP SpaceSavr Self-Propelled Lawn Mower was tested first-hand in Alex’s backyard, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand unless we are able to keep them. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time.

When I bought my home last year, I was met with a beautiful green yard full of mature trees. The only problem was that my entire side fence was hidden by a swath of 10-foot-thick brush, shrubs, trees, and thorny vines.  

My father helped me remove about three quarters of the brush, however, we decided to leave a section to act as a barrier between my neighbor and me, where a portion of fence did not exist. If left unchecked, the brush gets wild with branches and vines extending out into my main yard. It’s not the most aesthetically pleasing part of my yard, and even less so when it’s not trimmed back. 

I wasn't fortunate enough to own one of the best hedge trimmers, so I always had to wait for my dad to visit and bring his. In the meantime, the brush would worsen, and as someone who is very particular about managing their yard, I did not like this. As you can imagine, I was ecstatic when I got the opportunity to review the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer. Now, I could maintain the section of brush in my yard at my leisure.

I hoped that the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer wouldn’t be too hard to use because I’d never used a hedge trimmer before. It didn’t take long to discover that the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer was exactly what I needed.  

SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer: key specifications

• Blade type: Dual-edge
• Blade length: 22 inches
• Cutting capacity: 0.55 inches
• Power source: 20V 2.0Ah rechargeable battery
• Weight: 4.74 lbs
• Dimensions: 36.02 x 8.35 x 3.27 inches

Ordering and setting up the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer

The SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer is available to order online only through Amazon. It comes in at under $130 which is very affordable for a cordless hedge trimmer.

It arrives in a compact box. Once I opened the box, I realized that the hedge trimmer was basically assembled. The only thing I had to do was screw in the protection guard and the front handle. This took less than five minutes to do.

I put the battery on the charger and plugged it into the wall. I assumed that the battery wouldn’t be charged, since the instructions didn’t notate that it was. However, about half an hour later, I checked the battery and realized that it had been fully charged this whole time. I could start cutting immediately.

What is the Snapfresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer like to use?

As I said, I had never used a hedge trimmer before, so I was glad to discover that the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer was beyond easy to use. After consulting the instructions (and my dad lent me some tips over the phone), I took the trimmer outside and headed straight for the brush.

• Looking for tips on how to trim a hedge? Our guide has plenty to give you a helping hand.

I took off the storage sheath from the blade and inserted the battery onto the undercarriage of the machine. Then I gripped the on/off button under the handle and the front switch at the same time. The machine revved to life. The SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer has a dual-action blade which means I can cut the twigs and brush using either side of the blade. Not all hedge trimmers have dual-action blades (which seems crazy to me) so this is something I greatly appreciated about this hedge trimmer. Although I’m right-handed, I have read that dual-action blades are especially helpful to left-handed people.

I noticed two things quickly when I first used this product: the hedge trimmer was pretty light, and it wasn’t that loud. As someone who wants to be a good neighbor, noise pollution is something I’m always conscious about and this hedge trimmer does a decent job. However, I was more thankful that the hedge trimmer weighs less than five pounds. After mowing and edging half an acre yard, I’m glad I can pick up this lightweight hedge trimmer and get to work on the brush without a lot of effort. The brush in my yard is nearly 15 feet tall in some spots, so I do have to trim above my head. Of course, I’m unable to reach the top parts without a ladder, but I’m able to get pretty high up there by merely standing on the ground and lifting the lightweight hedge trimmer above my head. It’s definitely the lightest yard tool that I own.

With a cutting capacity of 0.55 inches, the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer attacked the different types of plants that make up the brush. I was nervous about using the hedge trimmer on the vines because I feared they might get caught on the blades, but I was glad that the hedge trimmer cut through them effortlessly. It was even able to cut through a few branches that were over 0.55 inches but less than an inch. I didn’t do this often because I want to protect the blade, but I did want to mention it, nevertheless.

I’ve used the hedge trimmer twice for about 15 minutes each and the battery has not yet died. This is a little odd (but great!) to me because according to SnapFresh, a 2.0Ah battery only has a 15-minute charge. If you look through the reviews on Amazon, it seems that I’m not alone in this experience. A lot of other people exclaim about the battery life, with some notating that it lasts anywhere from 30 minutes to an hour. I think SnapFresh is being safe with their 15-minute estimation, but in my experience, and the experience of many others, it lasts much longer.

That said, charging the battery can take up to 60 minutes, so if you have a lot of hedges, it might not be a bad idea to buy a second battery, charge it, and keep it on hand when the first battery runs out.

• You can find the best fast growing hedges for maintaining privacy in our guide.

Safety features of the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer

Not all hedge trimmers are equipped with safety features, which can be dangerous. One of my favorite aspects of the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer is that it doesn’t just have one safety feature but three!

When the hedge trimmer arrives at your doorstep, the blade is sheathed in a plastic protection cover. You can remove it by squeezing the sides together and then pulling it off. Don’t throw this away! Once you’re done trimming your hedges, place this back on the blade to protect the blade from damage and rusting and from anyone (like children) who might accidentally cut themselves on the blade when not in use.

The protection guard is a small black shield at the top of the dual-action blade. It’s designed to protect your hand from materials that blow back when trimming and prevents your hand from slipping forward onto the blade when cutting. Now, when I was trimming the brush in my yard, much of which is above my head, I found that the protection guard can only protect so much, so I did have to wear long sleeves and sunglasses to fully protect myself. That said, I’m glad it’s in place because I wouldn’t want my hand to slip forward and get cut on the blade.

The last and most significant safety feature is the two-handed safety switch. The SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer can only be used with two hands. There are two buttons that the user must grip at the same time: the on/off button that sits under the handle and the front handle safety switch. If your hand slips from one of those buttons, the hedge trimmer turns off automatically. If you only grip one switch, the hedge trimmer won’t turn on. By requiring users to press both buttons at the same time, SnapFresh has made an incredibly safe-to-use product. It also prevents accidents from happening, like if a child tries to pick up the hedge trimmer and only presses one button because they don’t understand the concept of the two-button safety design.

In my research of hedge trimmers, I found that a lot of hedge trimmers lack these safety features, which honestly surprised me. Take it from me, it’s better to have yard equipment with safety features.

How does the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer compare to similar models?

I have not tested any other hedge trimmers, so it’s a little difficult to compare the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmers to other models, but I can offer you some insight based on research (as well as a great beginner's view).

SnapFresh is a power tool brand for budget-minded buyers, and although it doesn’t have the name recognition of budget brands like Sun Joe or Ryobi, I think it soon will. Before I get into that, let’s take a look at other budget hedge trimmer buys.

Ryobi has a 22-inch 18-volt cordless hedge trimmer for sale on Amazon. At first glance, this hedge trimmer appears to be cheaper, but you’ll quickly discover that it does not come with a battery. With the purchase of a battery, it’s about the same price as the SnapFresh hedge trimmer, but you’ll just have to go to the trouble of buying a Ryobi battery that fits. Pros for the Ryobi hedge trimmer include having a larger cutting capacity (3/4 of an inch) and a rotating rear handle which allows for different angles of trimming. The drawbacks? It doesn’t have the two-handle safety switch feature like the SnapFresh Hedge Trimmer.

Sun Joe has a pole hedge trimmer on Amazon, which isn’t really comparable to the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer because it’s an entirely different design. PowerSmart, however, does have a budget hedge trimmer that costs less than $90, includes a battery, and has a double safety switch, but the blade is only 16 inches and the battery is 1.5Ah, meaning it won’t last as long as the SnapFresh battery.

BLACK + DECKER, on the other hand, has a 22-inch cordless hedge trimmer for sale on Amazon, which allows you to choose whether or not to buy it with a battery (or a battery that has more power). It costs about the same as the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer, though it does have a 3/4 of an inch cutting capacity. Like the Ryobi, it lacks the dual switch safety feature.

Should you buy the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer? 

At the moment, the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer has a 4.4-star rating on Amazon with 231 reviews. I wholly agree with this rating. SnapFresh doesn’t yet have the name recognition as some other brands, which is why it only has 231 reviews, but in my experience with using the product, I see no reason why that won’t change over the next few years.

The SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer is definitely worth the buy, especially for those who want something that’s lightweight and easy-to-use. It has a cutting capacity and dual-action blade length that’s average among hedge trimmers, and yet, it works like a pro. What makes this product shine are the multiple safety features – and when working with sharp tools like this, safety is vitally important.

• Need other tools to keep your yard looking neat? We've rounded up the best lawn mowers in our buying guide.

About this review and our reviewer

Alex Temblador is a Dallas-based award-winning author and freelance writer that has covered home, design, architecture, and art in publications like Real Homes, Gardeningetc, Home & Gardens, Dwell, Architectural Digest, Artsy, Neighborhoods.com, and Culture Trip, among many others. She recently bought her first home, a green Sears & Roebuck house that's over 100 years old, sits on half an acre of land and features a stunning wraparound porch, original hardwood floors, pocket doors, and a butler pantry. Alex loves to test products for Gardeningetc, Real Homes, and Homes & Gardens buying guides and reviews which has helped to expand the richness of her first-time homeowner life. The Mixed Latinx writer can usually be found working or relaxing in her outdoor spaces. 

As with all our reviews, the SnapFresh Cordless Hedge Trimmer was tested first-hand in Alex’s backyard, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand unless we are able to keep it as we are with this trimmer. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time. 

It is a big claim, but according to the manufacturers the Worx Hydroshot WG629E.1 portable pressure cleaner is the only high-pressure washer you can take anywhere. Lightweight and compact, it is powered by a 20V battery, which means you do not need to plug it in to a mains socket to operate.

Equally handy is that for those who do not have an outdoor tap, you can clean items using the six metre hose provided by filling the bucket at any fresh water source. There is the option to connect to garden hose, too.

Included in the kit is the WG629E.1 pistol, 20V 2.0Ah battery pack and charger, a cleaning brush, soap bottle, suction hose with filter, foldable water bucket, lance and a carry bag. So, while it might not have the 180 bar pressure of our best pressure washer, it certainly has all the gear you could need on the go.

This is the first cordless pressure washer I have used, so I was interested to see just how powerful it was and if it made any of my cleaning tasks easier. Knowing that the power might not quite live up to corded mains powered versions, I approached this with the mindset of those who might be using it out and about, or people like my friend with no outdoor socket or water supply.

Worx Hydroshot WG629E.1 key product specifications:

• Power type: 20 Li-ion battery
• Max pressure: 22 bar
• Best for: use anywhere, even without a mains water or electricity supply
• Weight: 1.65kg
• Battery life: 30 minutes
• Charge time: 3 hours from zero
• Pressure settings: 5 (0, 15, 25, 40 and watering)
• Guarantee: manufacturer’s 3-year warranty
• Box includes: lance, extension lance, battery and charger, brush, 6m suction hose, foldable water bucket, soap bottle and carry bag

First impressions of the Worx Hydroshot WG629E.1

While compact, this pressure washer sure does come with plenty of kit. Worx has even thrown in a handy mesh bag to keep it all together – great for hanging in a small shed, or throwing in the back of the car for an active day out. The collapsable bucket is also a space saver and handy for porting everything around.

The unit itself is pleasingly light, even with the lance and various attachments, so if you want easy cleaning, but don't require something very powerful, this is an accessible product. 

Everything is made of a very durable plastic in a classic power tool colour-combo favourite of orange and black. And, you get a battery and charger thrown in. As part of the PowerShare range, you can buy further batteries if needed – something that could be a great idea to give yourself a bit more juice when you are out. 

Getting started

To start, you need to have the battery fully charged. This means three hours in the charger if charging from zero or for the first time. Subsequent charges take less time and the charger has indicator lights that tell you it is charging, it is full of charge, or if there is an issue with the battery. 

With a full battery you are ready to go. Simply slot the battery onto the pressure washer unit and attach your desired accessory. If you are using it for watering or pressure washing you will need to fill the bucket with fresh water and attach the suction hose. For use at home, you can attach it to a mains hose pipe as it has a handy clip-lock hose attachment that is fairly universal.

• See the best garden hose for our top buys

What is the Worx WG629E.1 20V Max Cordless Pressure Cleaner like to use?

The Worx website states that the WG629E.1 Cordless Hydroshot, is great for cleaning items that don’t require really high water pressure, such as bikes, sports equipment, windows and cars. The lance has a 5-in-1 pressure nozzle (with settings 0, 15, 25, 40 and watering), to suit any application, so with this in mind, I tried it on a number of surfaces to see just how effective and convenient it was.

To operate the Hydroshot, you attach the accessory you want to use, insert the battery and then press the safety button on the left side of the pistol, followed by squeezing the trigger.

Plastic surfaces
I must admit that I have never cleaned my wheelie bin, mainly because of the length of time it would take me, plus I can’t reach the bottom. So this was the first object I used the Worx Hydroshot on. I connected the lance by aligning its end to the pistol and then twisted it 90 degrees to secure it. I then set the nozzle to the highest pressure, simply by twisting the end to 0. The number indicates the spray size. The higher the number, the wider the opening and the less intense the pressure, so using 0 offers the strongest clean, but as the aperture is smaller it covers a smaller space at one time.

The Hydroshot easily moved the dirt and sludge inside the bin and left the inside gleaming. I did the outside too and in total, it took about five minutes.

Next, I moved on to cleaning some of my son’s outdoor toys. He has a fountain factory, which we keep outside all year round, so it was full of dead leaves, algae, insects and other garden matter. The Worx Hydroshot WG629E.1 was perfect for cleaning this and left it looking almost as good as new. Along with using it to blast his sandpit and water toys, this took another five minutes.

Stone floor areas
Impressed with how the Hydroshot had cleaned the stubborn grime from the bin and toys, I thought I would try it on some of the patio slabs. The Worx Hydroshot WG629E.1 has ten times the pressure of an ordinary garden hose, but it does recommend that it’s used for items that don’t require very high water pressure. 

Although it did clear the moss and some of the dirt from my slabs, they weren’t left as clean as when I used our Karcher K7 Premium Smart Control pressure washer. It also took a lot longer to clean one slab, as you have to use the nozzle on the highest setting which means the spray isn’t very wide. However, if you didn’t have the option to use a mains pressure washer and you cleaned the slabs regularly, I imagine it would do a better job than having to scrub them manually.

Glass and gutter cleaning
We have our windows cleaned once a month, but after my three-year old and his friends had been splashing around in the paddling pool, they had splashed dirty water all over the back windows. I also noticed that the gutters were coated with dust and vegetation in some areas, so used the Worx Hydroshot WG629E.1 on pressure 15, with the lance, so I could reach. Most of the dirt came away easily and it was fine for a quick clean, but didn’t leave the glass spotless. You could use the soap bottle, which is included, if you wanted to do a proper job of cleaning the windows, then follow this up with the brush for stubborn grime.

Car cleaning
I very rarely clean my car, simply because I don’t have the time. But as the Hydroshot is so quick to put together and use, it might make me clean the car more regularly. Firstly, I used the lance on the highest setting to remove loose debris. I then mixed some car shampoo with water in the soap bottle, (following the ratio on the car shampoo bottle), removed the lance and attached the soap bottle. Again, this is really easy as all the accessories are removed and replaced in the same way.

I covered the car in a layer of soap and let it settle for a few minutes. I then connected the brush to give the car a rinse and scrub. The bristles are quite soft, so you won’t damage the paint work, but they don’t remove stubborn dirt, such as on the alloys or around the front grill. I then finished, by attaching the lance again to give it a final rinse.

For a quick clean, it did the job. But it didn’t remove the stubborn dirt around my wheels, registration plates, grills and lights. It would be fine to use in between deep cleans, or to remove mud and dirt before it’s completely settled.

Cleaning other objects
My partner is a keen fisherman and often camps overnight while fishing. He said that he could see the benefits of taking something so lightweight and portable with him, to help wash down his kit and camping equipment before packing it away. It would also be great for cleaning other sporting equipment too, such as surf boards, kayaks, hiking boots, mountain bikes and diving equipment.

Watering
For those without an outdoor tap, the Hydroshot is a great alternative to a garden hose or watering can as the nozzle also has a watering option. The foldable bucket carries a lot more water than a watering can too, so you wouldn’t have to make so many trips to and from the tap, saving you time and getting the job done more quickly.

Ease of use

As I own a pressure washer and have used other pressure washers in the past, the operation of the Hydroshot is very similar. What is unique to the Worx Hydroshot, compared to other pressure washers, is just how light and compact it is. You can hold and use it with just one hand – even my three-year-old had a go and had no problems (supervised, of course).

Removing and replacing the accessories is also very simple, as is changing between the different pressures.

For most of the power washing, I attached my garden hose, but I did use the bucket and hose system on the wheelie bin, garden pots and a bit of the patio. It surprised me how efficiently the Hydroshot pulls through water and I was able to do a lot with just one bucket full. Still, you need to remember this is for quick cleaning on the go, so those wanting to clean a whole patio using the suction hose and bucket will find it will take lots of trips to a tap to get enough water to finish the job.

Additional features of the Worx Hydroshot WG629E.1 cordless pressure washer

The Worx Hydroshot WG629E.1 20V MAX Cordless Portable Pressure Cleaner Kit, is part of Worx’s PowerShare range, which enables you to share the 20V battery with other Worx tools in the same range. This saves money and space when it comes storage, but also gives you the option to have spare batteries for convenience. The batteries charge in three hours and the battery charger shows you when the battery is fully charged. A red light on the charger indicates that there is a problem, such as the battery is too hot and the charger attempts to repair any issues. Although I didn’t test it to the limit, Worx claims that it delivers enough power to run through three full tanks of water on a single charge. I found it reached the half hour battery expectancy with no problem and still had some charge left.

The hose has a built-in filter on the end, which enables you to draw water from any fresh water source, whether that be a bucket, bottle, or even a lake or stream.

The storage bag is great too, as it keeps everything stored together, nice and tidy, whilst being easy to transport. It’s so compact, that it won’t take up much room in your car. This is where the Worx Hydroshot really has its USP – for those needing to clean on the go.

How does it rate?

I have rated the Worx Hydroshot WG629E.1 four and a half stars, due to it being versatile, compact, easy to use and effective. If I was comparing it to other corded pressure washers, I wouldn’t have rated it as highly as it’s simply not as powerful, but the website does warn you that it is not suitable for jobs that require very high water pressure. Therefore I considered it a separate product and felt it really hit the mark for quick cleaning, wherever you are.

Most other reviewers rate the kit highly, averaging about four and a half stars too. Those who have said it is poor have expected higher pressure and for it to be able to quickly complete the task of how to clean a patio, cars and decking. If you are after a pressure washer for cleaning large surfaces and cars, the Worx Hydroshot WG629E.1 is not the one (and Worx makes it clear that it has not been designed for these jobs).

The four and five star reviewers have commended it for how it can save you time for jobs where you’d usually use a garden hose, how convenient and versatile it is and how long the battery lasts.

I have already highly recommended the Worx WG629E.1 20V MAX Cordless Hydroshot pressure cleaner to my friend who doesn’t have an outdoor tap.

About this review and our reviewer

Bethan Davis is a PR Officer from the Midlands, working in the leisure and tourism industry. She lives with her fiancé, two little boys and two cats and has a mature garden with plenty of patio space. She has previously tested corded pressure washers and was keen to see how a cordless model compared, so put it to work on a variety of cleaning tasks around her home over a period of a few weeks.

Looking for an uncomplicated upgrade to your old grill? Read on, because the Weber Traveler gas barbecue is the ideal choice for families and fairweather grillers alike. 

Barbecue reviews usually lean toward super-complex models: those that can grill, roast, bake and even smoke your food. Extras like rotisserie motors and WiFi connectivity can complicate things even further, leaving most confused and clueless when all you really want it to do is grill a burger.

In this brave new world of multitasking grills, the Weber Traveler gas barbecue is a breath of fresh air. Over the years I've been fortunate enough to own or test out a number of different outdoor cookers. From charcoal and gas barbecues, to wood pellet-fuelled grills and pizza ovens – I enjoy cooking on every one of them, each with their particular charms and benefits.

However, there are those lazy moments – whether you're feeding family and friends or you'd rather have not be glued to the grill – when simplicity always wins. And that is the Weber Traveler gas barbecue in a nutshell.

I tested the grill over a week and a half, cooking up a pretty wide selection of dishes so keep reading to find out how I fared with the Weber Traveler gas barbecue. If, however, you're looking for a few more options, head to our best BBQ guide for the lowdown on the top grills on the market today. 

Weber Traveler gas barbecue product specifications

• Fuel type: Disposable gas cartridge
• Burners: 1 
• Dimensions: H94.5 x W110.8 x D58.4cm (assembled)
• Weight: 28.1kg (assembled)
• Oven temperature: Up to 260˚C
• Grill size: 2065 cm sq
• Extras: three tool hooks and a sturdy side prep table
• Use: Outdoor use only

Weber Traveler gas barbecue: first impressions and assembly

The Weber Traveler gas barbecue arrives in a fairly large box – sufficiently big and bulky to require two people to carry it wherever you decide to assemble it. Once assembled, you can move it wherever you want to because, hey, it's portable!

Assembly only requires one person, and quite frankly, it couldn't be easier. You can use the instructions provided, or – and I would recommend this – you can download the ingenious Bilt app which provides moving 3D assembly instructions for all of Weber's grills. 

Both the app and the instructions state that it will take 10 minutes for one person to build it – I suspect that's if you choose to assemble it while sipping on a cocktail or tending to some unruly toddlers, because I easily managed it in half that time.

There are ten super simple steps to assembly. Start by sliding an axle through the base and securing it in place, attaching the wheels, fastening and covering them with mini hubcaps. Next you undo a plastic latch to unlock the grill, raise it up, slide in the drip tray and then pop the cast iron grill plates above the burner. That's it!

Honestly, it's so simple even a child could do it (suffice to say, you should absolutely NOT let a child do it...)

In terms of the design, the Weber Traveler is a bit like a hybrid of a barbecue and buggy or pushchair. Sharing that clever, failsafe design through and through.

The side table comes with a sticker showing instructions on how to raise and lower the grill. This is quite handy when you've just bought it as there are some safety elements built in so that it doesn't collapse easily – but this all becomes second nature after a few attempts.

Simply unlock the safety latch, put one foot on the foot stand and raise it up. You lower it back down by gripping the table handle and releasing the lever underneath - all the time with one foot on the foot stand to stabilize it – then you lower it down. 

As it lowers, the automatic lock secures the lid in place and all that's left for you to do is to fasten the cart using the safety latch again.

The barbecue itself is wide but not very deep, with the prep table on the right-hand side, which I guess may be a bit annoying for the left-handed population. The controls are also on the right, which sit just below the table top. The lid is domed and features a clear temperature gauge giving you greater control over the heat within.

At the base of grill you'll find the drip tray drawer, which slides out easily, and for which you can buy Weber drip tray liners that fit snugly inside to help with the clean up afterwards.

When its folded up, the Weber Traveler gas barbecue doesn't take up a great deal of space so there isn't an outdoor cover available as, quite frankly, you won't need one - you can easily pop it in your shed or garage when you're done. 

If you plan to bring the Weber Traveler gas barbecue with you somewhere in your car, there's also the option to buy a Cargo Protector bag, which is useful as it has grime resistant fabric and will protect the enameled dome from any scratching.

Weber Traveler gas barbecue – getting started

The Weber Traveler gas barbecue takes those mini barrel-shaped disposable gas canisters – or to use their official name, EN417 cartridges. Weber has their own branded version but there are other generic versions available and they will work just as well. Gas is gas after all. There's also the option to buy a separate adapter allowing you to use a larger gas canister when you're at home.

As with any best gas BBQ, the Weber lights instantly. Weber recommends you leave the lid closed and whack up the heat to high until the temperature gauge shows 500˚F/260˚C (or roughly 10 to 15 minutes).

Cooking on the Weber Traveler gas barbecue

Don't let the word 'portable' make you think that you're sacrificing on grill space for portability. The Weber Traveler gas barbecue features a deceptively large grilling surface, with room for around 15 burgers at one time. 

This would come in particularly handy if you bring it camping, as you could grill bacon and sausages, while simultaneously frying eggs on a pan beside them. 

Much like an indoor gas hob, the heat is controlled using a knob – turn counterclockwise to go high, clockwise to go low. Close the lid to retain the heat and to slow cook or open the lid and dial up the heat to sear meat and vegetables.

Over the time I was testing the grill, I cooked a (pretty enormous) tomahawk steak on it, as well as a whole seabass and fillets of salmon, delicious corn on the cob, charred bell peppers and crispy edged sliced halloumi. 

Again if you're used to cooking on gas – indoors or out – it won't be hard to master cooking on the Weber Traveler gas barbecue. It cooked everything I threw at it brilliantly and I could easily see myself bring this on our next family camping trip, provided we had the space in our car once we fit everything else in.

How easy is it to clean the Weber Traveler gas barbecue?

Cleaning the Weber Traveler is pretty straightforward. Leave it to cool completely after use. Then the next time you want to use it, preheat the grill, then the leftover bits from any previous use can be removed easily. 

Brush the grates with a bristled barbecue cleaning brush and then – using an old barbecue trick that I learned from an Australian – rub the plates with half an onion on a skewer. This will clean and season the grill plates. 

Remove the drip tray and scoop out the grease and debris, then return it to the grill. Finally, a quick wipe down with a soapy cloth (once it's cooled), and you're ready to go.

How does the Weber Traveler gas barbecue rate?

With regards to its portability, you can certainly move it around like a cart thanks to the sturdy wheels, but at just over 28kg in weight, you certainly couldn't call it light. 

As for packability – in a car, say – it's not very small either. You'd have to have a pretty big car boot or trunk, especially if you're including your luggage and/or camping gear in there, too. 

I discovered that the domed lid is removable, though Weber doesn't mention this in the instructions. It's secured in place using similar pins to those used for the wheels. Removing this might make packing the car a lot easier but this will leave the burner exposed so you would obviously need to protect it, so that it doesn't damage in transit. All of this is at your own risk though as any damage would naturally invalidate the warranty. 

As for warranties, the cookbox and lid are covered for five years for rust or burn through, the stainless-steel burner tube and cast iron grill plates are covered for three years and the remaining parts and components are covered for two. Just remember to register it with Weber after you buy it.

And how do I rate it? Well, if all you want is a barbecue on which you can cook straightforward meals for you and the family, then look no further. The Weber Traveler gas barbecue is for you. 

That's not to say that you can't try your hand at cooking more sophisticated dishes on it, but sometimes all you want is a simple, uncomplicated solution on which to cook a meal so you can get back to spending time outdoors with your loved ones. And the Weber Traveler gas barbecue is just that.

Where to buy the Weber Traveler gas barbecue

You can buy the Traveler from Weber directly or at John Lewis & Partners. As it's brand new and it's a Weber  - which is always a popular brand for quality - the Traveler does tend to be selling out online. However, anywhere it's in stock will pull through in our handy widget below, but you can take a look at where to buy barbecues in stock with our guide. 

About this review and our reviewer

Ginevra Benedetti is Associate Editor across the homes titles at Future. This means that she spends her days writing about all areas of the home, inside and out, as well as reviewing gadgets and appliances to ensure that you get the best products for your needs. 

She lives in a Victorian terrace with a 40ft long garden that backs onto a peaceful council allotment, so thankfully not that many neighbours are disturbed by her six-year-old’s endless trampoline antics. 

As with all our reviews, the Weber Traveler portable barbecue has been tested first-hand in her garden, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. 

The Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer claims to provide 'fast, flexible, and effortless cleaning' for a wide range of cleaning tasks. Whether you're looking to remove grime from patios, garden furniture, cars or gutters, it offers different settings to handle each task. It also comes with a high-pressure detergent nozzle to make cleaning jobs even easier. 

All of the above sounded like music to my ears as after a winter and spring of lots of rain and muddy weather my patio was in desperate need of a deep clean this year before summer finally arrived. Although I've used a pressure washer before, this is the first one I've used for any length of time and I was keen to see if attacking the dirt and grime with a pressure washer really would make a difference to my outdoor space. 

Find out how the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer performed on my patio and other surfaces, then check out more options in our buying guide to the best pressure washer.

Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer specifications

• Motor power 1900W 
• Max pressure 135 bar
• Max flow rate 410L per hour
• Hose length 7m
• Power cord length 5m
• Nozzles 3-in-1 nozzle
• Weight (without accessories) 7.9kg
• Detergent system high pressure foam

First impressions of the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer

The pressure washer comes in a relatively compact box, which was light enough for me to carry through to the garden on my own. It was easy to lift it out of the box using the sturdy handle at the top of the pressure washer. The wheels were already attached so I could simply stand it on the floor, unpack the rest of the box and start reading the manual - always my least favourite part of using garden tools! 

The pressure washer feels quite sturdy and the big, chunky handle and large wheels certainly makes it easy to manoeuvre it to where you want it on your patio. 

Getting started

Much to my husband's annoyance, I tend to be a little gung-ho about reading instructions and prefer to just get on with the job as quickly as possible, which typically ends up with me getting stuck 10 minutes down the line and having to start all over again, usually with his help. 

On this occasion, however, I was pleasantly surprised to find that there was very little to assemble as the main body of the pressure washer is already complete. 

The manual comes with simple instructions that are really easy to follow. A series of diagrams illustrates how to adjust the handle, attach the lance, high pressure hose, water supply hose and the detergent attachment if you are using it (more on that later).

Within a few minutes I'd gone through the instructions and fitted the attachments. I already had the garden hose ready and attached to the outside tap too, so it was simply a case of hooking it up to the fully assembled pressure washer, turning on the tap and I was ready for some cleaning action. 

It's worth noting that you can also use the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer with water fed from a water butt or tank, so you don't necessarily need to have an outside tap. 

What is the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer like to use? 

Once you've assembled the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer, you need to make sure that it's on level ground to ensure that it works correctly. Placing it on a paved area such as your patio, rather than on the lawn at the edge of the patio is the best option. 

It's easy to move the pressure washer to where you need it by lifting it using the large handle on top of the machine. It has large wheels so you can also pull it along. The handle is extendable for complete ease of use, so even if you're tall like I am, it's easy to reach down for the handle and pull it along behind you. Don't try and pull it by the hose as you could risk damaging the attachment, plus it could topple over and damage the main body of the machine.

Cleaning the patio pavers and pathway  

I'll be upfront here and say that our patio has certainly seen better days! It's on the list to be replaced when we extend our house in the coming months, so the pavers are quite old and we haven't been the best at keeping on top of cleaning them. The paving is a chequerboard design of alternating red and yellow-toned slabs so having them covered with a slight layer of dirt actually helps to mask this awful colour combination! In the past we've used the good old-fashioned method of scrubbing the patio with a broom and water to give it a refresh after winter. 

That being said, this spring they were in a particularly bad state after a very wet and muddy winter where the garden and patio often resembled a paddling pool rather than a welcoming spot to sit outside. The weather had taken its toll on the paving slabs and the patio and garden path were in serious need of a good clean. 

If yours is in a similar state, our guide on how to clean a patio has lots of useful tips to help you get it looking great again. 

Thanks to the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer's 3-in-1 nozzle, you can take your pick from three different settings. Choose from the fan, rotary, and pencil jet settings, depending on the task in hand. The manual has illustrations to show you what setting you should use for different surfaces.

To get started on the patio, I used the rotary setting as advised in the manual as this is best for removing dirt on patios. I worked my way across the patio to do a general clean of the entire space before I tackled any problem areas. 

For some of the most stubborn areas, I switched to the pencil jet setting, which directs a narrower jet of water to where you need it most. Moving between the different settings is easy as you simply twist a section on the lance of the pressure washer until it clicks into place for the next mode. The first couple of attempts I thought I'd adjusted it properly but the water jet didn't change. Once I realised that you had to wait until you heard (or felt) it click into place, it was easy. 

I really liked the ease of switching between the modes. Unlike some other pressure washers, there's no need to add a different nozzle to the lance each time you want to move on to a different task or switch between settings. 

After a couple of times going over each of the pavers on the patio, there was quite a lot of water on the surface of the patio which I needed to clear. You can do this by using the pressure washer to literally push the water off to one side, but I also found that using a stiff heavy-duty garden broom was a good way to remove the excess water so I could see what still needed an extra clean.

As my patio and garden path hadn't been cleaned with a pressure washer before, one deep clean wasn't enough to get rid of the many layers of dirt on the paving. I gave it a second clean the following weekend and I could really see the difference by then. The colours had been restored and I could once again see the texture of the paving slabs - if only I liked my paving I would have been really happy!

Cleaning the car

Having a pressure washer certainly made cleaning the car much easier and quicker. I used the fan setting to give the entire car an initial wash down before tackling some of the dirtier areas with a cleaning mitt. The wheel arches and wheels needed a little more attention as they were dirtier than the body of the car, but giving them a little more attention using the fan setting was enough to get them clean again too. 

Bosch advises that vehicle tyres and tyre valves must be cleaned from a minimum distance of 30 cm in order to avoid damage by the high-pressure jet.

The 5m power cable also makes it easy to move around the car when cleaning it without having to move the extension cable to a different spot in order to reach the far side of the car. 

The main feature that I liked when it came to cleaning the car was that you could change the angle of the fan. It means you can easily work from left to right and then top to bottom by simply twisting the head of the lance rather than having to twist your arm in an awkward direction. 

Other surfaces

When cleaning the patio, the windows, doors and walls at the back of my house got quite dirty as water splashed up them from the patio. Not too much of a problem as I could simply use the pressure washer to give them a good clean too. 

It easily washed any of the mud splatter off the surfaces, and I was careful not to aim the jet at any of the window or door seals in case it caused any water ingress. 

The only issue I had was that I got too close to the rendered wall at the back of the house when using the pressure washer. I also had it on the incorrect setting so the jet of water was too powerful and it chipped a section of the paintwork. This was definitely down to user error. 

My garage walls were also given a good clean. Although they didn't look particularly dirty, I was surprised by the difference it made cleaning them with the pressure washer. The masonry paint is back to its original colour now that any grubbiness has been washed off. 

How easy is it to use the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer?

If you haven't used a pressure washer a great deal, then it's quite easy to get the hang of it. However, there are a few things I learned the hard way about how to use a pressure washer. 

When cleaning a patio, you really do need to direct the pressure washer at the paving and make sure it doesn't hit the joints between the slabs. Not only will hitting the joints result in you loosening or removing the sand or mortar between the different slabs, you're also likely to get a big splash of water (and in my case mud) fly back at you from the paving joint. 

Cleaning patios can also be a pretty dirty job. I wore my wellies for the first clean, but for the second clean a couple of weeks later it was a hot day so I just wore my flip flops. My feet and legs got absolutely covered in dirty, muddy water splashes and took a fair bit of scrubbing to get them clean. I'll be sticking to wellies and old clothes going forward!

These mistakes are definitely down to user error, however, and not the pressure washer. I found the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer pretty simple to use. It's easy to set up, switch between modes and cleans a wide range of surfaces with ease. 

Additional features of the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer

The Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer also comes with a detergent attachment to make it even easier to clean stubborn stains. When you attach the foam bottle, you can then spray detergent onto the surface you're cleaning before switching back to the main fan setting to rinse it off. 

For cleaning our patio and the car we didn't need to use this as the water on its own was enough to get rid of the dirt. I'd also be mindful of using detergent on our patio as I wouldn't want the run-off water to soak into the soil and damage our plants. Plus with a puppy that likes to drink/eat anything in sight, detergent-filled water all over the patio is far from ideal! I can imagine that over winter when the car is really muddy and dirty, however, that the detergent attachment could be a useful addition.

If you are planning to use the detergent attachment, Bosch has these tips:

• First, select the fan jet setting on the 3-in-1 nozzle and remove the heavy dirt.
• Attach the foam bottle and spray on the detergent sparingly.
• When cleaning vertical surfaces, apply the detergent from bottom to top. When rinsing off, work from top to bottom.
• Rinse off the loosened dirt and detergent using the fan jet setting on the 3-in-1 nozzle.

It's also possible to buy extra attachments for the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer. These include things like a wash brush, car cleaning kit, a range of nozzles and an extension hose. 

There's also the AquaSurf 250 patio cleaner attachment, which I really like the sound of. It can be attached to the pressure washer as an additional tool for cleaning patios, stone pathways and even decking. It works by hovering over the ground to help remove algae, lichen and moss. Although I haven't had the opportunity to test out this extra attachment, I think it could be a great added extra. 

Storing the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer

The manual advises that once you've turned off the main switch, you should then operate the trigger to drain any remaining water from inside the high pressure hose. 

Cleaning the pressure washer is easy too. All you need to do is remove any debris from the ventilation slots and give it all a quick wipe down with a cloth. The manual advises against using water, solvents or polishes as this can damage the exterior finish. 

The compact design of the pressure washer means it fits neatly into a corner of our garden shed and it doesn't take up much space. Handy when the shed feels like its bursting at the seams with garden tools, garden furniture cushions, the best pizza oven and a mass of children's garden toys. The handle folds down so it takes up less room and there’s also on-board storage for the power cable, lance and sprayer so it's easy to store everything together in one spot.

When storing the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer, you need to make sure that you don't place the main body of the pressure washer on top of any of the cables, or twist the high pressure hose either as this could permanently damage it. 

Bosch also has these tips for storing your pressure washer away for several months if you're not going to be using it over winter: 

• Drain water out of pump running motor for a few seconds.
• Pull trigger to release all water.
• Do not place other objects on top of the machine.
• Store in a frost-free area.

How does the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer rate online?

After looking at various customer reviews online, the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer rates quite highly, with most people giving it 4 or 5 stars. Reviewers comment on how easy it is to assemble and use, plus how it's powerful enough to cope with a wide range of cleaning tasks. Many people describe it as 'a great all-rounder' that's lightweight and easy to store. 

All of those comments fit in with my own experience of using this pressure washer. This is mid-range in terms of price for Bosch pressure washers, but I think it's a great-value all-rounder to have in your garden shed. 

About the review and our reviewer

Beth Murton is the editor of Gardeningetc and has been writing about homes and gardens for 18 years for a wide range of magazines.

She lives in the Midlands with her husband and two young children in a renovated 1930s home. The large rear garden was one of the house's biggest selling points, and in recent years she has made lots of changes to the space to make it work for family life. 

She has a medium sized patio space, a paved garden path, two cars and some very dirty garage walls, so there were plenty of surfaces to test the pressure washer on. As with all our reviews, the Bosch Universal Aquatak 135 pressure washer has been tested first-hand in her garden over a number of weeks before returning it to the brand, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying.

Prior to this year, I had never used an inflatable hot tub, so I was excited to try out the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii Hot Tub. This is the second inflatable hot tub I've tested for Gardeningetc, having reviewed the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki inflatable hot tub in spring. The Helsinki hot tub surprised me in many ways and thoroughly convinced me that inflatable spas can offer a relaxing experience to melt away the stress of the day. 

So you can imagine that I jumped at the chance to try another of the best hot tubs from the Bestway inflatable spa line. In the last few weeks, I’ve had a chance to set up and use the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub on a regular basis and I’m beyond impressed with the construction and features. It just goes to show you that Bestway knows what it's doing when it comes to inflatable hot tubs. 

In this review, I’ll break down my experience with setting up the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub, and why it offers more bang for your buck than some other inflatable hot tubs. For more hot tub options, make sure to check out our guide to the best hot tub deals.

Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub: key specifications

• Type: inflatable hot tub
• Size: 71 x 71 x 28 in 
• Weight: 162 lbs 
• Heat range: 40–104ºF
• Water capacity: 222 gallons
• Material: PVC
• Volts: 120
• Fits: 4 people
• Number of jets: 60

Setting up the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii Hot Tub

My Bestway Saluspa Hawaii hot tub took six days to arrive to my home after placing the order. It was really heavy to move from my porch to inside my house. (When I received the Helsinki spa, the delivery person had the forethought to leave it on my back porch, so I didn’t have to move the box anywhere). 

My parents were in town visiting so they helped me set it up. With a few extra hands, the set up was incredibly easy and quick. The box was quite heavy, and even though it had handles built-in, one of the handles broke and we struggled to move it through my house and onto the back porch. (I should really invest in a dolly…)

Before opening the package, we cut a thick tarp to match the hot tub dimensions and laid it out on the concrete of my back patio. Although the hot tub material is quite durable, Bestway suggests placing a tarp down on your patio to protect the underside of the inflatable hot tub.

The first thing I noticed when opening the box is that the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii pump is much bigger than the pump of the Helsinki spa. This may seem counterintuitive because the Hawaii spa is smaller than the Helsinki spa, but I’m guessing it’s because the Hawaii pump has back massager jets and the Helsinki spa does not.

• See our patio ideas for tips on creating a relaxing outdoor space

I used the pump and an included tube to air up the spa and the cover. It took about 10 minutes in total. From there, I connected the pump to the hot tub and plugged it into an outdoor outlet. The Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub is a ‘plug n’ play’ spa which means all you have to do is plug it into a 120-volt outlet (inside or outside), fill up the spa with water, and it’s ready to go.

When I filled up the spa with water to the minimum line, the pump said that the temperature was about 76˚F. After placing the cover on top and buckling it down on all sides, I set the temperature to 104˚F. It was about 8:30 pm when we finished setting everything up. By 10:15 am the next morning, the hot tub was at 102˚F. I was too excited to wait to experience the Hawaii spa, so I jumped in before it reached 102˚F.

What is the Bestway Saluspa Hawaii hot tub like to use?

Once aired up, I found the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub to be very structurally sound. The outer walls are thick, and I can sit on them without too much give (I’m about 160 lbs). The cover insert was flimsier than I expected, but I really liked that it’s lightweight because it’s easier to remove and place back on. The Hawaii spa lacks any structural seating, but it’s padded on the bottom, so sitting down for 20-30 minutes is comfortable. 

The first few times I used the hot tub, I would set it on 104˚F and return eight hours later, only to discover that it was only at 102˚F. I couldn’t figure out why this was happening, but it seemed the third time was the charm, because it heated to 104˚F, and I haven’t had this issue since. 

The hot tub advertises that it can fit 4-6 people, but I highly doubt you could fit six average-sized people comfortably in this hot tub. Four or five people is a much sounder option, as long as you’re okay with maneuvering your legs around each other. This doesn’t bother me, but it’s something to think about. I felt extremely comfortable with three people in the hot tub. 

Equipped with a massage system and a hydrojet system, the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub offers two different relaxation experiences. The massage system button pushes air through the airjet system, a series of holes that run along the edge of the inside of the hot tub to create an intense number of bubbles. Despite the name, it’s not really a massage but rather a nice ‘bubbly’ feature. 

On the other hand, I’m a big fan of the hydrojet system. Once you hit this button, it starts the two jets that are placed in each corner of the hot tub. This offers an actual water massage on your back. Everyone who has joined me in the hot tub loves these jets as much as I do. It’s very soothing to a sore back and makes the inflatable hot tub feel like a luxurious soak. 

Additional features of the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub

There are a few features of the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub that I think are notable to point out. Because the pump is quite big, you can easily set multiple drinks or even a platter of snacks on top of it to really max out your enjoyment of your hot tub ideas. There are two cup holders, but these seem to be on the small side for some of my cups. 

This spa came with two filters. I alternate between the two filters and try to clean the one I’m not using with a water hose every other day. As far as chemicals go, they are necessary to maintaining a clean and healthy spa. I place one Bromine tablet in the chemical dispenser and utilize chemicals that have been suggested to me by a local pool and spa store. 

The Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub has a power-saving timer LED that lets you avoid wasting power by setting a time and duration for a heating cycle. Effectively, I can choose when I want the hot tub to start heating and for how long I want it to be heated. 

I’ve tried this a few times. The first time, I found it to be a bit confusing. However, I’ve since managed to figure it out. Unfortunately, each time you use this feature, you must reset it again. It’s not too much of a hassle, just something I have to remember each time I get into the hot tub. The effort will be worth it to save on my energy bill. 

For instance, the Helsinki Spa added about $60 per month to my electric bill. Although I can swing that, I prefer my electricity bill to not be so high. At this moment, I’m unable to see how the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub will affect my electricity bill.

I think my favorite thing about the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub is the fact that it is outfitted with Freeze Shield technology. Most inflatable hot tubs can’t be used in the cold weather (or 42.8˚F and below) because the material will become brittle and eventually break down. Thanks to the Freeze Shield technology, the Hawaii spa can be used mostly year-round. If the temperature dips below 42.8˚F, the spa heater must always remain on, and you’ll need to check the spa occasionally to make sure all is well. 

Bestway suggests that users shouldn’t use the spa if the outside temperature dips to 14˚F. And despite having the Freeze Shield technology, the company notes in the instructions that if the spa is used when the weather is below 42.8˚F, it’s best to disassemble and store it as any damage caused by the weather is the responsibility of the owner of the spa.

Since I live in Texas and it doesn’t usually get too cold in the winters here, I think I should be able to use this hot tub year-round.

• Keep your spa clean with our guide on how to clean a hot tub

How does it compare to similar models?

As mentioned, I’ve tested the Bestway Saluspa Helsinki airjet inflatable hot tub spa. Even though the Helsinki is cheaper, larger, and I liked the wood print exterior, I would choose the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub spa in a heartbeat. The Freeze Shield technology and the back massaging jets are a game changer. I didn’t think I’d find the thick walls of the Hawaii spa (the Helsinki has thinner walls) aesthetically pleasing, but they’re growing on me. They feel more structurally sound and don’t seem to require as much airing up as the Helsinki did. 

If you want to take your inflatable spa game to the next level, go for the Bestway Maldives Hydrojet Pro. It fits 5-7 people and has extra features like LED lights, built-in seats, and a foot massage system. Although I haven’t tested an inflatable hot tub with seats, I think it would be pretty comfortable. 

Is the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub worth the money?

The Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub doesn’t come cheap. It’s definitely on the high end of the inflatable hot tub market. That said, it does offer a hot tub experience that is more typical of a permanent hot tub – at a better price.  

If you specifically want something that’s portable – because you want to take it on vacation or move it between the homes of friends – I would suggest investing in this spa. The Freeze Shield Technology means you can use it much longer than other inflatable spas on the market, which is reason enough to invest in it.

About this review and our reviewer

Alex Temblador is a Dallas-based award-winning author and freelance writer that has covered home, design, architecture, and art in publications like Real Homes, Gardeningetc, Home & Gardens, Dwell, Architectural Digest, Artsy, Neighborhoods.com, Culture Trip, among many others. She recently bought her first home, a green Sears & Roebuck house that's over 100 years old, sits on half an acre of land and features a stunning wraparound porch, original hardwood floors, pocket doors, and a butler pantry. Alex loves to test products for Gardeningetc, Real Homes, and Homes & Gardens buying guides and reviews which has helped to expand the richness of her first-time homeowner life. The Mixed Latinx writer can usually be found working or relaxing in her outdoor spaces. 

As with all our reviews, the Bestway SaluSpa Hawaii hot tub was tested first-hand in Alex’s backyard, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand unless we are able to keep it as we are with this hot tub. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time.

Looking for more advice on other top outdoor products? Check out our guide to the best garden furniture to complete your garden space.

Cordless mowers don’t have the power to handle large gardens, right? Wrong. The Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower packs twin 40V lithium-ion batteries capable of chowing through lawns of 500 sq m or more in a single charge. If your garden is bigger than that, get a ride-on (or preferably a gardener with a ride-on). 

To set the scene, our garden is around 1,000 sq m (approximately a quarter of an acre) and I usually use a beast of a ride-on to tackle the majority – a job that takes between one-two hours, depending on grass height. Then roll out our self-propelled petrol mower to get round the parts the ride-on can’t reach, like the front garden, and around the kids’ swings etc.  

For this review I did three cuts. First, with the grass box on, I seriously put the Cobra MX51S80V to work on our lawn when it hadn’t been cut for a month due to May’s continuous downpours – brutal! The second, with the mulch cover on, was a more typical weekly summer cut, and finally I did a side-discharge run three days later, just to be thorough! I was especially keen to find out what impact each method would have on battery life, plus, of course, how the Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower coped with our lawn.

Read on for the results of our test, and if you fancy checking out which other designs made our best lawn mower list, make sure you pop over to our buying guide.

Key product specifications of the Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower

• Lawn size: large (at least 500 sq m)
• Battery: x2 40v 5Ah Li-ion Batteries (Twin 40v) 
• Drive type: self propelled
• Cutting width: 51cm
• Cutting height: 25-75mm
• Grass bag capacity: 60 litres
• Charge time: 90 mins
• Weight: 29kg (without batteries)
• Warranty: Two years

First impressions of the Cobra MX51S80V lawn mower

The box is big, and heavy – definitely a two-man job to move, unless you have a pump truck to hand! At first glance, it’s immediately obvious that the Cobra MX51S80V lawn mower is a heavyweight player, too. The metal blade housing is wide, and the battery mount door opens and closes with reassuring rigidity. The wheels are chunky and robust; no Tonka Toy plastic-ness to see here. 

Getting it out of the box (without breaking it as this test mower had to go back) required back-up assistance but most people can just break out the Stanley Knife and send the cardboard off for recycling. 

Getting started

Putting the Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower together was a total breeze; screw on the handle, clip the cables into place and screw the handle onto the grass box. Actually, the latter task was a little tougher and called for the electric screwdriver and a bit of brute force (not mine) as the screw appeared to be bigger than the receiving hole! 

I didn’t need to look at the instructions, but for review purposes I can confirm they are very easy to follow. The batteries are supplied partially charged and took 40 minutes to reach full power (there’s an LED indicator on each Fast Charger). Then it was time for the mower to meet the overgrown swampland in my garden and work out whether it warrants a place on our best cordless lawn mower list.

What it’s like to use the Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower

Once charged, you simply slide both batteries into position – there’s only one way they can go in, and lock into place. I started with the cutting height at its highest – an easy manoeuvre via a huge handle next to the rear right wheel – due to the severe overgrowth situation. 

Next just turn the isolator key to on, press down the ON button and then any one of the four buttons on the main handle to power up. Similar to petrol self-propelled mowers, there’s a skinny secondary handle that pulls up to activate propulsion. Be prepared; it surges forward like a greyhound out of the traps. 

Like most electric mowers, the Cobra MX51S80V lawn mower is blissfully quiet but it’s far gutsier than any others I have tested. The self-propelling is a-mazing, especially going up a slope, but do remember to release the lever as you get close to a hedge or fence, otherwise you’ll bosh right into it bumper-car style. This happened a few times before I got the hang of things. 

To mulch the grass, rather than collect, just hook the mulching guard onto the back. The grass is then double-cut into fine fodder that fertilizes your lawn. It also saves the effort of emptying the grass box, which is a huge bonus considering how heavy a fully-loaded 60 litre grass box is (i.e. very). 

The Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower also features a side-discharge option, whereby a chute clips on one side (with the mulch guard still on). The point of this? Battery power lasts longer because the mower doesn’t have to cut the grass twice, and nor is it lugging around an increasingly heavy box of cut grass. The downside: unless you cut very frequently, every 2-3 days in peak-growing season, your lawn can take on the appearance of a ready-to-bale field of hay. Add kids and dogs to the mix, and your house will end up full of grass, too. 

How easy is the Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower to use?

The Cobra MX51S80V lawn mower is exceptionally easy to use. It powers up effortlessly, every time, and thanks to the self-propelling function it stormed over our wilderness. The BEST feature is the power-boost that revs up the cutting speed automatically when the mower hits a thicker/taller patch. You can literally hear the extra effort going in as the motor powers up and there’s no loss in speed or performance regardless of the grass depth. 

Getting to grips with the self-propelling situation took practice, and I’m no novice with this type of mower. When getting to the end of a run – where you need to do a turn – the key is to release the lever handle in plenty of time before you turn, otherwise it will run away with you and potentially slam into the hedge. This 'may' have happened a few times. I chose not to engage the propeller going downhill to preserve battery life but it really came into its own when getting back up those slopes (bear in mind I walked five miles doing one cut, according to my Garmin watch).

I loved the voluminous grass box, on the grounds that it didn’t need emptying nearly as frequently as I feared. Around 10 times for a 500 sq m area with very long grass, but I’d expect that figure to halve in normal conditions when the lawn is regularly mown. Oh, and it is very easy to dismount and empty, if not so easy to carry when fully loaded.

The results? On the first, longest and toughest cut, I was bowled over by how unfazed the Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower was – literally nothing stopped it powering on. And if it came across a thicker clump – mainly clover-based – it just upped its game with a boost of power.

Unsurprisingly, given the motor was working at full bore most of the way, it only managed half our lawn on a single charge (so around 500 sq m), but I was mowing for just under 50 minutes (49:46 to be precise) before it admitted defeat. There were a couple of times when the Cobra MX51S80V got blocked and stopped picking up, even though the grass box wasn’t full, but, overall, it did a fine job in challenging circumstances. 

Tellingly, when I dug our Husqvarna ride-on out to finish up (I didn’t have time to recharge the batteries), it couldn’t cope AT ALL. The chute continuously blocked, which meant sludgy piles of grass all over the lawn and a second run-through the next day to pick up the mess. In short, and ignoring all the walking required, the Cobra MX51S80V did a better job than a decent quality ride-on. Impressive stuff. 

On the second run, with the mulcher, things went more smoothly (predominantly because the grass was more manageable) and the power-boost was barely required. Consequently, the batteries lasted just over an hour (1:03), and of course the grass box didn’t need emptying so the whole process was far faster. Mulching is the future. 

On the third run, with the side-discharge, I nearly managed the whole lawn (remember there’s no stopping and starting to empty a grass box, which impacts battery life), but I did notice a lot more grass on my boots and, once the kids and dogs were let out, they traipsed plenty back inside the house. Grrr. Battery life was similar to mulching (lasting only four minutes longer) and the results were good, but no better than the other two modes. In all honesty, I can’t really see the point of side-discharge, except perhaps some people just prefer this traditional method.

Additional features on the Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower

There are battery indicators all over the Cobra MX51S80V lawn mower – on the batteries themselves, on the chargers and on the handle – so keeping an eye on juice levels is super easy. I love the full grass box indicator, too. It’s a pretty low-tech, flappy affair: when the flap is flapping there’s room in the box, and when it stops flapping, it’s time to empty. Simple. The handle can be folded for easier storage, and it can also be adjusted to a higher or lower position, which is great for comfort.  

How does the Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower rate? 

Online customer reviews for the Cobra MX51S80V lawn mower are predominantly positive, mostly four stars or above (out of five), with just a few gripes about the uncomfortable self-propelling handle. The trick, I found, is to use your right hand to hold the power button down (the mower stops automatically if released) and your left to lift and hold the self-propelling handle in and out of position. The only negative point I would add is that the Cobra MX51S80V lawn mower did ground out at the front a few times, on only slightly uneven ground. Acceptable when on a very low grass height setting, but this was mid-height so shouldn’t have happened. 

The major pluses far outweigh these few minor bugbears though. For those with larger lawns the biggest selling point has got to be the mega 51cm blade width, which reduces the number of passes you'll need to perfect your lawn ideas – every cm counts when you’re mowing big areas. 

Then there’s the excellent battery power. The Cobra MX51S80V’s twin batteries really deliver on grunt, especially when the grass is overgrown – even though I didn’t quite manage the full 1,000 sq m on a single charge, when you’re covering big areas, a 90-minute break to recharge is more than welcome.

Want more advice on how to mow a lawn and get great results every time? Head over to our expert advice feature. 

About our review – and reviewer

Linda Clayton has been an interiors journalist for 20 years. Since graduating from Cardiff’s School for Journalism, she's happily writing about the latest trends, product reviews and giving her expert design advice for the likes of Gardeningetc, Homes & Gardens, Livingetc, Ideal Home and Real Homes ever since.  

She currently lives in Devon with her husband and two children, and recently renovated and extended the house. The property was previously a commercial nursery and boasts a half-acre plot, giving her plenty of space to road test the latest lawn mowers, hot tubs and garden tools. 

As with all our reviews, the Cobra MX51S80V cordless lawn mower was tested first-hand in Linda's garden, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The product was given to us free of charge and we tested it for as long as possible before sending it back to the brand. 

Someone recently asked me where I spend the most time at my home. I quickly replied, 'outdoors'. My love of being outside has led me on an adventure to design the perfect outdoor set-up. Although I’ve gathered seating, a hammock, hot tub, and a fire pit, the one thing I lacked was a grill. You can imagine how excited I was when I found out I had a chance to personally test a Big Green Egg. 

The Large Big Green Egg looks just as it is named – huge, green, and shaped like an egg. I’ve cooked on some of the best grills in the past – of various types – but it had been about 10 years since I had cooked on a charcoal grill. From what I saw online, the Large Big Green Egg was super easy to use and produced quality and delectable food. However, that didn’t mean I wasn’t secretly nervous. Grilling is a slightly intimidating endeavor. I was more familiar with gas grills and had never owned a grill in my life. Was this going to be too complicated for me? 

To prepare myself, I explored the Big Green Egg website, by looking through BBQ recipes and watching how-to videos. When the Large Big Green Egg was delivered to my door and I popped the top and started grilling, I quickly realized that I should not had been worried in the slightest. Cooking on this green-colored grill was no problem at all, and it gave me another great excuse to be outside. 

Ordering and setting up the Big Green Egg

There are a lot of things to consider when ordering and setting up a Large Big Green Egg at your home. Those with a complete outdoor kitchen can order the Large egg itself (without a base) for about $950. However, most people will probably require a base (or as the company calls it, a ‘nest’) for the grill, and the best way to do that is to order your Big Green Egg as part of a package deal.

I received the Nest + Handler Package, which means my Large Big Green Egg was placed in a metal base that had a handle and wheels. The package also included a bag of natural lump charcoal, SpeediLight All Natural Charcoal Starters, an ash removal tool, and a Grid Gripper, a tool to safely remove the cooking grid when it’s hot. The best accessory in the package was a convEGGtor, a ceramic plate that you place under the cooking grid for indirect cooking or to bake, smoke, and roast. 

• Do away with the base and see how to integrate your Big Green Egg with these outdoor kitchen ideas

Where to buy the Big Green Egg

US Buyers
Once you’ve decided which package or egg you’d like, there are a few different ways to order and receive a Big Green Egg. You won’t be able to order an Egg from Amazon or find it for sale in a store like Walmart. Instead, the company uses a distribution network that works with local stores that have knowledgeable experts on Big Green Eggs. 

Even if you purchase a Big Green Egg on shop.biggreenegg.com, the order is fulfilled by a local distributor near you. If you prefer to grab your Big Green Egg in-person at a store, you’ll have to look through the company’s distributor network, though Ace Hardware is one such national store that offers Big Green Eggs.

UK Buyers
Big Green Egg is available at more stores nationwide in the UK than in the US. Notable stockists include John Lewis & Partners and Amazon, although it is possible to buy direct from the Big Green Egg site, too. 

Delivery

If you’re handy, you can choose to have the Large Big Green Egg delivered to your door unassembled. While I could have put the grill together myself, I much prefer the method in which I received my Large Big Green Egg – by delivery. 

After my Large Big Green Egg order was placed, a local distributor gave me a call and scheduled a drop off time and date. They arrived with a trailer that housed my Large Big Green Egg already assembled. After pulling the Large Big Green Egg out of the trailer and placing it where I asked, I was shown how to use the grill and the accessories and received some fantastic Big Green Egg grilling tips.

A potential Big Green Egg buyer can have the same set-up and delivery option that I had. Some local distributors will do the assembly on-site, others will arrive with the Big Green Egg already assembled. Some stores charge a fee, others give discounts or free assembly and delivery for reward members. I advise investing in the set-up and assembly option, especially if you order a Medium, Large, or XL Big Green Egg which contain very heavy materials. It’s better to have your grill properly assembled and receive helpful tips and tricks from people who are well versed in the grill’s features.  

What is the Big Green Egg like to use? 

I’ve cooked on the Big Green Egg many times and have made everything from steak to pork chops, salmon, shrimp, jalapeno-wrapped bacon, squash, and elote (Mexican corn). All of the food turned out delicious, but I wouldn’t have been able to accomplish these delightful dishes without utilizing the Big Green Egg website. 

My Large Big Green Egg didn’t come with a grilling instructional pamphlet (none of them do). Even though the delivery guys provided some instructions on how to light the grill and what I could cook with the Big Green Egg, I made sure to read the instructional pages on the grill’s website. If I hadn’t, I wouldn’t have known that the first time you use the grill (preferably the first few grilling sessions), you shouldn’t go above 350 degrees Fahrenheit, because doing so could damage the gasket which would then need to be replaced. 

Lighting the Big Green Egg

The Large Big Green Egg is a charcoal grill, so it is a bit trickier to light than gas or wood pellet grills. However, Big Green Egg has tried to make it as easy as possible. To start, I removed the grill grid and placed lump charcoal (never use briquettes) in the bottom of the egg. My package came with SpeediLight All Natural Charcoal Starters which are break-apart fire starter pieces (they feel like soft cardboard). The first time I lit the grill, I did as the delivery guys suggested and took two starters and twisted them, so they didn’t quite break apart and then placed them in the middle of the charcoal. After lighting the starter, I closed the dome and opened the top and bottom hatch to allow air to flow through and the charcoal to catch fire. This worked, but it took about 30 minutes for the grill to reach 350 degrees. 

Lighting a fire was a bit more difficult my second and third use. I tried to replicate what I did the first time, but it didn’t work. So instead, I followed the online instructions on the Big Green Egg website and lit two fire starters on two opposite sides of the lump charcoal and left the hatch completely open for about eight to ten minutes to allow for more airflow to the charcoal. The fire really heated up this way. After about 10 minutes, I closed the egg and completely opened the chimney and the bottom hatch (where the ash is collected). This method of starting the grill seems to work the best for me, although it does take about 20–30 minutes for the grill to reach necessary temperatures (350–400 degrees) for grilling. The longer I use the grill, the better I will become at lighting it. 

Once the charcoal was lit and the dome was closed, I started regulating the temperature by controlling the air flow through the chimney and the bottom hatch. The more open those two hatches are, the higher the inner temperature of the grill becomes. Close them slightly, and the temperature goes down. I monitored the temperature change with the built-in temperature gauge on the front of the dome. 

Once I ‘set’ the grill at the right temperature, I kept the grill closed most of the cooking time, only opening it to turn my meats or vegetables when necessary. This allowed for the food to be enveloped by the smoke and produced juicy, delicious flavors. 

How to use the Big Green Egg

If I didn’t know what temperature to set the grill, I went to the Big Green Egg recipe page and searched for the item I planned to grill. I didn’t necessarily follow the recipes to a “T,” especially when it came to marinating the food, but instead focused on finding the temperature setting and cook time for the meat or the vegetable I was cooking. I came to realize that grilling on this charcoal grill is kind of like using an oven. Set the temperature, monitor the food, and it’s done after a certain amount of time. 

Cooking on the Big Green Egg

As I mentioned, I received a few different accessories to assist in my grilling endeavors, such as the convEGGtor. It’s a ceramic piece that I can choose to place in the grill when I want to cook something with indirect heat. It basically turns the grill into an outdoor convection oven. This is nice because I can use the grill as a pizza oven, bake cinnamon rolls, or slow cook meats to achieve that fall-off-the-bone effect with barbecue.

I have used the convEGGtor quite a bit, such as with appetizers like bacon wrapped salmon or bacon wrapped jalapenos. For these recipes, I wanted the bacon to thoroughly cook and the smoke from the grill to infuse into the cream cheese and the jalapenos and salmon. The convEGGtor prevented the appetizers from being scorched by an open fire. Using this accessory does mean that the food takes a bit longer to cook, but the results were well worth it. 

Overall, the Large Big Green Egg is a lot easier to use than I expected. While there is a little bit of a learning curve to using this grill (especially with lighting it), every single meal that I’ve prepared with my Large Big Green Egg has come out nicely and I’m beyond enthused to use this grill for many summers to come. 

Additional features for the Big Green Egg

If you plan to purchase a Large Big Green Egg, there are a few things to keep in mind. For instance, the Big Green Egg is like an egg, in that if it falls and hits the ground, it’s going to crack. This is why I highly suggest you purchase a package that includes a nest. 

I store my Big Green Egg in the garage and when I want to grill, I pull (with the handle) the Large Big Green Egg outside. If you push the Big Green Egg and hit a rock or divot in the ground, it’s more likely to topple over and break the egg. Once I’ve placed it in the spot I want, I lock the wheels and I’m ready to grill. 

Maintenance for the Big Green Egg

Protecting your Big Green Egg also includes maintenance, and you’ll be happy to know that this grill doesn’t require too much work. I like to brush the grill grates and food particles off the convEGGtor before each use, but that’s about all I do when it comes to pre-grilling maintenance. Cleaning the inside with water or soap is not advised. 

As I mentioned above, you can only use lump charcoal in this grill. What I didn’t mention is that you should never use lighter fluid to start a fire. The lighter fluid will ruin the Big Green Egg’s inner materials, so always use fire starters or a butane starter. Once you’ve filled the Big Green Egg with charcoal to the ‘full line,’ you can cook about three times before refilling the grill again. Lump charcoal doesn’t produce a ton of ash, but you will need to clean out the bottom hatch occasionally with the Big Green Ash tool. Collect the ash in the included pan and throw the ash in the trash or use it in compost. 

The Big Green Egg is warm to the touch while cooking, so be sure to keep children away from it. Once you’re done grilling, it does take hours for the grill to fully cool down. I snuff out the fire by closing all the grates which removes the airflow and lets the fire die. 

• Keep you grill free from grime with our advice on how to clean a BBQ

Warranty

Perhaps the most important thing to note about the Large Big Green Egg is that it comes with a limited lifetime warranty. This is particularly notable because the limited lifetime warranty covers all the materials and workmanship on the ceramic components in the grill. The metal components of the grill like the fire grate or the hinge mechanism have a five-year warranty.  

How does the Big Green Egg compare to similar models? 

Full disclosure, I haven’t tested any other kamado-style grills, but from what I can find online, the Big Green Egg has a loyal fan base and for good reason. Not only did Big Green Egg introduce kamado-style grills to the US, but they’re designed to be very easy-to-use, made from top-quality materials, and offer a range of sizes for every household. 

That said, other kamado grills have become popular like the Coyote and Primo grills. The Primo grill is similar in features and size options to the Big Green Egg, while the Coyote grill runs on the smaller side. Kamado Joe is probably the second-most-known kamado grill on the market. The brand differs from Big Green Egg in that it offers additional features like a multi-tier cooking system, air lift hinge that reduces the dome’s weight, and extra accessories like a rotisserie attachment.

The prices are similar among all kamado-style grills so if you think you can save more with one over another, that’s probably not the case. The one way that Big Green Egg stands out from competitors is the fact that it uses a local distribution network. As I mentioned before, you can’t buy a Big Green Egg at retailers like Costco, Walmart, or Amazon, which do sell other types of kamado grills. Potential buyers could see this as a roadblock, especially if there isn’t a Big Green Egg distributor near their home. However, there are some major benefits to Big Green Egg using a local distributor. 

 A local distributor is as the name implies 'local,' so your money is going back into your local community rather than to a huge corporation. Big Green Egg also makes sure to only use distributors who are knowledgeable about grills and grilling. These experts are better informed about the Big Green Egg features and can help customers much better with assembly or offer grilling demonstrations if necessary. That attention to detail is the reason why Big Green Egg is still one of the most beloved kamado grill brands and people continue to buy it over new brands on the market. 

Should you buy the Big Green Egg? 

The Big Green Egg is definitely worth the purchase. Yes, it’s a bit pricey, but so are all the other kamado-style grills. Besides, once you buy a Big Green Egg, you won’t need to (or want to) buy another grill for the rest of your life.  

Like many other people, I give the Large Big Green Egg a five-star rating. It produces incredibly wonderful meals and it’s easy to use, especially for those who haven’t cooked on charcoal grills before. 

With the weather warming up and the rainy spring season moving on, I plan to pull out my Large Big Green Egg and grill regularly this summer. There are so many recipes I’m dying to try. Barbecue at my place, anyone?

About this review, and our reviewer

Alex Temblador is a Dallas-based award-winning author and freelance writer that has covered home, design, architecture, and art in publications like Real Homes, Gardeningetc, Home & Gardens, Dwell, Architectural Digest, Artsy, Neighborhoods.com, Culture Trip, among many others. She recently bought her first home, a green Sears & Roebuck house that's over 100 years old, sits on half an acre of land and features a stunning wraparound porch, original hardwood floors, pocket doors, and a butler pantry. Alex loves to test products for Gardeningetc, Real Homes, and Homes & Gardens buying guides and reviews which has helped to expand the richness of her first-time homeowner life. The Mixed Latinx writer can usually be found working or relaxing in her outdoor spaces. 

As with all our reviews, the Large Big Green was tested first-hand in Alex’s backyard, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. The products are given to us free of charge and we test them for as long as possible before sending them back to the brand unless we are able to keep it as we are with this grill. This means that we can continue to use the product which gives us the opportunity to return to our reviews for updating, so you can keep up-to-date with how it's fared over a period of time. 

The Einhell AGILLO 18/200 cordless scythe can do both strimming and brushcutting and is a member of Einhell’s Power X-Change series – a group of cordless tools which can share batteries.

I am lucky enough to already be in possession of a cordless lawnmower from Einhell, which I love, so I was eager to try another machine from the same series. We have a split-level garden, with lots of borders, low-level walls, a fence at the bottom and the new addition of a kids' climbing frame, so there are many obstacles to navigate a mower around. We knew the best strimmer is a must have for this garden.

Our bottom lawn is maintained by a robotic lawnmower and we use the cordless mower for the top two levels, but neither are able to mow closely around the edges, borders, steps, fence line or climbing frame. We also have some borders with thick foliage, which was getting very tall and unruly – so I was hoping that the Einhell AGILLO would be ready to tackle the borders and leave our lawn edges looking pristine.

Einhell AGILLO 18/200 Cordless Scythe product specs:

• Power type: 18V 4.0Ah Li-ion battery
• Battery life: 30 mins
• Charging time: 1 hour (for full battery from low – first charge is longer)
• Best for: trimming and cutting Cutting width: 20cm (blade) 30cm (spool)
• Spool length: 8m
• Weight: 6.45kg

First impressions

I must admit, that I was a bit confused by the name of this machine – ‘cordless scythe’ conjures up images of a modern-day tool for the Grim Reaper. It’s also referred to as a ‘brushcutter’, which is another term I was unfamiliar with, so I was hoping the contents of the box would offer me clarity.

I have used a cordless strimmer before, so I was surprised that the box was quite heavy. It comes with four booklets of information, as well as some information tags attached to parts of the strimmer too, plus a rather serious looking harness.

As I have used another Einhell product, I wasn’t surprised that the cordless scythe comes partly unassembled. After looking through the booklets of information, I found I only needed to keep two, as the others are an extension of the instructions in different languages and the last is a note on stability checks that Einhell perform, before sending out your tool.

Getting started: setting up the Einhell AGILLO 18/200 Cordless Scythe

The operating instructions have numbered illustrations at the front, which demonstrate what should be in the box, how to assemble the scythe, how to attach and adjust the harness and how to operate the machine. After checking I had all the correct items supplied, I put the supplied battery on charge (note that batteries are not included by all suppliers) and set to work assembling the machine.

The first step is fitting the guard hood which involves removing and reattaching a screw. Pleasingly, no extra tools from your home tool box are needed, as Einhell supplies you with a multifunctional tool, fit for purpose. You then fit the two handles and secure the cable to the handle. As I’d hoped, the instructions include a description of ‘proper use’ which tells you that when used as a cordless scythe (brushcutter), the blade can cut young trees, strong weeds and light undergrowth. When used as a grass trimmer (strimmer), it can cut lawns, grassed areas and small weeds. The machine comes with the spool already attached, so I opted to trim the garden first.

Overall set up took me about 15 minutes. I found that I had to keep going backwards and forwards between the written instructions, the illustrations and the page which listed all the numbered parts, as the written instructions are slightly confusing and I had trouble fitting the guard hood and trying to work out where the additional handle should sit.

Using the harness
Once the machine is assembled, it’s time to don the harness. As the equipment is rather heavy, you need to wear it with the harness to help with handling. The instructions are not very helpful for this as it just says 'Fit the harness', with a hint to look at figure nine. This just shows how you clip it on round your waist. 

Luckily a little common sense goes a long way and I soon worked out that the harness goes on like a backpack. Then you adjust the waist strap and shoulder straps. You hook the strimmer to the harness and adjust the handles and strap attachment until you find a comfortable working position. This took me a good 10 minutes as it was a lot of trial and error, moving the strap attachment up and down and tweaking the angle of the handles, until I found the right position for the harness to take the weight of the strimmer. The instructions recommend making some swinging movements without starting the motor, to make sure you’re happy with it.

I’m 5ft 4in and the handle is quite long, so I found I had to adjust the shoulder straps and waist strap until the harness clip was sitting on my hip. This left the strimmer hovering just above the ground when I held the handles. My partner is 6ft 4in so he had to extend all of the straps and the handle, so he could work comfortably. It’s good that the handles and harness can be adapted so much, to suit all users.

Once you’re happy with the equipment, all that’s left to do is to insert the battery and you’re ready to go.

What is the Einhell AGILLO 18/200 Cordless Scythe like to use?

To switch the equipment on, you have to press the safety lock on the bike-like handles, at the same time as pressing the on/off trigger. You can adjust the speed by squeezing the trigger to a greater or lesser extent. To switch off the machine, you just release the on/off trigger. There is an extensive safety booklet that I recommend reading – especially if you are a novice user (like me).

Use as a strimmer
The instruction manual promises that when the equipment is correctly assembled, it will cut weeds and long grass in places which are difficult to access. The strimmer I used before had a plant protecting guard, which meant that you couldn’t accidentally damage plants you were strimming close to. A great feature, but it also meant that you couldn’t get right up to fences or walls, which left the edges looking untidy.

The Einhell AGILLO 18/200 Cordless Scythe, has a safety guard at the rear of the strimmer, to protect you, but is free at the front, so I hoped this meant I could get into the corners around the fence posts at the bottom of our garden, as well as next to the walls, steps, climbing frame and borders.

I started at the top level and then followed the borders, down to the bottom of the garden, around the fence posts, climbing frame and silver birch, then back up along the steps and border walls, until I was back where I started. This took a total of 25 minutes and I was very impressed. You can glide the strimmer slowly into the nooks and crannies of your garden and it manages to reach every blade of grass. I was careful not to go in close too quickly, as you can hear when the spool hits hard objects, which ultimately results in more wear of the spool line.

Another great feature of this strimmer is the semi-automatic line extension system (automatic jog line feed) which extends the spool line as needed. To activate, you run the motor and tap the line spool on the ground, which automatically extends the line. There is a sharp blade on the guard hood, which cuts the line to a safe length. This system ensures that you are cutting your lawn with the optimum cutting width at all times, which will ultimately make the job quicker.

When trimming or mowing grass in open areas, you just swing the strimmer from side to side, keeping the spool parallel to the ground at the desired height. This is where the harness really helps as it takes most of the weight allowing an easy continuous cut. The harness is actually very comfortable, as the shoulder and back straps are padded, so I found that it made handling the strimmer a breeze.

Additional to trimming, mowing and cutting along edges, you can also use the strimmer for low trimming and mowing to the ground. To do this, you hold the it at an angle of 30 degrees for mowing to the ground. This will cut any vegetation right back to surface level.

Use as a brushcutter
The Einhell AGILLO 18/200 Cordless Scythe can also be used as a brushcutter. This means it will deal with dense grass, weeds and annoying undergrowth.

To switch to operation as a brushcutter, you must change the spool to the cutting blade. First remove the spool by pressing the locking lever and turning the cutting line unit at the same time. You can then lift it off the motor shaft. You also have to remove the cutting line cover on the guard hood (whilst being careful of the line cutting blade). This is a bit fiddlier and the illustrations are not the most helpful for this either.

Next, you have to slide the cutting blade, pressure plate and pressure plate cover on, securing it all with a hex nut (provided). You press the locking lever, tighten the hex nut and make sure the blade can rotate freely. This took just over five minutes to fit, but now I know what I’m doing, it hasn't taken as long on further uses. There is also a useful label attached to the brushcutter blade which shows illustrations for the order the parts go on and reminding you that the blade must be aligned on the motor shaft.

Now secure, I referred back to the instructions for tips on using the blade. Unfortunately, there are only specific instructions relating to operation as a strimmer, rather than a brushcutter. The only instructions for the blade are for what to do if the blade jams and how to prevent recoil. There is a sentence and illustration on how to cut dense stalks, but for a novice user such as myself, a section on brushcutting would have been very useful.

As there was lack of instruction, I searched on my phone for how to use it and came across a handy video from Einhell on YouTube (although not on the Einhell UK channel). This also shows how to change the spool too. It would be useful if Einhell included a link to this in their instruction manual, like many other manufacturers now do.

Equipped with the knowledge that you use it pretty much the same as the strimmer, I set to work trimming some of the thick, dead plants in our borders. Again, the Einhell AGILLO ripped through them with ease and what would take a few minutes with some shears, took seconds.

Ease of use

Once the Einhell AGILLO 18/200 Cordless Scythe is set up and the harness is adjusted, it is very easy to use. Unlike corded machines, moving round the garden with this strimmer is a piece of cake. There’s no faffing around with extension cables or sockets either, which saves time. I was also able to do the whole garden in one go, without having to change batteries, or wait for a battery to charge.

I’m not sure how much I would use the scythe as a brushcutter, as we don’t have many things in our garden which would require a heavy-duty blade that often. I think I’d probably opt to always keep the strimmer spool on, for use fortnightly to go round the edges after the lawn has been mowed. In the time it takes to swap the spool over, I could probably do a quick job with some garden shears. However, if you had a lot of thick foliage in your garden, which a strimmer couldn’t tackle on its own, I could see how swapping to the brushcutter might be very beneficial.

Additional features of the Einhell AGILLO 18/200 Cordless Scythe

Like some other machines in Einhell’s cordless tools range, the AGILLO is driven by a brushless front motor, which means it has more power, better weight distribution and a longer life than carbon motors. This also means less maintenance. To add to this, I found that the strimmer is fairly quiet, compared to other lawn mowers and strimmers.

The bump feed system for lengthening the spool, which is cut automatically, is a great feature and saves you having to fiddle around with it manually, mitigating a safety risk.

For optimum handling, the comfortable harness and two-hand bike handle mean that operation is ergonomic and tireless. Plus, it’s easy to store as the shaft unscrews and splits in the middle and there is an integrated wall holder for easy and tidy storage – it will certainly not take up much room in your garage or shed.

Einhell Power X-Change
The cordless scythe is part of Einhell’s powerful Power X-Change family, which means that if you own other Einhell products in the same range, you can interchange the batteries. As we had been using a Einhell cordless mower too, we could keep one battery on charge whilst using the other one and then swap them over.

The batteries themselves come with three LEDs to show how much charge they have left. All you need to do is press the button on the battery indicator switch and a number of LEDs will light up to show you if there is enough battery to complete the task. The battery charger also has indicators and there is a full indicator guide in the operation manual as well as a handy troubleshooting page.

How does it rate online?

I have rated the Einhell AGILLO 18/200 four and a half stars. I would have rated it five, as it does a great job, is efficient and powerful, but it is on the heavy side, the instructions aren’t the best, plus it doesn’t do edging like some strimmers of the same price do.

Once I had translated the reviews (most are in French or German), the majority of users rate the Einhell AGILLO five stars. They agree that the harness is comfortable, it’s fairly quiet, the Power X-Change system is great and the battery lasts long enough to complete most jobs. Most users comment that they found it easy to set up, with the exception of changing the spool to the blade and a few have also mentioned the trial and error that comes with adjusting the harness.

In terms of price, it is midrange compared to similar models, but if you have any other Einhell products in the same Power X-Change range, you will save on having to purchase batteries as these don't always come included. In conclusion, I would highly recommend the Einhell AGILLO 18/200 Cordless Scythe for not just a medium-large garden with lots of borders like mine, but for sprawling plots with loads of grass, too.

About this review and our reviewer

Bethan Davis is a PR Officer and mum of two from the West Midlands. Her family garden is a terraced on three levels with a large lawn at the bottom and plenty of borders. There is a field at the end and the wire fence separating it can be difficult to mow up to, so a strimmer is needed for lots of jobs around her property.

She tested the Einhell AGILLO 18/200 Cordless Scythe over several weeks this spring, in conjunction with an Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower that uses the same batteries.

In the market for buying a wood pellet grill? Then the Traeger Pro 575 is the ideal grill to give you an introduction to this easy and delicious way of cooking outdoors.

Despite being a big name in barbecues in the US, Traeger isn’t as well a known brand in the UK. Unlike the majority of barbecues in the UK, all of Traeger’s grills are fuelled by wood pellets, via indirect heat. So essentially your barbecue is less grill, more oven - yet it still will, and can, cook a wide variety of food brilliantly.

Having always cooked on a charcoal barbecue - for both speedy grilling and slow roasting - I was keen to see what all the fuss about cooking with wood pellets was about. 

As a cooking medium, wood pellet grills are becoming more widely available, in part due to their convenience (they’re extremely easy to use) but also because they add a welcome hint of smokiness to food as it cooks. 

A keen cook and always up for a challenge, I tested out the Traeger 575 Pro on a wide range of food, both roasted and grilled, to ensure I put it through its paces. Keep scrolling to see how I got on, then head to our best BBQ guide for more grill options to help hone your outdoor cooking skills. 

Traeger Pro 575 product specifications

• Fuel type: Wood pellets
• Power type: Mains operated
• Control: Either manually or via WiFi (Traeger WiFire app)
• Dimensions: H135xW104xD69cm (assembled)
• Weight: 58kg (assembled)
• Oven temperature: Up to 260˚C
• Hopper capacity: 8.1kg
• Grill size: 3709 sq cms
• Use: Outdoor use only

Traeger Pro 575 - First Impressions and assembly

Clearly marked on the large and heavy box, the grill requires two people to build it. As tasks go, it’s one that you’re guided through with ease, thanks to a number of cute and clever touches that can't help but make you smile.

For starters, the instructions suggest a couple of cold beers would help while you worked, while providing a handy storage tray for the bottles so that they don’t get knocked over.

The build instructions, too, are incredibly clear and well thought through, from providing you with a screwdriver, Allan key and wrench to assemble the lot, as well as numbering everything clearly.

The trickiest part of the build is attaching the legs, which involves flipping the main body of the grill over, and while this was a bit fiddly, it really didn’t take that long to finish.

If, like me, you have a six year old who is keen to get stuck into helping, the company has come up with a pretty ingenious distraction.

Printed on the inside of the main box, you’ll find a cabin design, so once you've emptied everything out, just turn the whole thing inside out, tape it back together and you have an instant playhouse that delights little ones and - more importantly - keeps them out from under your feet while you assemble the grill.

Designwise, the body of the grill is drum-shaped. Lift the lid of the and you’ll find double shelf porcelain-coated grill grates - a large one at the bottom and a smaller, half depth one above it.

The box-shaped hopper is on the left hand side - this is where the digital controls are located, too. On the right hand side, you’ll find a grease run off that leads out of the drum into a small bucket.

If you plan to leave it outdoors the whole time, you will need a waterproof cover to protect it from the elements. Traeger provided me with a cover which is normally priced at around £70. The cover is really well-made, durable and fits snugly around the grill. 

I also received three bags of Traeger hardwood pellets in three different flavours (more on those later).

Traeger Pro 575 - getting started

If you’ve ever had to faff about lighting a charcoal grill, you’ll LOVE the Traeger. Simply fill the hopper with pellets, plug it in, switch it on at the back, select the temperature you want it to reach, press the ignite button and you’re sorted. 

The hopper automatically adds more pellets when it needs more heat. The pellets are heated below a metal tray so the food never comes into contact with a naked flame.  

Obviously it depends on what temperature you want to preheat it to, but the grill should be hot enough and ready to cook on in less than ten minutes. 

The grill pumps out a bit of smoke from its cartoon-cute chimney at the beginning of each use, but that quickly dissipates and the grill is virtually smokeless after that.

Cooking in the Traeger Pro 575 

The grill can be controlled in two ways - manually, via the digital display and a dial/button on the right hand side, on the front of the hopper. Alternatively, you can link it up with your WiFi signal and control it using the (free) Traeger app. 

This is ideal if you're slow roasting something, as - together with a meat probe - you can set a temperature and timer, leaving the grill to do the rest. 

This leaves you to get on with your day, whether it’s entertaining friends or having a midday nap on a sun lounger. The app will alert you when your food has reached the optimum temperature. The app also provides you with a wide array of recipes and cooking suggestions - perfect if you're feeling a little uninspired.

In the interests of full disclosure, I found the app and connectivity to my WiFi signal to be quite temperamental - dropping in and out constantly - but this, as I understand it, is due to the grill’s distance from my router. 

To be honest, not using the app didn’t hugely affect how I used the grill. Personally, I would see this as a bonus if it worked, rather than a hindrance if it didn't. 

The grill is fuelled by hardwood pellets. You can use plain unbranded ones which are easily found online, or you can go for the branded Traeger pellets which come in a choice of up to nine types of wood.

As the pellets burn, they will infuse the food with a unique smoky flavour, each type suited to a different kind of food. For instance, apple wood is great for chicken and pork, while oak makes beef taste amazing, and mesquite is the perfect match for fish. 

Available to buy online from a variety of stockists, expect to pay around £18 for a 9kg bag. Unlike charcoal or gas, it’s unlikely you’ll find your local corner shop selling wood pellets, so remember to stock up so you’re ready to cook or if you tend to have impromptu barbecues.

In the time that I had to review the Traeger Pro 575, I cooked as much on it as I possibly could, weather permitting. I roasted chickens, grilled rib-eye and cooked sausages and hot dogs, as well as grilling loads of new-season asparagus and plenty of corn on the cob.

I roasted the chickens both in a roasting tray and propped up, beer can-style. For the rib-eye and asparagus, I used a (seasoned) cast-iron skillet which I preheated first and placed directly on the grill grates, while the sausages and corn were cooked straight on the grill shelf.

While the chicken skin didn’t get as crispy as I would normally like, the meat was some of the most succulent I had ever made at home. The steak was seared to perfection and the veggies were delicious, too.

I found the whole cooking experience to be so easy and effortless - there’s no guesswork, no burning and thanks to the handy meat probe, no cooked-on-the-outside-raw-on-the-inside experiences either.

How easy is it to clean the Traeger Pro 575?

With a little bit of prep, cleaning will take you mere minutes. First, inside the grill, the burning wood pellets are covered with a metal tray. Any grease that drips down from the food will land on this metal tray, so it needs to be covered if you’re cooking on the grill shelf.  

The grill comes with a single use foil drip liner that covers the metal tray completely. These can be bought separately, or failing that, a few sheets of strategically placed tin foil will do the trick.

The grease then runs off this liner, out into the small bucket that hangs from the exterior. The bucket also comes with a couple of foil liners, making it really easy to clean after use.

Finally, the two grill plates can be removed easily and washed in a sink with soapy water.

How does the Traeger Pro 575 rate?

If you’re a burgers-and-sausages kind of barbecue cook, then the Traeger Pro 575 really isn’t for you. Save your money and plump for a simple gas barbecue instead. 

If however, you’re looking for a step up from your standard barbecue, and are keen to discover new and interesting ways to cook a wide variety of dishes outdoors, then this grill is absolutely worth investing in. 

Priced at around the £1,000 mark, it’s a high-end grill and one that is meant to be used often. 

Where to buy the Traeger Pro 575

You can buy the Traeger Pro 575 at Amazon. The Traeger website also lists local stockists for the grill and wood pellets. As with a lot of barbecues right now the Pro 575 keeps selling out online. Anywhere it's in stock will pull through in our handy widget below, but you can take a look at where to buy barbecues in stock with our guide. 

About this review and our reviewer

Ginevra Benedetti is Associate Editor across the homes titles at Future. This means that she spends her days writing about all areas of the home, inside and out, as well as reviewing gadgets and appliances to ensure that you get the best products for your needs. 

She lives in a Victorian terrace with a 40ft long garden that backs onto a peaceful council allotment, so thankfully not that many neighbours are disturbed by her six-year-old’s endless trampoline antics. 

As with all our reviews, the Traeger Pro 575 has been tested first-hand in her garden, using it just as you would so you know exactly what you are buying. 

Spring in the air, warm weather making an appearance and being able to welcome friends and family into our gardens – that means time for some garden maintenance. So I was very pleased when the Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower showed up. Our split-level lawns had been left over winter and although I went over them with the strimmer a couple of weeks ago, they were looking very untidy and the grass was quite long again in patches.

Our bottom lawn (the largest of the three levels), is maintained by a robotic lawn mower, but it cannot easily access the top two levels, or the lawns at the front of our house. Therefore, we usually do them with our corded mower. For me, it is rather heavy, loud and, of course, there is the matter of the cable (and extension cable), which you spend half the time moving out of the way.

This is the first cordless mower I’ve tried, so I was eager to see just how much time it saved me and if it did as good a job as our corded mower. It is also very low in price compared to other cordless models on the market, so I will admit I wasn't expecting to be blown away. However, see why it earns a place on our best lawn mower list despite being a budget buy.

Einhell GE-CM 18/33 cordless lawn mower: key product specifications

• Power type: 18V 4.0Ah Li-ion battery
• Battery length: 30 mins
• Charging time: 1 hour (for full battery from low)
• Cutting width: 33cm
• Cutting heights: 25–65mm
• Grass collection box: 30L
• Lawn size: up to 200m²
• Size: 60.5 x 39.5 x 37.5 cm
• Weight: 10.9kg

First impressions of the Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower

The first thing I noticed was that the box was a lot lighter and smaller than I expected. Upon opening the box, I was also pleasantly surprised that a lot of the mower was already assembled – there were just four parts and a bag of screws and fasteners. I also liked that the grass collection box is made from flexible material with a plastic top, making it lighter and easier to empty.

Getting started

The mower comes with two booklets – one for safety and one for operating instructions. After a quick look though the safety instructions, I moved on to assembling the mower. As I have used cordless products before, the first thing I did was put the battery on charge to save time whilst setting up the mower. This wasn’t listed in the first paragraph of instructions, so anyone following the instructions step by step, may end up waiting a bit longer before they can operate the mower. 

I then continued to assemble the mower, which was really simple and required no tools, which is always a bonus. There are illustrations as well as written instructions and I used both. All you need to do is attach the two lower push bars on either side, mount the top of the push bar, clip the cord to one of the bars, mount the catch basket (grass collection box) and insert the battery. The only thing I found a bit tricky was working out which side the washers went on the bars – but I soon found this out by re-reading the relevant paragraph in the instruction manual. The other thing to note is there are two different holes in the lower push bars, so you can attach the push bar according to user height. 

With three lights on the battery charger indicating that the battery was full, I clicked the battery into place under the cover flap. Setup took 15 minutes in total and with that, I wheeled the mower outside, ready to go. 

The Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless mower puts safety first and there are two safety mechanisms in place before you can start the mower. This is to stop unauthorised use and a very good feature for us, seeing as we have a very inquisitive three-year-old, who loves machines. The machine comes with a safety plug (that looks almost like a key) and you insert this in a slot above the battery. This completes the safety circuit and the mower cannot physically operate without this in place. I noted that I must remove it, every time I left the mower unattended.

The second safety mechanism is that to operate the mower, there is button on the handle you must press before grasping the switching bar which starts the mower. To stop the mower, you simply release the switching bar.

What is the Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower like to use?

The instruction manual gives you a few hints on how to mow a lawn, including cutting heights for the time of year, safety points and a suggestion of overlapping the mowing swathes in straight lines. The manual explains to select the cutting height according to the current length of your grass. Cutting the grass too short can damage your lawn and the manual reminds you that you should never cut it back by more than half the height in one go.

As our lawn was very long in places, I set the cutting height to the highest setting (65mm), by pushing down the lever and sliding it to 65 on the scale. The cutting height can be set between 25mm and 65mm, at five intervals. As our lawn is an irregular shape and surrounded by walls, borders and paths, I always cut around the edge first, then in lines for the middle. As soon as I set off, I noticed how light and easy the mower was to push around. Our larger, corded mower is a lot more difficult to manoeuvre, especially as you have to occasionally step off a wall on to a lower level, to reach the edges.

I did the whole of the middle level without having to empty the grass collection box. Another handy feature of the Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower, is it has a filling level indicator, which is a plastic flap, opened by the airflow that the mower generates when operational. When the flap is closed during mowing, this means that the box is full and must be emptied. A benefit of the material grass collection box is, if it’s not too full, you can get closer to the low wall edges. Plus it’s very light, making emptying the mower very easy.

With the grass collection box back in place, I completed the top level of the lawn. The two levels took just under 15 minutes in total and it was noticeable how much quicker the task was when you don’t have a cable getting stuck in between rocks and having to be moved out of the way. Back garden done, I effortlessly wheeled the mower along the garden path, to the front lawn, which I mowed in just five minutes. 

The only thing I was aesthetically missing, are the lovely lines lawn mowers with rear rollers leave in your lawn. The mower did leave lines, but these were just left from the wheels in the longer grass.

Regular cutting
I must admit that we do not cut the lawn as regularly as we should as it’s normally a long and arduous task. But knowing that this now only takes 15 minutes, I have added mowing to our list of weekly chores. 

A week after the first cut, I mowed the grass again, this time adjusting the cutting height to make the grass shorter. I checked the battery level by pressing the handy button, which shows how many bars of power there is left and found that it flashed on one. I charged the battery until it was full, which took an hour. I then inserted the battery and the safety key and changed the cutting height to 45mm. 

This time, because I cut the grass a lot shorter, I had to empty the cuttings box three times, but it still only took 20 minutes. The Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower still handled cutting the grass with ease, but I could tell where it hit the longer and thicker patches of grass, as you can hear the blade slow down. 

At one point, the mower stopped and sounded a long beep. I noticed the grass box was full and after consulting the manual, I couldn’t find any information on what this meant, so I emptied the grass cutting box. The mower didn’t start back up again, so I removed the safety key and battery and had a look at the blade. There was a big clump of grass stuck in between the blade and the mower base, so I removed this while wearing thick gloves and then put the battery and safety key back in. This time, the mower sprung back to life and I had no further problems. It would be helpful if the troubleshooting section included a bit about this, though it can be the result of cutting the lawn too short in one go.

I have since used the mower weekly and it’s been quick and easy. The only extra task I have had to do is strim the edges next to the walls as unfortunately, the mower doesn’t get close enough to cut the grass here. Our garden guests have commented on how nice the lawn looks, so it's obviously doing a great job.

Noise
Usually, lawn mowing is quite a noisy task, with sometimes an accompanying feeling of guilt for disturbing your neighbours, but I found the Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower to be a lot quieter than our corded mower. The fact that it makes mowing the lawn a lot quicker, also helps minimise prolonged noise.

Ease of use

For the first use, as setup, mowing the back lawn and front lawns all in all took less than an hour, it’s clear that I found the mower particularly easy to use. It really makes a difference being able to just wheel your mower out from storage and straight to work, without having to faff around with extension cables and plug sockets. Though this is testament to the ease of the best cordless lawn mower rather than something specific to the Einhell, it being lightweight and easy to turn certainly helps.

It’s also very simple to empty the grass box, due to it being so light and only having to lift the chute flap to remove and replace it. When I’m finished, all I need to do is wheel it back into storage and fold the handle.

Additional features

Although I haven’t ever used the Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower long enough to see just how long the battery lasts, if you did have a large lawn, a benefit of this product is that it’s part of Einhell’s flexible and powerful ‘Power X-change’ family. This means that if you have any other products in this range, their batteries are interchangeable. So, if the battery runs out, you can just pinch one from another product, or keep one on charge, to replace the dead battery.

The batteries themselves come with three LEDs to show how much charge they have left. All you need to do is press the button on the battery indicator switch and a number of LEDs will light up to show you if there is enough battery to complete the task. The battery charger also has indicators and there is a full indicator guide in the operation manual as well as a handy troubleshooting page.

Another feature of the Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower is that it’s driven by a brushless motor which means it has a longer running time and life than a carbon brush motor. Plus, the push handle can be folded away for more compact storage in a small space such as a shed. It really is a great buy for small gardens, but is more than enough mower for our medium space too.

The level indicator on the grass box is a very handy feature, which means you won’t end up with loose grass cuttings all over your lawn and the two safety mechanisms also help me feel at ease, knowing my son won’t be able to start it on his own.

How does the Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower rate online?

It won’t come as a surprise that I have rated this mower five stars, as it was just so simple to set up and use, also giving the desired results. 

After having translated other reviews (most of them are in German), reviewers rate the mower highly with the majority also awarding five stars. They agree that the assembly is simple – with the benefit of not having to use any tools – it’s easy to use, cuts the grass well and many love that they can swap the batteries with other Einhell tools. I would also agree with a lot of users, that it’s a great mower for the price and is cheaper than similar mowers which don’t rate as highly. I was quite surprised by how brilliantly it performed knowing that cordless mowers can be in excess of £300.

The only negative remarks are from users with large lawns who were frustrated with how long the battery lasts. Some say it didn’t last for 200m² stated, but others disagree and say they managed to get at least 30 minutes’ worth of mowing.

Overall, I would highly recommend the Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower to anyone looking to ditch their corded mower and has a small to medium sized garden. I will definitely be looking out for other Einhell products in the same power range.

How does it compare to similar models?

The Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower is the cheapest cordless lawn mower Gardeningetc has tested, but got the same rating as the Worx WG779E.2 40V cordless lawn mower. The difference between the two is that the Worx model has a roller and a mulch plug that you can remove to mulch your lawn. If these features are key for you, then it might be worth spending that little bit more and buying the Worx 40V cordless. Battery life is similar, cutting width is only one centimetre narrower on the Einhell and they have the same grass box capacity and weight.

The Worx claims to be for gardens up to 350m² and the Einhell says just 200m² but as the grass box size and battery life are similar, we can see it coping with similar lawns. We did not test it to the limit of its battery life to confirm. 

If you have a bigger garden, Einhell has a range of cordless mowers with broader cutting widths and bigger grass boxes, so for gardens up to 600m² you might want to consider the Einhell GE-CM 43 cordless. However, at twice the price, we think you really do get a lot for your money with the GE-CM 18/33 – especially if you are willing to have spare batteries and more trips to the compost bin.

About this review and our reviewer

Bethan Davis is a PR officer, currently on maternity leave with her second child. With two kids under the age of four, their garden needs to be safe, tidy and low maintenance. She tested this Einhell GE-CM 18/33 Li cordless lawn mower over a period of several weeks, meaning plenty of cuts and some healthy spring growth in between. She started it off on a long lawn, before doing regular cuts and paired it with use of a robot mower – the Worx Landroid M500 robot lawn mower which she reviewed for Gardeningetc last year – to maintain her medium-sized garden. 

The space has terraced and sloping sections of lawn, which are unusually shaped and can be difficult to reach with a corded machine.

Robot mowers are potentially game-changing, so I was excited the try the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower. Robot mowers are often eye-wateringly expensive, and beyond the reach of mere mortals who don’t pay super-tax (because they don’t earn enough I mean, not because they have a Swiss bank account). Which is why Honda’s Miimo Mini range is so exciting. 

A decent mower brand, making a robot mower with a very decent warranty for around a grand. Still pricey, admittedly. But if you take into account the hours saved trudging up and down the garden (hours when you could be earning), plus reduced wear and tear on your shoes (ahem), you could quickly recoup your investment. 

I tested the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower on a 400 sq m area of our lawn, over three weeks in spring. I avoided any major slopes as the Miimo’s maximum recommended incline is 27%, but included our picnic table and a fence or two to give the little robot a few obstacles to work around. 

Keep reading to see how it fared, and check out our best robot lawn mowers guide to see more of our top-rated buys. 

Key product specification for the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower

• Lawn size: small-medium (up to 400 sq m)
• Battery: Li-ion 18V 2.5Ah (included)
• Drive type: robot
• Cutting width: 9cm 
• Cutting height: 3-5cm
• Charge time: 45 minutes
• Mowing time: 45 minutes
• Smartphone application: Android and iOS 
• Weight: 8.1kg
• Warranty: Five years

First impressions of the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower

The Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower looks a lot like our robot vacuum cleaner, on steroids. It’s reassuringly heavy and feels like a solid little unit. It’s designed for smaller domestic gardens, so it doesn’t have that gutsy All Terrain look of its more professional counterparts, but it certainly doesn’t feel cheap or unsubstantial. 

In the box you’ll get 125m of perimeter wire, 180 pegs and two wire connectors. There’s also an A4-size instruction booklet, cardboard ruler, the docking base and a clip-on cover for the back of the base, once it’s wired in. Finally, there are four plastic screws and a hex key for securing the base down. 

Getting started

This is where, in my opinion, the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower falls short and the reason I only gave it 3.5 stars. Honda is very proud of its 'Easy, four-step setup process'. What it doesn’t explain is that this process is only enforceable after you’ve completed the actual 31-step installation process (yes, I counted). 

Like all robot mowers, you have to install perimeter wire, which is not at all how it sounds in Honda’s marketing blurb! Anyway, once I’d recovered from that misconception, I got down to installing the base and perimeter wire, beginning with the former. 

There are two options for positioning the base, in a corner or along the edge of the lawn. In both instances you need a good area of unobstructed lawn around the base, at least 150cm in front, 100cm to one side, and either 30cm (for a corner install) or 100cm (for edge install) at the rear. When I took into account the location of our outdoor socket and the length of cable supplied, there was only one possible location for base installation. Unfortunately, that option wasn’t 100% level. I pushed on regardless (a big mistake) and started laying cable. 

Pegging down the cable wasn’t hard, mainly because the ground was still soft from winter rain. Honda supply a handy cardboard ruler that makes it easy to peg along at 75cm intervals, keeping 30cm away from fences, bushes and walls etc, and 5cm away from levelled surfaces (like a path). I was done in about 1.5 hours, with slightly sore knees but a good step count on my FitBit! 

Next, I had to connect the wires into the base, after a quick Google how to strip wires as I couldn’t find our wire strippers (use a kitchen knife and pliers). Then connect the power, put the back cover on and switch Miimo on at the back.

What it’s like to use the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower

Connecting the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower to the Mii-Monitor App took a few attempts. The screen on the Miimo didn’t reflect the set-up instructions on the App, blah blah blah. If you’ve ever tried to connect a Printer to an App, you’ll know how it goes. Then it randomly decided it would pair after all, and suddenly I was in business. Hzar. 

As it was a review product, the Miimo came with a PIN already programmed but the instructions for that stage look pretty simple. The idea of the PIN is the mower is disabled if anyone picks it up, thus deterring thieves. Good idea, but in reality the PIN request pops up with annoying frequency. 

Finally, I was ready to press Mow Now and put my feet up. Or so I thought. The Miimo starts with a perimeter run, without cutting, and you need to hang around for the on-screen message when it gets back to the dock and press a button to confirm it is indeed home. Sadly, the 'am I at the dock' message popped up several times, mainly when the Miimo went over a lumpy bit of lawn or around the path, which is clearly not as level as I thought! 

Back onto my knees to move the perimeter wire away from the path, using the wire connecting widgets to add in some extra cable. Once it finally found the base, another bomb dropped – it couldn’t mount back into position. Every time it tried, it either couldn’t get onto the base at all or the front didn’t quite line up with the power prongs. Off it would pootle to line up for another go. After consulting the instruction book, I realised the base wasn’t quite level enough, a fact backed up by the built-in level guide accessible via Miimo’s display menu. It was only marginally off so I tried shoving some cardboard under the base and adjusting the screws that secure it down but no dice, it had to be moved. 

As Miimo’s power cord didn’t reach to flatter land, I used an outdoor extension lead to relocate the base. Then back on my knees to move the perimeter cord once again. Sigh.

How easy is it to use the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower?

At long last (about four hours later), the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower was ready to mow and this is where it excelled. After a successful perimeter sortie, it started working up and down, then zig-zagging across the lawn. Stopping every 45 minutes to recharge and then go again. The grass needs to be cut reasonably short before Miimo is unleashed but it trimmed away extremely quietly and efficiently until the grass was looking much neater. 

A button on the top lets you adjust the cutting height, but I didn’t go too short on the first run as the grass is mulched in and, with children running around, didn’t want cut grass trekked into the house. Instead, I slowly worked it down over the next two days, until the grass was 3cm short. 

You can activate the Miimo using the display on the mower itself, the App or Alexa (by connecting via Alexa Skill). I found it easiest to use either Alexa or the mower display as the App kept wigging in and out and would give me 'fake news' with regards to battery power and mapping. 

One thing the App was good, or bad, at was sending me notifications. 'Mower tilted too far' and 'Mower is stuck' was the favourites, which was when Miimo randomly decided to break free of the perimeter wire and lurch over the edge of the steps. It never quite plummeted, lemming-style, but it was annoying having to rescue it, re-programme the PIN and start it off again. 

However, once I’d identified the exact escape point, and moved the wire, for the third and final time, the suicide attempts stopped. There is also a ‘Place and Mow’ function that is apparently good for mowing under furniture. However, the mower does need to be inside the perimeter wire, so don’t think, like I did, that you can set it going on another area of lawn. Once the Miimo got into a groove and all the early wire/base teething issues were resolved, things got a whole lot easier, and the hassle of set-up soon faded into insignificance. I set the Miimo to mow three times a week and the results were genuinely impressive. 

Additional features of the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower

The App comes into its own when setting up a schedule, which you can do manually using the calendar function. Or using the SmartTimer that uses weather forecasts, air temperatures and other such voodoo to create the optimum schedule automatically. 

You can also ask the App to adjust the schedule according to grass growth, so it keeps on top of fast-growing periods and chills out when the cutting season is coming to an end. Oh, and you can also build in ‘do not mow’ periods for times when you know you’ll be in the garden. Nobody needs a tiny chomper disturbing their BBQ after all. 

How does the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower rate?

The biggest bugbear amongst online user reviews for the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower is the complicated set-up but it’s worth remembering that all robot mowers require the same perimeter wire installation before use. A longer base power cable would help immeasurably though. 

There are also a fair few beefs about how wimpy the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower is when it comes across any kind of obstacle – real or imagined – and I did find resetting the PIN every time it thought it had hit an obstruction but actually just found a lump in the ground a bit tedious. 

I also spotted a complaint about the fact the battery is not replaceable, so when it eventually wears out the entire mower becomes obsolete – not very eco-friendly. However, Honda does supply a five-year guarantee so presumably the battery is expected to last at least that long. 

From my own experiences, I would 100% recommend the Miimo HRM 40 Live with the following caveats: your lawn is millpond flat; your outdoor socket is sufficiently close to the lawn; your paths are completely level with said lawn. If you can tick all three boxes, the Honda Miimo HRM 40 Live lawn mower is the robot for you!

About our review – and reviewer

Linda Clayton has been an interiors journalist for 20 years. Since graduating from Cardiff’s School for Journalism, she's happily writing about the latest trends, product reviews and giving her expert design advice for the likes of Gardeningetc, Homes & Gardens, Livingetc, Ideal Home and Real Homes ever since.  

She currently lives in Devon with her husband and two children, and recently renovated and extended the house. The property was previously a commercial nursery and boasts a half-acre plot, giving her plenty of space to road test the latest lawn mowers, hot tubs and garden tools. 

The Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ comes in two, three and four-burner models, making it a great pick for families of all sizes. I put the three-burner to the test in this Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ review and was impressed with how easy it is to use and the great taste it gave our food when cooking with both gas and charcoal.

This BBQ comes with a lot of thoughtful touches, including an in-built bottle opener and holder for the grate tool. There's also a shelf for holding the charcoal tray when not in use, and wheels for easy transportation. If you like the idea of a hybrid BBQ and have the space for a model that doesn't have fold-down arms, the Char-Broil Gas2Coal could be the best BBQ for you. Keep reading for the full review. 

Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ: product specifications

• Fuel type: Gas and charcoal
• Dimensions: W114cm x D63cm x H117cm (2 burner) W134.4 x D62.5 x H120.7 cm (3 burner) W155cm x D61 x H117 (4 burner)
• Weight: 36.5kg, 47kg, 65kg
• Assembly time: 2 hours
• Temperature: Up to 350°C
• Ignition: Electric
• Extras: Side burner, warming rack, bottle opener, grill accessory holder, shelf for charcoal tray

Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ: assembly

Char-Broil claims that assembly will take 90 minutes with the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ, but it took me and my brother around 2 hours to assemble from start to finish. It does come with very thorough instructions that make it easy to identify which part goes where, and the different types of screws were marked out very clearly. 

Assembly first included putting together the frame and then adding side panels. The process did take a while, but it was easy enough to plug in some headphones and get to work. The guide is very visual and there is a page dedicated to helping you identify different parts and where they fit together. 

Once assembled, our 3 burner Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ was large and very sturdy. It was 134.4cm wide, 62.5cm deep and 120.7cm tall. There's two wheels that make it easy to lift up and wheel around the garden, but my brother and I also found it easy enough to carry when taking one side each.

The side burner doesn't fold down and neither does the other side shelf, which means they can be used as handles for carrying around.

Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ review: cooking with gas

I had to cook a fair few feasts with the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ to get a good understanding of how well it cooks on both gas and coal, which you won't hear myself or my family complaining about! Like many of the best gas BBQ, it's easy to ignite and switch off, and there's a lot less smoke than you'll get with a charcoal BBQ. 

For a start, the gas couldn't be easier to ignite. You need to make sure the gas is connected properly and the lid is up when trying to ignite. You should also have it at least 1 metre away from any walls on all sides. For cooking with gas you need to add heat tents over the main burners and then add the grates once more, which can be done using the grate accessory that simply hooks in to lift out your grates. 

The side burner ignites the same way as the rest of the BBQ, by using the ignition button and twisting the gas onto high. Once ignited for the first time, it's a case of leaving the BBQ to come to heat. This didn't take very long at all, and it was easy to tell how close we were to cooking time thanks to the in-built thermometer.

The cooking process was very easy. There were no flare-ups which meant that our scallops cooked easily, and everything had the signature charred lines you'd expect from a barbecue. 

When cooking with gas the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ loses heat quite easily, so it's best to keep the lid down until you're ready to turn your sausages or take your burger buns off the heat. The warming rack comes in handy, and can simply lift up and down with the lid itself. 

I was shocked by just how much space there is to grill on the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ. I really could have cooked my meal for four on just one of the three burners, and if I had wanted to I could have done this by just turning on one burner. 

For the vast majority of uses, the Char-Broil Gas2Coal 3 burner BBQ will be plenty, and for families of four I'd say the 2 burner option would serve family feasts easily. The 3 burner is great for entertaining, so when garden parties get underway prepare for this to be the star of the show. 

Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ: cooking with charcoal

When using the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ to cook with charcoal, you need to remove the tents from the gas burners and insert the charcoal tray underneath the grates.

The tray leaves a very small space for charcoal, so some of our larger charcoal pieces were too big to fit underneath comfortably. We used lumpwood that was originally bought for my best pizza oven, but if you're shopping for BBQ charcoal try and get some with smaller pieces as standard. 

Even when cooking with charcoal you'll still get a helping hand with gas on the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ. You need to ignite the charcoal using the gas burners, and then leave them to burn on high with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

When it's time to open the barbecue up, turn off the gas burners and let the charcoal burn for a little longer with the lid up. There'll be plenty of smoke at first, and the key is to wait until the charcoal is coated with a layer of ash before adding your food to the grill - about five minutes. The charcoal retains heat very well, so you won't be tempted to add any extra heat even for long barbecues. 

The Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ gave me some of the tastiest results of any barbecue I've used. Everything cooked evenly and had that classic charring you expect from a charcoal BBQ. Even the steaks were perfectly cooked, which is often tricky to achieve on a grill. 

It's notable that the asparagus I grilled was too narrow to be placed lengthways on the grill, so for smaller items try and place them sideways to prevent them from falling through the cracks. 

Throughout cooking it was possible to simply pull down the lid and re-heat the interior of the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ at any time. We saw the temperature gauge react instantly, with an average temperature of about 150-200°C throughout cooking, even when we had been grilling for some time. 

For the drama of a smokey barbecue and the longevity of the heat, I'd opt for charcoal grilling when entertaining for a crowd, because it's a less gas-intensive way of cooking and there's little risk of fuel running out. 

Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ: what we like

What is there to like about the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ? As you'll be able to tell by its Gold ranking, there's plenty to enthuse about. For a start, while it's by no means a cheap BBQ, you get a lot of grill for the price. The 2 burner retails at under £400, the 3 burner (the one I tested) at just shy of £500 and the 4 burner at roughly £600. For a show-stopping hybrid grill with a large capacity, it gets significantly more expensive. 

There's also the hybrid function. Some hybrid barbecues feel like they're neither gas nor charcoal, but with the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ I can confidently assure you that you're getting two barbecues for the price of one.

Both gas and charcoal modes cooked excellently, but you get different flavor profiles and cooking experiences depending on which you opt for. If you want to put on a last minute BBQ dinner, just firing up the gas mode takes minutes, and for preserving fuel and achieving that authentic summer alfresco dining experience, the charcoal really is first in class.

Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ: what we don't like

What stops the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ from being a 5-star grill? Well, there's two factors, one which I've already mentioned. Assembly did take a long time. There were over 40 component parts and the task felt a little daunting, although it must be said that the result was far sturdier than much of the flat-pack furniture I've built!

Secondly, I was not a fan of the side burner when cooking with the Gas2Coal. The grate is positioned high above the burner itself, which means it's vulnerable to gusts of wind and also takes a while to heat a saucepan or frying pan.

Admittedly, I did review the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ on a handful of windy March evenings, so if you were to use it in the summer when the sun is out and the wind is less strong it's unlikely to blow your flame around, but I was concerned when the burner was on full strength that the flames seemed to be flowing just about everywhere but underneath the pan I was trying to heat. If the grate were a little lower I'd have been able to cook my peas a lot faster!

To fix this, I'd advise using a low and wide pan such as a cast iron skillet for cooking side dishes. Smaller pans will take longer to heat. 

Cleaning the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ

You should clean the Char-Broil Gas2Coal BBQ after every use. It's not tricky, though. Simply wait for it to cool down fully and then remove the grates. These can be cleaned by hand in the sink, and because they're cast iron they're easy to clean and designed to last without rusting. 

If you've been cooking with charcoal, cleaning will be a little messier. You should remove the charcoal tray and dispose of the ashes safely. When I did this I saw that my tray had discoloured, which is perfectly normal and not something to be concerned about. Check out the best BBQ cleaner and our guidance on how to clean a BBQ for more guidance. 

Should you buy the Char-Broil Gas2Coal Hybrid BBQ?

Should you buy the Char-Broil Gas2Coal? From me, it's a resounding yes. I love this BBQ for the convenience of cooking with gas with the option of throwing on some authentic smokey charcoal. 

Assembly took a while but was totally worth it, and the arms are great for storing plates or utensils while you cook up a storm. I didn't love the side burner, but it's easy enough to just put down the cover of this burner and use it as a resting place. 

Where the Char-Broil Gas2Coal succeeds is its ability to be both a great gas and charcoal BBQ at once. Hybrids can sometimes feel like they never really tick either box when it comes to cooking capably with different fuel types. While I did prefer the results when cooking with charcoal, the gas burners were so easy to ignite and made for a quick BBQ with painless clean-up. 

Where to find the Char-Broil Gas2Coal in stock

If the Char-Broil Gas2Coal is in stock at major retailers, it'll show in our handy buying widgets below. 

Failing that, take a look at the Char-Broil site directly. 

About the review and our reviewer

Millie Fender is an editor at the Future Homes team, heading up all things cooking across Gardeningetc, Ideal Home, Real Homes and more. Whether it's pizza ovens, barbecues or fire pits, she loves any excuse for outdoor entertaining.

Millie put the Char-Broil Gas2Coal to the test in her parents' garden for a number of weeks, cooking up tasty treats in the barely-spring weather. She's looking forward to using it throughout the summer. 

Wondering if the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa is worth the investment? I'm here to help you find out. 

If you’ve ever considered an inflatable hot tub, you may have asked yourself, is it really worth it? Yes, they’re more affordable, but I wanted to know if they offered a similar relaxing experience to their permanent counterparts. When I was offered a chance to try out the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki AirJet 7-Person Inflatable Hot Tub, I took it. 

As a new homeowner, I’ve been excited to take on home maintenance challenges and craft a relaxing and fun atmosphere at my house. I’m glad to say that the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa fits right in and offers me a chance to disconnect once – sometimes twice – a day. 

If you’re interested in one of the best hot tubs to soothe sore muscles or make your outdoor space into a relaxing retreat, then look no further than this review. I’ll offer an in-depth look at my experience so you can decide if the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki is the best fit for you, and for more options, make sure to check out our guide to the best hot tub deals.

Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki AirJet inflatable hot tub Spa SPECIFICATIONS:

• Size: L71 x W71 x H26 in 
• Seats: advertised as 7 people, but comfortably fits 4-5
• Heating range: 40-140˚F 
• Heating system: Approximately 23 degrees per hour
• Power cable length: 12 feet
• Power type: 120 volts
• Number of jets: 83
• Included features: built-in cup holders on pump, power saving mode, filter pump doubles as air pump, manual air pump included in packaging, locking cover, and ChemConnect dispenser 

Unboxing and set up of the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki AirJet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa

I was lucky to be home when FedEx arrived with the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki AirJet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa. They were kind enough to take it to the back of my house. I live alone so I think I would have had trouble getting the box to my back porch on my own because it was heavy. However, if I had help, it would have been easy as Bestway included handles on either side of the packaging.

I’m the kind of person that likes instructional pamphlets to have pictures and words combined, but the instructions for this hot tub only had pictures. This is becoming more common as the picture guides are meant to assist people who have poor reading skills or whose first language is different than English. 

That said, I became confused and overwhelmed when first trying to set up the spa, so I went to Bestway’s website and found an instructional video for the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki AirJet Inflatable Hot Tub. This was incredibly helpful and made the set-up process extremely quick.

Putting the hot tub together can be done all on your own. It doesn’t require assistance or any considerable amount of strength. Before blowing up the hot tub, I placed a tarp down, as suggested by Bestway. 

The pump doubles as an air pump and aired up the spa in just a few minutes. I stopped airing the hot tub when the sides felt taut and solid. 

I then aired up the cover insert, before hooking up the pump to the hot tub and installing the filter and ChemConnect dispenser inside the spa. It took about 25 minutes to fill up the hot tub with my garden hose.

I plugged the pump cord into a 110 V outlet, making sure to test the GFCI so I wouldn’t get shocked while using the hot tub. After filling up the hot tub with water, the display on the pump said that the water temperature was 63 degrees. It took about 25 hours before the hot tub heated to 104 degrees. According to the manual, it takes about 24-36 hours for the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki AirJet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa to heat to maximum temperature before first use.

What is the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa like to use?

While I haven’t tried any other inflatable hot tubs, I’m inclined to say that I would pick the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa over any of its competitors. Search among inflatable hot tubs and they tend to look like gigantic children’s inflatable pools in shades of blues, greens, and reds. They don’t necessarily blend with the style of a home. The Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa has wood paneling printed on the exterior of the spa, and though that may sound kitschy, it actually looks attractive. 

The hot tub wall (which is circular in shape) is about two inches thick, not bulbous and bubbly like other inflatable spas. The rigidity and the shape of the hot tub is maintained by a drop-stitch material, which adds to the appealing aesthetic. 

Size-wise, this is a large hot tub at almost 6 feet in diameter. Bestway advertises that it fits seven people, and you can probably fit seven petite people in this hot tub, but I think up to five is going to be the most comfortable - and prevent the water spilling over the sides. 

At first, I filled the pool between the ‘minimum’ and the ‘maximum’ lines notated in the hot tub. After I got in the hot tub, the water rose, which wasn’t a problem, until I hit the massage system button. Little holes have been placed in a circle around the inner edge of the hot tub and when the massage button is pressed, air rushes through the air jets, creating an intense bubble experience. The water bubbled quite high and nearly overflowed. 

I decided to remove some water so that the water line stopped at the ‘minimum’ line. The next time I hit the massage button, the water didn’t overflow when the bubbles came on. That is – until I invited two friends to experience the hot tub with me. With all three of us in the hot tub, it raised the water line to above the maximum line, and the water spilled over the sides when we hit the massage button. 

That said I find this hot tub to be an overwhelmingly lovely experience that I use twice a day. I’ve been in many hot tubs, and I can confidently say that when the LED display reads “104 degrees,” that the gauge is pretty accurate. Sometimes when I hit the massage button, the temperature immediately drops to 102 degrees, but I think this is a little quirk and not actually the hot tub losing two degrees of heat (because when I turn off the massage button, it returns to 104 degrees immediately). Even when I’ve been in the hot tub for about 20 minutes, the water maintains the 104-degree temperature, which is nice because inflatable spas aren’t particularly known for having great insulation. 

As for the control panel, the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa has an off/on button and a LED light display with the temperature of the water. You can toggle between Celsius and Fahrenheit. When you hit the arrow buttons up or down, it flashes the temperature at which you’d like the spa to be. The button that looks like a flame is the heat button. The water filter will automatically turn on when you hit this button, but there’s also a separate water filter button if you need it. 

The power-saving button lets you set a timer for when you want the heater to turn on. So, for instance, if you know you want to use hot tub in nine hours, you can set the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa to start heating in six or seven hours. I tried this once, and it heated the hot tub to 102 degrees versus 104 degrees. I didn’t correctly time my hot tub usage correctly, so next time I’ll be sure to schedule the heater to come on earlier. 

Take note that the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa doesn’t have seats like you might find in a regular spa. However, the floor is cushioned, as it is filled with air, making it quite comfortable to sit on for a significant amount of time. I’m glad to say that I can lean against the side of the hot tub and it supports my weight (165 lbs). I liked that the pump had two cup holders to hold drinks. They’re found under the control panel, which can rotate up and down. 

My only pet peeve with this hot tub is that in testing when I pressed the massage button, the pump emitted a fairly loud, high-pitched noise, indicating that the pump is working double-time to push air through the air jets. 

Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa maintenance 

You’ll need to add air to the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa and the cover insert from time to time (especially if there is a significant drop in temperature). I found that the cover insert doesn’t hold air as well as the spa itself. To keep the water clean, you’ll need to clean the water filter at least once per week. When the filter becomes soiled or discolored, replace it with another filter. Good thing Bestway includes a second filter in the package! 

Like other spas, chemicals, like chlorine or bromine tablets, are necessary to keep the water clean. You can add them to the ChemConnect dispenser, which is above the filter. The dispenser releases the chemicals at a controlled pace. 

While I haven’t deflated the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub yet, I think it would be easy to do. The instructions for deflation are easier to understand now that I know how to set up the spa. 

Take note that the spa pump is water-resistant – not waterproof. If it lightly rains or sprinkles, the pump may be okay, but it can’t get soaked or remain constantly wet. If it storms, or worse, the pump won’t hold up. If you have the spa indoors (which it can be) or under a covering, you don’t have to worry about this. I don’t have an awning on my outdoor patio, so I cover the hot tub with a tarp when I think it’s going to rain. 

In my opinion, the biggest drawback to this hot tub is that you can’t use it outdoors in the winter in the US. This is typical for all inflatable hot tubs, not just the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa. The plastic will become brittle and break in sub-zero or freezing temperatures. In fact, this hot tub shouldn’t be set up or left out if the temperature dips below 40 degrees.  

Is the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa worth the money?

At about $900-$1,000 (depending on where you buy the spa), the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa costs a bit more than some inflatable hot tubs, but when you think of the quality of the materials it’s well worth the investment. (Besides, it’s much cheaper than non-inflatable hot tubs, which range from $2,500 to $10,000.)  

When it comes to style and setup, not many other inflatable hot tubs compare to the Bestway SaluSpa Helsinki Airjet Inflatable Hot Tub Spa. It’s easy to use, keeps the temperature at 104 degrees, and can be moved around your yard or even taken on vacation. 

I'm not sure it would fit seven average or above-average people comfortably at a time, but it is extremely spacious and will fit at least five. For just me (or me and a few friends), this spa is perfect, and I find it a delight to use twice a day. It’s helped improve my sleep and digestion considerably and let me tell you – that’s worth it. 

About this reviewer

Alex Temblador is a Mixed Latinx award-winning author and freelance writer based in Dallas, Texas. As a new homeowner, Alex is keen to take on home maintenance challenges and craft a home with a relaxed and fun atmosphere.

Want to see more reviews of our top recommended outdoor accessories? Make sure to check out our guide to the best gas grills for the ultimate outdoor dining experience.

The Kärcher K5 Power Control pressure washer is made to give you 'the perfect pressure' every time, whatever you are cleaning. Featuring a high-pressure hose, high-pressure gun, on-board storage, telescopic handle and integrated ‘plug ‘n’ clean’ detergent system, it also comes with a vario power spray lance and dirt blaster spray lance.

This is the second Kärcher pressure washer I have used, with the first being the most powerful (and largest) of all the Kärcher range – the K7. I was interested to see how this smaller model would cope with similar tasks, such as cleaning the patio and slabs, as well as cleaning my car.

Find out how it performed, then check out more options in our guide to the best pressure washer.

Kärcher K5 Power Control pressure washer specifications:

• Power type: 230–240V mains
• Max pressure: 145 bar
• Best for: Getting the job done quickly, with the perfect pressure every time
• Hose length: 10m
• Power cord length: 5m
• Weight: 12.95kg

First impressions

When I opened the box, I was a little disappointed to see that I had to assemble some parts of the pressure washer, such as the handle, wheels and on-board storage. I was however surprised at how light the pressure washer is and felt I would have no problems moving it around.

What's in the box?:

• Kärcher K5 pressure washer
• High pressure gun
• Vario spray lance
• 10m high pressure hose

Getting started

The K5 Power Control comes with three booklets (product registration information, a how-to guide and the instruction manual) and a piece of cardboard with a QR code to instantly register your product. The first step is assembling the machine. There are written instructions to match illustrations found on the first few pages. You have to fit and secure the wheels, mount the stand, install the lance storage and mount the transport handle, all using the screws provided. This was all fairly simple – each step has the relevant screw highlighted, on the illustration. You then mount the accessory net, push the hose through the hose guide and screw on the water connection coupling.

After I had completed the assembly, which took me about 20 minutes, I registered the K5 through the Kärcher Home&Garden app, which I already had from reviewing the Karcher K7 Smart Control. For context – the K7 has smart technology, and you can link your phone to the gun (a nice feature, but not entirely necessary). I wasn’t sure how handy the app would be for the K5 as it doesn’t have smart technology, but as soon as I registered the product, it ran through assembly instructions step by step. I must say, these are a lot clearer than the instruction manual.

While on the app, I also noted that I could use it for step-by-step instructions on how to clean different surfaces, as well as adding any extra accessories I had. It gives specific instructions, dependent on what Karcher model you’re using, so I just needed to select the Kärcher K5 Power Control model from the home screen and what I wanted to clean. 

Before you can use the pressure washer, there are a few final start up instructions in the paper manual and I found out the hard way, that it’s very important to follow these properly. You must place the device on a flat surface, then the next instruction is to unwind the high-pressure hose completely. I decided to fit the gun first before doing this, then attempted to uncoil the hose, which was almost like trying to straighten a coiled telephone line. After struggling for about five minutes and getting ever more frustrated, my partner (who had been watching me gleefully through the window), came out to help and suggested I took the gun off. 

At this point (to try and prove him wrong), I looked back at the instructions and saw that I needed to unwind the hose to eliminate the loops and twists, plus pull it all the way through the hose guide, before fitting it to the high-pressure gun. My partner noted that it was easier to pull a yellow lever at the same time as aligning the fitting to push in (the instructions mention the alignment, but not the lever).

Hose and gun connected (and feeling calmer), I then finished setup by plugging the 5m mains cable in and connected the garden hose to the water connection coupling. 

What is the Kärcher K5 Power Control pressure washer like to use?

The instruction manual doesn’t tell you how to clean each individual surface, but gives more information on how to use the pressure washer with the Vario Power Control spray lance, a washing brush and detergent. This is where the app comes in handy as you can select what Kärcher product you’re using, add any accessories you may have and then from the home screen, choose out of nine options for what you would like to clean. 

The app then guides you through exactly what to do, step-by-step. At this point, I would also recommend looking at the ‘How-to guide’. Each page shows simplified instruction illustrations for areas to clean (which are not as helpful as the app), but there is a QR code to scan on each page which takes you to a relevant web page on the Kärcher website, with an application video.

Stone floor areas

I had started to clean our garden patio a couple of weeks ago with the K7 model, but never finished it. Therefore, this was a perfect opportunity to use the Kärcher K5 Power Control and to go over a few slabs and bits I had I had missed. I connected the Vario Power Control spray lance – which is easy to do – and then set the pressure to medium, by turning the head of the lance. The more you turn it to the left, the harder the pressure and to the right, the softer the pressure. There is no ‘medium’ marked on the lance, so it’s a matter of turning it until you think you’re in the right place and then pressing the trigger on the gun. The meter on the gun handle then indicates with several yellow bars on a scale, what pressure you are achieving. This is a little clunky, compared to other Kärcher models that come with a multi jet lance, where you adjust the pressure by pressing plus or minus symbols on the gun handle, but comparative to other branded models of a similar price.

With medium pressure set, I followed step two: rinsing the loose dirt from the patio. You then turn adjust the lance to the hardest pressure by twisting the head as far as it will go to the left. The app tells you to slowly guide the flat jet (which comes out of the vario lance) from left to right at angle of 15 to 30 degrees, at around 12cm from the surface. This works very well and it’s very aesthetically pleasing to see your dirty brown slabs return to the lovely colour they once were! 

I skipped ahead to see what the final steps were and step five mentions using the dirt blaster spray lance for heavy soiling. I attached this lance, which has a rotary jet, and is extremely powerful. You can work at a distance of 15cm to 20cm with this lance and the stubborn dirt ingraining my patio was no match for the dirt blaster. 

Top tips for cleaning a pation with the Kärcher K5 Power Control:

• Work from left to right (or vice versa) to move the water towards any drains or run-off points
• Rinse loosened dirt with medium pressure so it doesn't dry on the patio
• Sweep any coarse soiling by hand
• Do large patios or driveways in sections, repeating the steps for each section before moving to the next, so displaced mud doesn't get chance to dry
• A broom is more effective than the pressure washer for getting rid of dirty water

Patio complete, I was really impressed with how easy it was, how quick it was (30 minutes) and how clean it looked. As this section of patio is right next to the section I had done with the K7, it was easy to compare results and you couldn’t tell the difference. This is impressive as with the K7, I used stone detergent and Karcher’s T-Racer surface cleaner, which has a hovercraft-like head, especially for patio and driveways. 

Cleaning glass

Following washing the patio, the pressure washer had kicked up a lot of dirt which had come to rest on the surrounding doors and windows. Following the instructions on the app for glass cleaning, I used the vario lance to rinse the doors and windows. I used a medium pressure, just to rinse the dirt off, but the app explains that you can use the hardest pressure, to get the best clean. These instructions can also be used to clean conservatories and greenhouses.

Cleaning the car

I’m embarrassed to admit that my car hadn’t been cleaned for about a year. With being on maternity leave and working from home beforehand, I don’t use my car as much as I used to. Plus, it’s gun-metal grey, so doesn’t show up dirt as much as other colours. Still, with the Kärcher K5 Power Control in my hands, I no longer had any reasons to not clean it and we bought some of Kärcher’s ‘Bring back the wow’ car shampoo, especially for the job.

I opened the app and told it I was using detergent under the ‘your accessories’ section. I then opened the application advisor for cleaning the car and this is where I hit a snag. The advisor shows a car covered in foam on the start screen, but looking through the seven steps, at no stage did it tell me when or how to apply the detergent. I checked the ‘How-to guide’ which offered no help and scanned the QR code, which took me to some information about a power brush you can get for cleaning cars – great for future reference, but no use to me here. I resorted to looking on Kärcher’s YouTube page and found a video that helped. It didn’t use the same model or detergent, but at least it gave me an idea of at what point I should apply the detergent. 

As I had used the ‘plug ‘n’ clean’ system before with the K7, I knew that I had to remove both caps on the detergent bottle and slot it in upside down. The pressure washer then automatically pulls it through when it’s on the detergent setting. With this is place, I continued to use the app for instructions. 

1. Remove leaves and debris
2. Use the Vario Power Control lance on medium to remove coarse dirt working from bottom to top
3. Cover the car with detergent (this will happen when the detergent setting is used and the detergent bottle in place
4. Leave to work
5. Agitate with a sponge or brush before rinsing on medium pressure

On the app, it again recommends washing from bottom to top, however, I found that by doing it this way round, any dirt from the top dripped over where I had already cleaned, sometimes leaving larger bits of debris settling further down. I then had to go round the car again to clear any noticeable bits.

The final step is allowing sufficient time for your car to dry and then enjoy your newly cleaned vehicle. Still wet, the body of my car looked clean, although I could see some stubborn dirt on the number plate and metal work, especially around the front grill. The app doesn’t mention anything about cleaning the wheels, but in the safety booklet for the Karcher K7 pressure washer, it explicitly tells you to not use the hardest pressure in case of damaging the tyres. The alloys on my car are coated with stubborn black dirt in places, so I had used the same medium pressure on them too, which had removed some dirt, but they were far from the gleaming alloys I had hoped for. 

It took me 45 minutes in total to wash my car (a mid-size SUV) and an hour or two later, I went back out to inspect my handy work, but was a little bit disappointed. The car was left looking cleaner, but it was very streaky in places and when I ran my finger over it, parts were still dirty. I wondered whether this was the result of me not cleaning it how it was intended, through lack of instructions, whether a year of dirt is just too much for one wash, or whether I simply hadn’t gone over it properly. I also wondered what other car shampoos there are, as the one on the picture on the app, is covered with a thick foam which didn't happen in my case.

With this is mind, I went back on the ‘add accessories’ part of the app and tried adding on a different car cleaning detergent. This time, the instructions jumped from seven steps to 11 and included four steps about detergent application. I had done everything correctly, apart from after applying detergent with the lance, it suggests applying detergent to a cloth, sponge or brush, to deep clean the vehicle. Now I know this, I’m hoping that the next time I clean my car, this will give me better results and fewer smears.

Cleaning other objects

In addition to the areas I’ve already mentioned, the app has step-by-step instructions for the Kärcher K5 Power Control to clean pipes, bicycles, wooden floor areas, stairs, motorcycles and facades. Following how simple and quick it was to clean the patio, I plan on using the K5 to clean the steps and areas of patio in between.

Ease of use

As I have used a pressure washer before, I did find this model very simple to use and it’s great that you can adjust the pressure immediately, to suit whatever you may be cleaning, just by turning the head. This is brilliant for if you were doing large areas which require different amounts of pressure, due to loose stones nearby, or plants which you don’t want to damage. It was also easy to assemble, especially if you use the app to guide you. The dirt blaster lance is also great, although it did kick up a lot of dirt and I was absolutely filthy from top to toe once I had finished. The safety instructions advise wearing eye protection and I ended up doing so after a found the dirt was hitting my face. I’d also advise wearing old clothes too.

The app is a great guide, although it obviously needs a few updates, but anyone using a pressure washer for the first time, will be able to follow the instructions easily and get the desired results, especially on stonework. For those without the app, the instruction manual is enough for basic instructions, but you’d have to use the how-to guide or look up information, if you wanted to clean something specific and get the best results.

Storing the K5 Power Control

The one thing I found very frustrating was when it came to packing away the pressure washer. I’d already had issues with the hose and I again had similar issues trying to neatly tidy the hose away. I couldn’t for the life of me coil it up nicely – it kept getting kinks in it or twisting in a different way to how I wanted it. I ended up getting very frustrated and winding it around the body of the pressure washer, to keep it as tidy as I could, whilst being stored in our garage. 

I also had a similar issue with the mains cable. The elasticated storage net I had fitted, seemed like the perfect place to store the cable, once I’d wound it up, but I found it would not stretch enough to accommodate it and left most of it sticking out the top. When my partner got back, he attempted to tidy it away properly and although he did a better job than me, it still took him 10 minutes to unkink the hose and wind it up.

Additional features of the Kärcher K5 Power Control

What’s great about this machine and other Kärcher models with the same feature, is that everything is sourced from the same machine. You don’t need to suck water from an open container (although you can do this if you need to with a special accessory), you can use the same lance for everything, only switching to the dirt blaster when needed and the ‘plug ‘n’ clean detergent system is great, controlling how much detergent you need, so you don’t have to do it manually.

The large wheels and telescopic handle make transporting the pressure washer a breeze and the on-board storage keeps the lances and gun nice and tidy. It’s a shame this pressure washer doesn’t have an integrated hose reel like some of Kärcher’s other models, as this would eliminate the issues with unravelling and tidying away the hose. 

Although this model doesn’t have smart control, the app ensures you are ready to clean any object or surface, plus there are FAQs to check any issues and a link to the online shop, to see where you can buy accessories or other Kärcher products.

How does the Kärcher K5 Power Control rate online?

The Kärcher K5 Power Control pressure washer is rated very highly, with most giving it four or five stars. Users comment on how easy it is to use, how much quicker it makes cleaning, and how effective it is, especially at cleaning patios and driveways. 

The main negative comments echo my thoughts with the storage for the mains cable and the issues with both the storage and kinks with the hose. Some users say they wished that they had spent a bit extra and purchased the premium K5 model just for this reason. 

This model is mid-range in terms of price for Kärcher pressure washers, but it does do a great job and it definitely saves time. Some of the cheaper Kärcher models are rated more highly, but other brands around a similar price are rated the same as the Kärcher K5 Power Control.

Kärcher K5 Power Control vs Kärcher K7 Premium Smart Control

The K7 is almost double the price of the K5 but does come with a 3-in-1 Multi Jet Lance, T 7 T-Racer Surface Cleaner, bottle of Stone and Façade cleaner, integrated hose reel and smart control (connection to your phone via Bluetooth). It comes almost fully assembled but is a lot bigger and heavier than the Kärcher K5 Power Control, at 17.8kg. 

In term of versatility, it can be used for exactly the same jobs as the K5. The multi jet lance is definitely superior to the vario, as you can change easily between a flat jet, rotating (dirt blaster) jet and detergent mix, by twisting the head. The T7 surface cleaner does make cleaning patios and stonework easy and quick, but I would argue that the K5 does just as good a job, even without using detergent. The T7 surface cleaner doesn’t kick up as much dirt as the dirt blaster lance (I only had dirt splattered up to my calves) and covers a larger area at once, but I don’t think this is a good enough reason to justify spending the extra money.

Connecting your phone to the pressure washer does have its benefits, such as you can click a button on your phone which transfers the relevant pressure to the gun automatically, dependent on what stage you are of cleaning. However, I was able to operate the K5 and clean objects just as effectively without it being connected to my phone.

I didn’t have any issues when it came to tidying away the K7 though. The hose winds nicely back on to the integrated hose reel, the mains cable fits in the accessory bag and the onboard storage leaves the lance and surface cleaner packed tidily away, ready to use next time.

Overall, if you don’t want to break the bank with a pressure washer and don’t mind a few storage issues, I would go for the K5, as it is just as effective as the K7, plus you can always purchase accessories such as a surface cleaner, to make it as timesaving as the K7. 

About this review and our reviewer

Bethan Davis is a PR officer and with two young kids, is always on the lookout for products that will keep her house and garden tidy, with minimal time and effort. She test the Kärcher K5 Power Control and Kärcher K7 Smart Control in close succession to compare the two models and see how they fare independently, too. 

She has a medium-large garden with stone patio and walls, a couple of family cars to clean and a block driveway – so finding places to test the pressure washers was easy.

Petrol Heads generally sneer at cordless mowers, so can the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB lawn mower persuade them otherwise? If anyone can turn them it is Honda, the No.1 big cheese in the petrol mower world – just ask your dad. 

Long respected for delivering no-nonsense, rock solid petrol mowers that go on and on, Honda has a rep to protect. So, is the battery powered IZY HRG 416 XB a worthy alternative, or will it leave petrol fans running for their fuel cans? 

For this review I tested the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB on a 350sqm area of our lawn, including a slight slope, some fence lines and one teetering edge (where the bank drops away steeply) for good measure. It was mid-March and the lawn had been cut a couple of times so was still a bit shaggy and slow-growing but the worst of the winter length had been dealt with. I did three cuts in total, each at least five days apart. 

Read on to find out how it coped with my garden (and how I coped with it), then see more options in our list of the best lawn mowers.

Honda IZY HRG 416 XB lawn mower key product specifications

• Lawn size: small-medium (up to 350sq m)
• Battery: 36V 6.0AH Li-ion battery and charger (not usually included – do check)
• Drive type: hand propelled
• Cutting width: 41cm
• Cutting height: 20-74mm 
• Grass bag capacity: 42 litres
• Charge time: 55mins
• Weight: 22.5kg 
• Warranty: Two years

First impressions of the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB lawn mower

Immediately upon taking delivery of the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB lawn mower it was clear I wasn’t dealing with your average battery powered mower, which tend to be pretty light and at least 60% plastic. For one thing I couldn’t lift the box. At all. For another, it looked almost exactly like the 12-year-old Honda petrol mower lurking in our garden shed that works perfectly but I never use on account of not being able to start it (my fault, I’m feeble with a pull cord). 

Turns out the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB is the cordless version of our faithful old petrol mower and is the spitting image in terms of hardcore metalness and solidity. No wobbly handlebars or flimsy wheels here. Only the battery pod and lack of noxious petrol fumes gives the game away.  

Getting started

The review model I tested arrived with the handle attached but the instruction book suggests newbie machines will need minor assembly. Just screwing a couple bolts on, no tools required. The grass catcher was box fresh, so, like any new purchaser, I had to connect the net to a frame, which wasn’t easy at all. 

After breaking a couple fingernails, I utilised a kitchen skewer to help drag the stiff clips over the metal frame. Happily, the battery was supplied partially charged and it didn’t take the Fast Charger base long (about 10 minutes) to whip it up to full power, then I was good to go.

What it’s like to use the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB lawn mower

Once the battery is locked into place and isolator key engaged, you just press a satisfyingly big yellow button and push the cutting lever up to meet the main handle. Similar to the petrol model, this skinny handle is also a safety device as the mower will automatically stop once released. 

Considering how gutsy the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB looks, its quietness comes as a surprise. A nice one, particularly if you have close neighbours who like to lie-in on a Sunday. 

Pushing the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB along and I soon realized that its robust construction comes at a price – namely, my energy levels. I found it really quite heavy to manoeuvre, particularly going uphill (our lawn slopes at a reasonable gradient of around 20-30%). It would be sexist to suggest this mower is ‘not for girls’ but it would be fair to say you need to be reasonably fit. If I was buying for my mum, I’d go for the propelled version (the IZY HRG 466 XB). However, my husband took a turn and said it was noticeably lighter than our petrol version and, basically, I was being a wimp. Nice. 

How easy is it to use the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB lawn mower?

Wimpiness aside, using the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB lawn mower is a low-stress, speedy experience. It blasted through the grass with ease and following the wheel tracks resulted in nice, neat lines with no annoying tufts to retrace. The blade is a decent width, which reduced the number of passes and overall cutting time. 

There is height adjustment on the front and back, which I’ve not seen on a cordless mower before. The theory (I think) is that you have the front higher than the back when cutting longer grass to help prevent clogging. Our grass wasn’t overly long, so I kept both adjustment levers level, playing it safe with the mid-way 40mm setting. Joy of joys, I only needed to empty the grass box four times, which saved time and effort as the compost pile is a fair stomp away. However, the only indication of fullness is when grass starts dropping out in clumps so do keep an eye on that. Also, I learnt to pull the grass out of the chute if I’d let the box get too full otherwise it would, understandably, block. 

I was particularly impressed with how close it got to the fence line and it also did well alongside the almost, not quite, level path. The Honda IZY HRG 416 XB did feel a little unwieldy going downhill though, with a tendency to slide that required extra muscle power to maintain those neat lines. 

Additional features

Sometimes it’s the simplest things that prove the most useful, which is the case with the battery power indicator button. Positioned on the side of the handle, it lets you know how much juice is left. Handy if you’re deciding whether to whiz round the front garden or call it a day. 

The battery can also be used on Honda’s other cordless garden tools, so while it’s not cheap (the 6.0Ah one I used costs £200), you can also use it on the Honda cordless brush cutter, hedge trimmer etc.

How does the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB lawn mower rate?

The Honda IZY HRG 416 XB lawn mower is undoubtedly the most robust cordless mower I have encountered to date and, with its steel deck and chunky wheels, is definitely on par with petrol-powered counterparts. 

It cuts neatly, without stalling over lumps or bumps, and the battery lasts a decent 40 minutes per charge. The super-speedy 55min recharge means minimal waiting if you do need to keep mowing, but it comfortably covers 350sq m on a single charge. 

Yes, it is heavy and feels like a mini workout on hills but it’s still considerably lighter than a petrol mower and heft is the payoff for solid construction. Just think of the calories you’ll burn! 

The handle isn’t height-adjustable, which might be an issue if you’re very short or very tall but at 5’ 10” I found it perfectly pitched for comfort. Admittedly, the Honda IZY HRG 416 XB lawn mower boasts very few flourishes or whizzy tech for the price tag. However, that does mean there are fewer things to go wrong in years to come. With a machine that looks and feels like it could possibly outlive you, that’s got to be a bonus.

About our review – and reviewer

Linda Clayton has been an interiors journalist for 20 years. Since graduating from Cardiff’s School for Journalism, she's happily writing about the latest trends, product reviews and giving her expert design advice for the likes of Gardeningetc, Homes & Gardens, Livingetc, Ideal Home and Real Homes ever since.  

She currently lives in Devon with her husband and two children, and recently renovated and extended the house. The property was previously a commercial nursery and boasts a half-acre plot, giving her plenty of space to road test the latest lawn mowers, hot tubs and garden tools. 

The Kärcher K7 Premium Smart Control is Kärcher’s most powerful pressure washer, versatile enough to tackle a multitude of stubborn cleaning tasks around your home and garden. Featuring a high-pressure hose with integrated reel, LCD display trigger gun, telescopic handle, on-board storage system and ‘plug ‘n’ clean detergent system, it also comes with a 3-in-1 Multi Jet lance, T 7 T-Racer Surface Cleaner and a bottle of Stone & Façade detergent.  

With spring in the air and guests being allowed back in our gardens soon, the stonework around our house really needed some attention. The driveway bricks looked dull and dusty, and the garden patio was covered with a variety of unwanted dirt – from moss and mud to faded poster paint dinosaur footprints (an attempt at keeping my son entertained whilst confined to the house). With some new patio furniture also about to arrive, we needed to get the jobs done quickly, so hoped the Kärcher K7 would be the tool for the task.

Read on to see how it performed, then for more options, check out our guide to the best pressure washer.

Kärcher K7 Premium Smart Control pressure washer key product specs:

• Power type: 230–240V mains
• Max pressure: 180 bar
• Best for: getting the job done quickly – ground surfaces, vehicles and even garden furniture
• Hose length: 10m
• Power cord length: 5m
• Weight: 17.8kg

Getting started

My first impression of the pressure washer was just how heavy the box was. I had to get my partner to help me move it so I could start setting it up – an indication of the heavy duty product inside, maybe? Once we had taken it out of the box I was relieved to see it was on wheels and had a telescopic handle to move it around. 

As with a lot of appliances we’ve had recently, I was dismayed to see that the pressure washer came with five booklets of information. There is a separate instruction manual for the T7 Surface Cleaner accessory, in addition to one for the pressure washer, plus a safety manual, how-to guide and a product registration booklet. A lot of paper for a smart device, which also has step-by-step instructions on the Kärcher app. 

We started to set up the pressure washer by following the illustrated instructions. For my partner – who has used Kärcher products before – this was enough to help him, but I found that I definitely needed to look through the written instructions for clarification. After following the assembly instructions, the next step tells you to download the app and register your device. This is made even easier by scanning the two QR codes – one for finding the app for your phone model and one for registering the device. 

At this point I abandoned the written instructions as the app tells you how to continue set up (it starts right from the beginning, with assembly). Once you’ve paired your phone with the device – which is simple enough – you can then add what accessories you have, connect the water supply, turn the machine on and you’re ready to go.

One thing I would note is that the app doesn’t give you in-depth information on some aspects of set up and operation. For example, my partner pointed out that I would need to ensure that the hose was completely unwound from the hose reel before use – something the written instructions share. Lesson? You really should always read the instructions.

What is the Kärcher K7 Smart pressure washer like to use?

From the home screen of the Kärcher Home & Garden app you can choose out of nine options. The options are based on the different types of thing you might need to clean. The app then guides you through exactly what to do, step-by-step.

Cleaning stone floor areas

Seeing as the pressure washer comes with the T7 Surface Cleaner, I opted to tackle our brick driveway and stone garden patio. We have two children – a three-year-old and a six-month-old, so a lot of big jobs like this get left until the weekend, when we tend to do rock, paper, scissors for who looks after the kids and who does the jobs. It’s also a guarantee that whoever does the job, will end up with a little helper who is fascinated by new and noisy machines, especially one that shoots water!

I opted to start with the driveway and started to follow the app’s guidance on how to clean stone floor areas. We have quite a large driveway, so I decided to tackle it in sections as I wasn’t sure how long the detergent would last, or how long the task would take. The first screen shows you a summary of the pressure level, nozzle setting and how many steps there are (15 in this case). 

Spreading the detergent
The first step is to place detergent (if you have it), in the ’plug ‘n’ clean’ docking station. On the app (and bottle) it gives simplified instructions, so unless you’ve read the paper instructions, or watched a how-to video, it is not immediately clear that there are two caps you must remove before docking the detergent. You must then ensure the multi-jet lance is attached and is on detergent mode. You do this by twisting the head and the detergent symbol should show up on the LCD screen. There are two issues we found with this. The first is depending on how you have connected the multi-jet lance (there are two ways to put it in as the fitting is rectangular), when twisting the head, it’s not clear which setting you’re on. If connected one way, the correct setting is facing upwards on the lance. If connected the other way, it’s offset to one side. The other issue is the detergent setting on the LCD doesn’t immediately show up until you’ve pressed the start trigger. 

Once we had worked this out, I continued to follow the steps on the app. You select level 3 (the highest level) for detergent by using the plus button on the handle. Alternatively, you can select 'Transfer pressure to gun' on your phone and it automatically does this for you. You then wet the stonework, moving left to right and soapy suds should appear. It then advises to allow the detergent a bit of time to take effect. Using detergent helps lift the dirt but is not essential.

Using the T7 T-Racer Surface cleaner
After a quick coffee break, the next step was for attaching the T7 T-Racer. This is slightly different to the lance and again the app’s instructions are simplified. It’s worth noting that I would advise reading the instruction booklet for the T7 T-Racer too. Although 73 pages long (for other languages), the English instructions are less than three pages and contain vital information on its operation. As per the instruction booklet, I attached the T7 T-Racer and then returned to the app. You turn the dial on the head to the ‘hard’ position and it has two pedals – one for general surface cleaning and one for edges and corners. I selected the general surface cleaning and ensured the pressure was on level 3.

You then run the T7 T-Racer over the stone, keeping it moving. A tip on the app is to work in overlapping paths so no dirt residue is left in between. It has bristles underneath, so you may feel as if they’re there to be used like a scrubbing brush. However, the instruction booklet points out that is not to be used for scraping or scrubbing. You don’t have to exert any pressure as the rotating jet is extremely powerful and I could clearly see which bits I had done on the driveway. I found that if I moved the head too quickly, it left squiggly lines, so had to go over the same place more than once. Slow and steady movements are key. To do the edges of the drive and the corners, where the brickwork meets the house, I selected the edge and corner option, using the other pedal. This emits water from a nozzle at the front and the moss, cobwebs and weeds were no match.

Hosing down with the multi-jet lance
As the pressure washer was so powerful, quite a lot of dirt, sand and foliage was left sitting in puddles on the drive, but the last stage is using the multi-jet lance to rinse the stone. On the flat jet setting, with level 2 pressure, the app advises you to rinse the loosened dirt from left to right. As I was doing this, I noticed some areas where I could still see either the squiggly marks left by the T 7 T-Racer, or areas around the edges I’d missed. The spray from the lance is powerful enough to go over these small areas and remove the dirt, so your stonework is left looking spotless. 

Sweeping and finishing the job
Once you’ve finished, the final step on the app is to sweep up any soiling by hand. I think if you were to tackle a very large area all in one go, you might want to use a broom to sweep off some of the residue as you went along. I used ours a few times, when I noticed that the dirty water was sitting quite close to my neighbour’s drive.

Once I had finished the first section of the drive (took an hour and a half from setup to finish), my partner took over to do another section. It was lucky we did the drive in sections as the detergent ran out with about a third of our drive left to do. Luckily, the detergent is readily available from local hardware stores, or you can purchase it online. 

Once we had restocked the detergent (a couple of weeks later), we completed the drive and I moved on to the patio. Now I knew what I was doing, I whizzed through most the patio in about half an hour (the space is not much smaller than the drive) and used the final step with the multi-jet lance to do the stones around the top of the walls (our garden is multi-level). There is something extremely satisfying about a job like this, where results are visible straight away and once I had finished the main section of the patio, it showed up just how dirty the rest of the patio was.

Cleaning glass and other objects

After cleaning the patio, the pressure washer had kicked up some dirt which sullied the surrounding doors and windows. Following the instructions on the app for glass cleaning, I used the multi-jet lance on the flat setting to rinse the doors and windows. This setting can also be used to clean conservatories and green houses.  

Cleaning other objects
In addition to the areas I’ve already mentioned, the app has step-by-step instructions for pipe cleaning, cars, bicycles, wooden floor areas, stairs, motorcycles and facades. I will definitely be using the pressure washer to do our cars and the steps in the garden and have already bought some car cleaning detergent, ready for the job.

Is this pressure washer easy to use?

Once I had refreshed my memory, the pressure washer is very simple to assemble, operate and is extremely effective. It was only after I had completed the drive that I fully read the ‘How-to guide’, which I would recommend doing. Each page shows simplified instruction illustrations for areas to clean (which are not as helpful as the app), but there is a QR code to scan on each page which takes you to a relevant web page on the Karcher website, with an application video. This was very handy indeed and a quick way to get an idea of what to do or refresh your memory. And if you don't know how to use a pressure washer, the app guidance is much appreciated as you work.

One of the only issues my partner had when using the pressure washer, is he found the T7 T-Racer handle a bit too short. He is 6ft 4, so felt he was stooping to run it over the ground. He also found that the detergent spread better without using the multi-jet lance head. By removing the head, you get a wider spray which covers a larger area.

Additional features

The Karcher K 7 Premium Smart Control pressure washer has clearly been built with ease of use in mind. The plug ‘n’ clean option with the detergent is great, as it controls how much detergent is pulled through the machine, so you don’t have to do it manually. The telescopic handle makes transporting the machine easy and when you’ve finished with the machine and accessories, the integrated hose reel and onboard storage keeps everything tidy.

Does a pressure washer really need a smart app?

The app ensures you are ready to clean any object or surface, plus there are FAQs to check any issues and a link to the online shop, to see where you can buy detergent, or accessories. The step-by-step guidance is great for making sure you get the most out of your pressure washer and maximise the cleaning.

However there are a couple of fixes that could be made to the app itself. As we ran out of detergent when we tackled the drive, it was another two weeks before we attempted to finish the job. Following an early morning visit to B&Q for Karcher detergent, I then opened the app, ready to set up the power washer again. I had forgotten some of the setup instructions, such as how to connect the water supply, so I was hoping the app would provide this information. Unfortunately, it doesn’t, so I had to refer to the instruction manual. The other issue I found was that I had to reconnect my phone to the pressure washer and add on the accessories I had again. 

While doing this, I noticed that the app gives you instructions dependent on what accessories you have. Without the T7 T-Racer, the driveway can be done in nine steps, using just the lance. It also gives you options on how to do it without detergent. I do think the app could do with a few improvements, such as providing basic set up information and giving more detailed instructions on some parts. 

How does it rate online?

It’s not a surprise that this machine rates very highly, with most reviewers giving it five stars. Many commend it on how easy it is to use and what an effective job it does. Some complain that it is loud, but I would say it’s no noisier than some lawn mowers and I don’t feel as if it disturbed my neighbours.

Another positive point from many reviewers who compare it to other pressure washers, is how quickly is gets the job done, with some commenting that it takes half the time it usually takes them. So, not only are you paying extra for the app help, but for the added oomph, too.

As this pressure washer is Karcher’s most powerful and premium model, there is a large price tag to accompany it and it is the most expensive of Karcher’s machines. However, it doesn’t seem as if any other pressure washers on the market have smart technology and I would argue that it is worth every penny, due to how versatile and effective it is. I’m looking forward to what I can clean next! 

About this review and our reviewer

Bethan Davis works in PR for the tourism industry, but it currently on maternity leave after having her second child. She was sent the Kärcher K7 Premium Smart Control pressure washer in March 2021 and tested it over several weeks on her brick driveway and stone block patio.

The Bosch UniversalGrassCut 18–26 cordless grass trimmer features telescopic height adjustment and an ergonomic V-shaped handle. Lightweight and with an automatic feed for the spool line, it’s been designed to make trimming lawns, borders and edges, effortless. 

Having pretty much left our split-level garden to its own devices since October, the top two lawns were becoming rather unruly. With no clear edges they were certainly in need of trimming before we could attempt to attack them with the lawn mower. Our bottom lawn (the largest of the three), is maintained by a robotic lawn mower, which is great, but doesn’t mow closely around the borders, bottom fence line or steps. Therefore, this provided another challenge for the UniversalGrassCut.

See how it did prepping my garden for summer, and find out whether it deserves a place on the list of the best strimmers.

Bosch UniversalGrassCut 18–26 cordless grass trimmer specifications:

• Power type: 18V 2.5Ah Li-ion battery
• Battery life: 40 mins
• Charging time: 1 hour
• Best for: trimming and edging
• Cutting width: 26cm
• Weight: 2.7kg
• Noise Level: A-rated

Getting started

We moved into our house a year ago, and it’s the first house we’ve owned that has had a lawn. Therefore, apart from watching my dad get angry, every time his old corded strimmer hit a rock, I have had no experience with strimmers and the Bosch UniversalGrassCut was the first one I’ve ever used.

Firstly, I breathed a huge sigh of relief when I unpacked the box and found only one instruction manual. Almost all the recent appliances I have purchased come with at least four or five manuals, so it was nice to see everything condensed into one A5 booklet. 

After reading through the safety instructions and noting that eye and ear protection should be worn, plus kids and pets should be kept at a good distance, I moved on to setting up the machine. As well as written instructions, there are labelled diagrams relating to each stage of setup in the back of booklet, which proved to be useful. 

I quickly skimmed over the assembly instructions and read that the battery needed to be charged, which I did so promptly. I’d have listed this as the first step (rather than after assembling the strimmer), so anyone following the instructions step by step could save a bit of time. All I had to do to assemble the strimmer was mount the protection guard, secure it with a screwdriver, fold out the handle, adjust the telescopic working position, mount the wheel and fit the spool of cutting cable. 

This was fairly straightforward until it came to fitting the spool, as this is not listed as an initial step in the assembly instructions. It talks about operation, before it mentions mounting the spool and even then, it’s written as if there is already a spool in place. 

This was the only step I struggled with and had to double check with my partner that I was doing everything right. He agreed that this was confusing, and we couldn’t work out whether we needed to pull any line out of the spool or assemble anything. After looking through the pictures again, we found that the spool was all ready to go as it came and all we needed to do was click it into place. Setup took 20 minutes, but it would have been a lot quicker without the spool issues.

What is the Bosch UniversalGrassCut strimmer like to use?

Once the battery is charged, it’s easy to slot it in and you’re ready to go. It has a safety lock button which requires pressing, before then pressing the on/off switch, which is a trigger on the bike-like handles. You keep the trigger pressed to operate the strimmer.

Lawn trimming
The UniversalGrassCut has three different cutting positions and there is a foot pedal to switch between each. This is slightly flimsy and it’s not completely clear which position the strimmer is in without moving it through all three positions, to be sure. 

For lawn trimming, the strimmer must be set at the highest position (a 48-degree angle) and once set, it’s as easy as moving the strimmer from left to right. The wheel ensures that you do not get too close to any walls, trees or anything that protrudes out of your lawn (bird tables, washing lines etc). The wheel was useful in our garden as we have walls splitting the three levels, so I could use the wheel to guide the strimmer along the wall-edge and the strimmer did a great job of trimming the grass, right up to the wall.

The grass trimmer has been designed to be ergonomically comfortable and to be used with a natural, upright posture. I found this to be true and trimmed the lawns with comfort and ease. However, my partner is 6ft 4in and he found that the telescopic handle did not come up high enough and felt he stooped over when using it. This is something taller gardeners might want to bear in mind.

The strimmer did a good job of trimming the lawn and easily cut through large clumps of grass, weeds and dead plants.

Edging
To create nice, clean edges for the lawn, the foot pedal needs to be pressed so the strimmer sits at a 36-degree angle. This is the hardest position to achieve and you need to ensure it clicks into place right in the middle. 

The instructions are a tad confusing here and it took a bit of trial and error to get the desired effect. It says to 'guide the trimmer along the edge of the lawn' and 'by using the wheel you avoid contact with solid surfaces'. You also have to flip the handle 180 degrees and turn the strimmer clockwise to get the correct working position, so the wheel has contact with the ground as you roll it along the edge. I found that you needed to work out how far away from the edge the wheel needed to be to cut a straight line where you wanted it. In our lawn, the grass has made its way into the paving in some areas, so I could cut a line through the clumps of grass to show where the edge of the lawn should be. We will have to remove the grass outside that perimeter by hand.

Once you have the hang of it, it did quite an effective job and worked well around the top of the walls, edges of the steps and where the lawn meets the patio. 

• Check out our selection of lawn edging ideas for those awkward lawn-meets-patio areas

Cutting in awkward places
The final cutting position is for trimming around trees, plants and hard-to-reach places, such as under benches. For us, this feature came in useful for cutting around the fence posts at the bottom of our garden and a silver birch. The foot pedal sets the strimmer at 24 degrees and the wheel acts as a plant protector, shielding plants, whilst still achieving a close trim.

Noise
As noted in the instructions, ear protection is advised. With a large, open garden, I found that the Bosch UniversalGrassCut was no noisier than a lawn mower. I would be mindful of using it when I know my neighbours are relaxing, or for long periods of time.

Ease of use

Overall, for me, once I had set the strimmer up and worked out what to do with the spool, the strimmer was very easy to use and I was impressed that I managed to trim almost the whole garden in one go, which took about 40 minutes. I recharged the battery fully and then completed the edging which took a further 10 minutes and there was plenty of battery left. Bosch claims that the battery is powerful enough to allow the strimmer to trim the edges of eight tennis courts in one charge. I think you would have to be well practiced at using the machine for this to be true!

A bonus for anyone who owns any other cordless Bosch appliances, is the 18V battery is part of their 'power for all alliance', which means the battery is interchangeable between tools, whether this be drills, mowers or vacuums. We unfortunately do not own any of these, but I would consider purchasing other Bosch appliances with this battery system, especially as I am impressed with how well the UniversalGrassCut works. 

Additional features

The plant protector wheel is a great feature that not all strimmers have. Although this was my first time trimming the lawn and borders, no plants were harmed unintentionally. It makes edging easier too and I imagine using a strimmer without a wheel guide would cause more wear on the spool line.

The IntelliFeed system for the line is also hugely beneficial, as it automatically rolls off the line as necessary, retaining the cutting diameter. This means that you don’t have to keep stopping to manually adjust the spool, which is both safer and more efficient.

How does it rate online?

The majority of reviews for the UniversalGrassCut are positive, with many praising how lightweight and easy to use the appliance is. Many also commend the battery length and how well it copes with trimming a variety of plants, from long grass to nettles.

Some reviewers also own other Bosch products with the battery share option and were pleased with how well the strimmer works alongside their other Bosch tools. 

The only negative remarks echo those of my partner in that the telescopic handle simply does not go long enough and some say the model feels a bit cheap and ‘plasticky’, to which I would disagree. If the model was made of other materials, it would be a lot heavier and more difficult to use.

The average ratings are between four and five stars, making it rate well against similar models which are a similar price. I would highly recommend the Bosch UniversalGrassCut 18–26 cordless grass trimmer.

About this review and our reviewer

This cordless grass trimmer was tested by reluctant gardener Bethan Davis, a PR and events officer who lives in the Midlands. She has just had her second child and with two kids under the age of five, a pristine garden isn't always easy to maintain. 

She put the strimmer through its paces in a medium-large garden with lots of borders to contend with and an awkward fence adjoining a field. The garden also has several levels and lots of walls, so a strimmer is needed for lots of areas a mower can't reach.